Articles by alphabetic order
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
 Ā Ī Ñ Ś Ū Ö Ō
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0


Difference between revisions of "Aaa"

From Tibetan Buddhist Encyclopedia
Jump to navigation Jump to search
Line 1: Line 1:
arguing, namely that the concluding remark on [[dukkha]] might be “ein
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
metaphy sischer Zusatz ” 1 \
+
 
 +
that in the M [[sutta]] the [[Buddha’s]] original defence of his position
 +
either never existed or has been lost. There is no {{Wiki|evidence}} that a
 +
[[monk]] ever defended this aspect of the [[Teaching]] in a [[debate]], but
 +
then the [[suttas]] are primarily about the [[Buddha]] and only oc¬
 +
casionally about {{Wiki|individual}} [[monks]].
  
Exit KOEPPEN, at least in this question, on the basis of an ex cathedra
+
The right to utter a [[lion’s roar]] is not limited to the [[Tatha]]-
[[judgement]]. A questionable [[tradition]] of translating this remark in [[books]]
+
[[gata]], or to those situations where the [[Buddha]] permits his [[monks]]  
that pretend to deal with the [[Buddha’s teaching]] has been established here
+
to proclaim certain [[subjects]] in this way. A [[monk]] may also utter a
and is still flourishing. To arrive at his [[judgement]] against KOEPPEN,  
+
[[lions]] roar’ on his [[own]] initiative. In the [[Nikayas]] this [[monk]] is
OLDENBERG had to forget (or to ignore) his [[own]] edition of the Malta -
+
always [[Sariputta]].  
[[vagga]]. He showed moreover, that he had not the slightest inkling of the
 
problem that vedand y the second of these ‘Objekte des Ergreifens’, is
 
often explained as consisting of [[pleasant]], [[unpleasant]] and [[neutral]] [[feeling]]  
 
and that [[pleasant]] and [[neutral]] [[feeling]] cannot be characterized as ‘[[Leiden]]
 
and only in a slightly different [[sense]] as ‘Icidvoll’. 14
 
  
 +
In an upsurge of [[faith]], [[Sariputta]] proclaims to the [[Buddha]],
  
H. “Koppcn (1, S.222, Annul) findet in dicscn Ictztcn Worlcn cincn *[[mela]]-  
+
* Lord, such is the [[faith]] l have in the [[Exalted One]] — Dhagava,
physischcn Zusatz* zum urspriinglichcn Text der vicr Wahrhcitcn, ohne alien
+
that (I know) there has not been, will not be and is not found
Grund. So viel metaphysischc Terminologic, wie in dicscn VVortcn liegt, hat der
+
today any [[samana]] or [[brahmana]] who is better than the [[Exalted One]], or has more [[higher knowledge]] with [[respect]] to the [[Highest]]
Buddhlsmus von jehcr bcscssen.
+
[[Enlightenment]]’ 73 . The [[Buddha]] acknowledges [[Sariputta’s]] remark,
 +
“This {{Wiki|speech}} you have uttered, [[Sariputta]], is [[noble]], bull-like. A
 +
[[lion’s roar]], seized with {{Wiki|certainty}}, is uttered’ 74 . Thus the [[Buddha]]
 +
himself categorises this utterance as a ‘[[lion’s roar]]’. The [[Buddha]]
 +
immediately challenges [[Sariputta]] on his capacity to make such a
 +
remark, forcing hint to admit that he has not known all {{Wiki|past}}
 +
[[Buddhas]], does not know all [[future Buddhas]], and does not even
 +
know the {{Wiki|present}} [[Buddha]] to the required extent to be able to
 +
* support his claim. [[Sariputta]], however, is not daunted. He asserts
 +
that he can support his claim, which he has made because he has
  
14, Already V.GLASENAPP, in his ‘Nachvvort* to OLDENBEKG’s [[Buddha]] [1959: 1
 
474] hinted at this problem, by pointing to the Rahogatasutta (SN no.36.11),
 
though his approach is quite unhislorical. There, replying to a question, the
 
[[Buddha]] admits (SN IV 216.20) he has [[taught]] both: there arc three kinds of
 
[[feelings]], [[pleasant]], [[unpleasant]] and [[neutral]], and: whatever one [[feels]] belongs to the
 
[[unpleasant]] {yam kind vedayitam tam dukkhasmim). But “the [second] statement
 
has been made by me having in [[mind]] that satlkhdrd as such arc [[impermanent]]
 
(tnayd sarlkhdrdnam yeva aniccatam sandhaya bhdsitam )*\ Sec Lambert
 
SCHMITHAUSEN, “Zur buddhistischen Lehrc von der drcifachcn Lcidhaftigkcif,
 
ZDMG (Supplement 111.2) 1977: 918-931. J
 
  
 +
73 D ^S. Ill 99. Cf. D II 82f = S V 159. both of which only include (14)
 +
below. S V 159 includes the [[Buddha's]] final injunction (see below) that this text
 +
should regularly be recited to converts ([[monks]], [[nuns]] and lay-followers).
  
PETER SKILLING
+
74 D iii 95; tr. T.W. and C/VF. [[Wikipedia:Thomas William Rhys Davids|Rhys Davids]], [[Dialogues of the Buddha]] (DB)
 +
111 95
  
The Advent of [[Theravada Buddhism]]
 
to Mainland South-east {{Wiki|Asia}}
 
  
 +
Manne — The Lion’s Koar
  
In the {{Wiki|present}} paper I examine {{Wiki|evidence}} for the school-affiliation of the
+
seen in accordance with [[Dhamma]] 75 , arguing through the use of a
[[early Buddhism]] of mainland South-east {{Wiki|Asia}}, in the first millenium of the
+
simile that he has seen what is important.  
[[Common Era]]. 1 Is the {{Wiki|evidence}} sufficient to establish that this school was
 
the TheravSda, and, if so, when and from where did it arrive in the
 
region?
 
  
For the [[Theravada]] of Ceylon—or more precisely, for the MahSvihSra
+
The content of [[Sariputta’s]] defence of his [[lion’s roar]] is a
school of the Theravada—wo have the history as presented in the two
+
lengthy itemisation of what all the [[Buddhas]], {{Wiki|past}}, {{Wiki|present}} and  
famous-chronicles, the Dlpavan.isa and [[Mahavamsa]] . [[Information]] may
+
{{Wiki|future}}, have achieved. The details, in as brief a [[form]] as possible,
also be gleaned from references to historical events embedded in the
+
are:
commentaries of Euddhaghosa and others, from {{Wiki|inscriptions}} in Old [[Sin]]-
 
hala and [[Sanskrit]], from {{Wiki|archaeological}} and {{Wiki|iconographical}} {{Wiki|evidence}}, and
 
froniChinese sources—in some cases first hand, such as that supplied by
 
the redoutable [[pilgrim]] [[Fa-hien]]. Altogether, we have at least in broad out¬
 
line a continuous history of [[Theravada]] in [[Ceylon]] from its inception up to
 
the {{Wiki|present}} day.
 
  
Outside of [[Ceylon]], the history of [[Theravada]] is obscure. For mainlan d
+
(14) i. ‘That all [[Buddhas]], "after they have abandoned the five hin¬
[[India]] we have almost no [[information]] at all. There are some—but not
+
drances and after they have weakened [[corruptions]] of the
many—references to [[Theravadin]] [[doctrines]] in the works of other schools, 2
+
[[mind]] by means of [[wisdom]], being possessed (then) of
but the historical information—such as that provided by {{Wiki|inscriptions}} or by
+
hearts well established in the four exercises for setting up
the {{Wiki|Chinese}} [[pilgrims]] [[Hsiian-tsang]] and I-ching—is at best sketchy.  
+
[[mindfulness]] and having thoroughly developed the seven
 +
constituents of [[knowledge]], have wholly [[awakened]] (or will
 +
wholly [[awaken]]) to tne uttermost [[awakening]]" 76 .  
  
For the South-east {{Wiki|Asia}} of the early period we do not have any histori¬
+
ii. ‘That on one occasion when he came to the [[Buddha]] to
cal records comparable to those of [[Ceylon]]: no indigenous chronicles.
+
hear [[Dhamma]], the [[Buddha]] [[taught]] it in such a way that
 +
[[Sariputta]] [[attained]] [[perfection]] in one particular [[dhamma]],
  
 +
namely, [[faith]] in the [[Teacher]] 77 .
  
This is a revised version of a paper given at the ficole franfaise d’Extrfimc-
+
iii. ‘That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to the [[skilful]]
{{Wiki|Orient}}, {{Wiki|Phnom Penh}}, 6 July 1996. The title was inspired by Luce 1974.  
+
[[dhammas]] is unsurpassable by any [[samana]] or [[brahmana]],
 +
these [[skilful]] [[dhammas]] being the [[Four Foundations of Mindfulness]], the [[Four Right Exertions]], the [[Four Bases of Psychic Power]], the Five Controlling {{Wiki|Principles}}, the [[Five Powers]], the Seven Constituents of [[Knowledge]], and the
 +
[[Noble Eightfold Path]]. In this [[connection]], a [[bhikkhu]],
 +
having destroyed the [[intoxicants]], [[lives]] in the [[attainment]] of
 +
having [[experienced]] for himself through his [[own]] [[higher Knowledge]] in this very [[life]] the [[release]] of the [[mind]], the
  
1. That is, I do not discuss the [[Buddhism]] of peninsular and insular South-east
 
{{Wiki|Asia}}, or that of CampI (the coastal regions of present-day central and southern
 
[[Vietnam]]). In none of these areas is there any early {{Wiki|evidence}} for TheravSda
 
[[Buddhism]].
 
  
2. See Skilling 1987,1993a and b, and 1994 for some examples from [[Tibetan]]
+
75 dhammanvayo vidiio. D III 100.  
sources.  
 
  
whether in [[Pali]], [[Sanskrit]], or in vernaculars survive. The few extant his¬
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
torical {{Wiki|inscriptions}} dcrnot give us any continuous history, and {{Wiki|Chinese}}
 
reports tell us little about the type of [[Buddhism]] practised on the mainland.
 
  
[[Pali]] Inscriptions from [[Burma]] and [[Siam]]
 
  
The main {{Wiki|evidence}} [[lor]] the school-affiliation of [[early Buddhism]] in [[South]]¬
+
Manne — [[The Lion’s Roar]]  
[[east]] {{Wiki|Asia}} comes from [[Pali]] {{Wiki|inscriptions}}. These are known from two main
 
areas: the [[Pyu]] {{Wiki|kingdom}} of Srik$etra in the vicinity of Prome in the lower
 
Irrawaddy valley of [[Burma]], and the Mon {{Wiki|kingdom}} of Dvaravatl in the
 
Chao Phraya basin of [[Siam]]. 3 The {{Wiki|inscriptions}} from [[Burma]] are engraved
 
on {{Wiki|gold}} plates (fashioned in imitation of palm-leaf [[manuscripts]]), a {{Wiki|silver}}
 
reliquary {[[stupa]]), terracotta tablets, and stone slabs. The {{Wiki|inscriptions}}
 
from [[Siam]] are engraved on stone dhammacakkas , [[octagonal]] pillars, stone
 
slabs, and clay tablets and reliquaries. The [[script]] used in both cases is
 
similar, and may be described as a variety of the [[South Indian]] [[Pallava]]
 
[[script]]. 4 The Srlksetra {{Wiki|inscriptions}} are dated to the 5th to 7th centuries CE,
 
the [[Siamese]] {{Wiki|inscriptions}} to the 6th to 8th centuries: that is, they are
 
broadly contemporary. 5
 
  
(1) Inscriptions from the region of £rik$ctra: 6
 
  
—the ye dhammd hetuppabhavd vers s {VinayaMahdvagga, 140.28-29) ; v
+
[[release]] through [[wisdom]] that is free from [[intoxicants]] 78 .  
—the iti pi so bhagavd [[formula]] (cf. Dhajagga-sutta , SN1219.31-33);
 
  
—the svdkkhato [[bhagavata]] [[dhammo]] [[formula]] (cf. Dhajagga-sutta , SN I
+
iv. 'That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to the description
220 . 1 - 2 );' *
+
of the [[sphere]] of [[perception]] 79 is unsurpassable.  
  
 +
v. ‘That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to {{Wiki|conception}} 80
 +
({{Wiki|gestation}} and [[birth]]) is unsurpassable. (The text here shows
 +
that {{Wiki|conception}}, {{Wiki|gestation}} and the [[quality]] of the [[birth]] of
 +
the {{Wiki|foetus}} arc meant.)
  
3. In this paper I set aside the historical questions (of, for example, clironoiogy
+
vi. ‘That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to the ability of  
and geographical extent) [[attached]] to the names of these two {{Wiki|kingdoms}}, and
+
mind-reading 81 is unsurpassable.  
(with not a little reluctance) use the names as a [[Wikipedia:Convention (norm)|conventional]] shorthand.  
 
  
4. The [[script]] of the [[Pyu]] {{Wiki|inscriptions}} has in the {{Wiki|past}} been variously described as
+
vii. That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to the [[attainment]] of
[[Kadamba]], Telcgu-Canara, or Grantha: for a welcome reappraisal see Stargardt
+
[[seeing]] 82 is unsurpassable. (The text here describes four le¬
1995,204.  
+
vels of [[attainment]] with regard to [[meditation]] on the [[body]].)
  
5. For the dating of the former see Stargardt 1995, for the [[latter]] e. g. Bauer
+
viii. ‘That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to the [[typology]] of  
1991 and Skilling forthcoming (a). It should be stressed that the {{Wiki|inscriptions}} do
+
[[people]] 82 is unsurpassable. (The text here describes seven
not bear any dates, and that those assigned to them are tentative and approxi¬
+
[[characteristic]] ways of [[attaining]] [[release]], [[vimutti]]).  
mate. A comprehensive comparative palacographical analysis of the $rik$etra
 
with the Dvaravafi corpus remains a desideratum.  
 
  
6. For details see Ray 1939,41-52; Luce 1974, 125-27; and Stargardt 1995.  
+
ix. ‘That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to the (qualities of)
Most of the texts are brought together in U Tha Myat 1963. Note that several
+
[[concentration of the mind]] 84 is unsurpassable. (The text
of the passages arc known from more than one inscription.  
+
here describes the seven constituents of [[knowledge]], [[satta bojjhanga]]).  
  
 +
x. ‘That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with’regard to modes of
 +
progress 82 is unsurpassable.
  
SKILLING 95
+
xi. ‘That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to conduct in
 +
[[conversation]] 86 is unsurpassable.
  
—the [[formula]] of [[dependent arising]] ( [[paticcasamuppada]] : cf. [[Vinaya]]  
+
xii. That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to the [[ethical]]  
Mahdvagga , 1 1.10—2.1); 7
+
conduct of man 87 is unsurpassable.  
  
—[[stanzas]] sung by [[Sakka]], Lord of the [[Gods]], in praise of the [[Buddha]] enter¬
+
xiii. - That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to the .variety (of
ing [[Rajagaha]] ( [[Vinaya]] Mahdvagga , 138.15-23,29-30);
 
  
—the maggdn atthaixgiko settho verse ( [[Dhammapada]] 273);
+
the results) of instruction 88 is unsurpassable. (The text here
 +
describes the [[Buddha’s]] [[knowledge]] with regard to the stage
 +
an {{Wiki|individual}} will reach on receiving a particular ([[form]] of)
 +
instruction.)  
  
—verses from three popular paritta-s: the MangalaRatana -, and Mora-
+
xiv. That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to [[knowledge]]
[[sutta-s]]\% ,
+
concerning the tstage of) [[release]] of other [[people]] 89 is
 +
unsurpassable.
  
—the four confidences ( vesdrajja ) of a [[Buddha]] (MN I 71.32; AN II 8,
+
xv. That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to {{Wiki|eternalism}} 90 is
penult);
+
unsurpassable
  
—the 37 factors conducive to [[awakening]] ( bodhipakkhiya-dhammdY ;
+
xvi. That the.Buddha’s [[teaching]] with regard to the [[knowledge]]  
  
—a list of miscellaneous numerically grouped items, in ascending order;
+
that enables {he [[remembrance]] of former life-times’* is
—a list of the 14 [[Buddha]] nana-s (cf. Patisambhiddmagga 1 133.19-30);
+
unsurpassable
—a fragment of a commentary on [[paticcasamuppada]] (cf. [[Vibhanga]] 144-  
 
45);
 
  
—the opening of the [[matika]] : kusald [dhammd aku]sald dhammd
+
xvii. That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to the [[knowledge]]  
abydka[td\ dhammd (cf. [[Dhammasangani]] 1.4);
 
  
—a fragment giving two of the 24 [[conditions]]: [adhi\patipaccayo arum-
+
regarding the decease and [[rebirth]] of [[beings]] 92 is unsur¬
tarapaccayo ;
+
passable
  
 +
xviii. That the [[Buddha’s teaching]] with regard to varieties of
 +
[[supernormal power]] 93 (i.e. the [[noble]] and the [[ignoble]]) is
 +
unsurpassable.
  
7. In addition to the [[paticcasamuppada]] inscribed on {{Wiki|gold}} plates from
+
xix. That with regard to the varieties of [[supernormal power]] 94
$rik$etra, the [[Vinaya]] Mahdvagga version is known from a stone slab from'
 
Kunzeik, Shwegyin township, [[Pegu]]: see [[Aung]] Thaw 1978, 111. As far as I
 
know this handsome and well-preserved inscription has not been published, but
 
fortunately most of it can be descried from the photograph at [[Aung]] Thaw p.
 
110. It opens (the readings here are preliminary) with the.introductory (l)
 
t(e)na samayena [[buddho]] bhaga(vd) uruveldyam viharati na(j)j(d) (nerahja-
 
rdya? unclear) [2] tire (or tire ?) bodhirukkhamule pathamdbhisatnbuddho atha
 
kho [[bhagava]] . . ., followed by the full [[paticcasamuppada]] [[formula]], both anu-
 
loma (lines 5-9) and [[patiloma]] (lines 9-14). The [[latter]] opens with the [[phrase]]
 
avijjaya tv eva asesavirdganirodhd , [[characteristic]] of the [[Theravadin]] ([[Pali]])
 
version only, and not known in versions of other schools, such as the
 
(Mula)Sarvastivadins or [[Lokottaravadins]], or from the {{Wiki|Prakrit}} {{Wiki|inscriptions}} from
 
Devnlmori and {{Wiki|Ratnagiri}}, all of which open with equivalents of avijjd-nirodhd .
 
The patilomg. is followed by the yada have pdtubhavanti dhammd verse (lines
 
15-18), known also from {{Wiki|inscriptions}} from [[Siam]]. The last two lines continue
 
with the prose text of the Mahdvagga—atha kho (bhaga)va tfattiyd) maj(jh)
 
imam (yd)mam [[paticca]] — suggesting that the slab is part of a longer inscription.
 
For the Devnlmori and {{Wiki|Ratnagiri}} {{Wiki|inscriptions}} see von Hinuber 1985; for a
 
suggestion that the former might be Vatslputriya or Sammariya, see Skilling
 
forthcoming (c).
 
  
8. For these see Skilling forthcoming (b).
 
  
—a list of seven of the eight vipassand fidna-s (cf. [[Visuddhimagga]]
+
78 Ibid.  
XXI.1).  
 
  
(2) Inscriptions from the Chao Phraya basin: 9
+
79 cyatana-pa/'inaui. D HI 102.
—the ye [[dhamma]] hetuppabhava verse;
 
  
—the [[formula]] of [[dependent arising]] ( [[paticca-samuppada]] );
+
80 gabbavakkanti. ibid.
  
—an {{Wiki|enumeration}} of the [[four truths]] of the [[noble]] ( [[ariya-sacca]] ), the [[twelve links of dependent arising]] ( [[paticcasamuppada]] ), and the 37 factors
+
81 udesana vidha. L) 111 103.
conducive to [[awakening]] ( [[bodhipakkhiya-dhamma]] ), inscribed together
 
on a rectangular stone bar from [[Nakhon Pathom]]; 10
 
—extracts from the prose [[Dhammacakkappavattana-sutta]], the “first ser¬
 
mon" spoken by the [[Buddha]] in the [[Deer Park]] at [[Sarnath]], found on
 
stone dhammacakkas ; 11
 
  
—the three yada have pSlubhavanti [[dhamma]] verses ( [[Vinaya]] Mahdvagga,
+
82 Jassana-samapalli. D III 104.  
12.3-26);
 
  
—the anekajaiisamsQran) verses ( Dliammapada 153—54);
+
83 puggala-pahhalti. D III 105.
  
—the [[dukkham]] dukkhasamuppadam verse ( [[Dhammapada]] 191); 12
+
84 [[padhana]]. D III *106.
—the abhiiiheyyam abhihhatam verse ( [[Suttanipata]] 558);
 
  
—fragments of the 16 [[senses]] ( [[attha]] ) of the [[four truths]] (cf.  
+
85 patipadu. ibid.  
Paiisambhidamagga 19.31-20.6), 13
 
  
— nabddhakam yato [[dukkham]] ..., non-canonical verses on the [[four truths]]
 
(cited at [[Visuddhimagga]] XVI.25);
 
  
— sacca-kicca-kata-hdnam .... a non-canonical verse on the twelve
+
86 bhassa-samacara. ibid,
aspects ( dvadasakara ) of the [[four truths]] (cited in the Pathama-
 
[[sambodhi]] and Sdratthasamuccaya );
 
  
—three verses from the Telakatdha-gdthd . 14
+
87 purisa-sila-samacara, ibid.  
  
The {{Wiki|evidence}} of the {{Wiki|inscriptions}} may be examined from two aspects: lan¬
+
88 anusasana-vidha. D 111 107.  
guage and contents. The [[language]] of both the §rlk$etra and Dvaravat!
 
palatographs is [[Pali]]. Is the use of [[Pali]] sufficient to establish the presence
 
of the [[Theravada]]? Or could another [[Buddhist]] school have also transmitted
 
  
9. Most of the {{Wiki|inscriptions}} may be found in Supaphan na Bangchang 2529
+
89 para-pug gal ;a-vunutti-hdna. D 111 [[108]].  
(1986), 15-40. As in the case of the Srik$etra {{Wiki|inscriptions}}, several of the
 
parages are known from more than one inscription.  
 
  
10. See Skilling 1992.  
+
90 sassaia-vddesu. ibid.  
  
11. See Skilling forthcoming (a) for references.  
+
91 , pubbe-nivasanussati-nanp. D HI 110.  
  
12. See Skilling 1991 and 1992.  
+
92 ; sattanam cutupapala-hdna. D 111 111.  
  
13. Sec Skilling forthcoming (a) for this and the two following passages.  
+
93 [[iddhi-vidha]]. D III 112.  
  
14. See references below. The inscription is from Prachin Buri, and thus out¬
+
94 [[iddhi-vidha]]. D III 1!3.  
side of the Chao Phraya valley proper.  
 
  
  
SKILLING 97
+
Manne — The [[Lion's Roar]]
  
 +
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
  
its [[sacred]] writ in PSli, and have been responsible for the {{Wiki|inscriptions}}?
+
ihe [[Buddha]] is unsurpassable. There is nothing hie does not
From an early date, [[Buddhist tradition]] [[recognized]] {{Wiki|dialect}} as one of the
+
know”, and no other [[samana]] or [[brahmana]] [[knows]] it better,  
key distinguishing features of the different schools ( uikaya ). In the sec¬
+
xx. That the [[Buddha]] has achieved whatever can be achieved
ond half of the first millenium of the [[Common Era]], [[tradition]] spoke of four
+
by a [[faithful]] clansman who is steadfast and has aroused .
main schools, each transmitting its [[canon]] in a different Indie {{Wiki|dialect}}*
+
his energies, by a man’s capacity to hear burdens, (his) '
(MOla)SarvastivSdins, who used [[Sanskrit]]; MahSsSnighikas, who used an
+
endeavour, [[energy]] and steadfastness’ 96 — The text here
[[intermediate]] [[language]]; Simmatlyas, who used [[Apabhramsa]]; and  
+
specifies that the [[Buddha]] is not [[attached]] to what is low nor
[[Sthaviras]] (that is, [[Theras]]), who used PaisScI. is The [[tradition]] is confirmed
+
to [[asceticism]], and that he can attain the [[four jhanas]] at will.  
by the {{Wiki|distinctive}} and consistent {{Wiki|linguistic}} features of available texts of
 
the schools. On this {{Wiki|evidence}} I conclude that it is unlikely that another
 
school would have used PSli, and that the use of that [[language]] in the
 
{{Wiki|inscriptions}} is a strong indication of TheravSdin [[activity]] in the region.  
 
  
What about the contents of the {{Wiki|inscriptions}}? It is true that the [[Wikipedia:canonical|canonical]]  
+
[[Sariputta]] concludes his argument by saying that he has, heard
extracts—such as the various [[formulas]], the Dhammacakkappavaltana -
+
from the [[Buddha]] himself that there have been {{Wiki|equal}} [[Buddhas]] in
[[sutta]], and the verses—belong to the common heritage of'Buddhism: but
+
former times and that there will again be [[Buddhas]] {{Wiki|equal}} to him¬
our {{Wiki|epigraphs}} give them in their TheravSdin recensions, and they agree
+
[[self]], but that is is impossible for two {{Wiki|equal}} [[Buddhas]] to [[exist]] at
very closely indeed with the received [[transmission]] that we know today. >4
+
the same time.  
The “extracts" from the Abhidhammc and Pafisambhidamagga are rather
 
more indicative. As fai^as is known, the seven [[books]] of the TheravSdin
 
Abhidhdmma [[Pitaka]] are unique to that school, and employ a unique sys¬
 
tem and technical vocabulary. The $rlk$etra {{Wiki|inscriptions}} preserve frag-
 
ments with counterparts in the [[Matika]], the [[Vibhanga]], and the list of 24
 
[[conditions]] ([[paccaya]] ), all of which may be described as specifically
 
TheravSdin. Inscriptions from both Srik$etra and [[Siam]] employ technical
 
categories knowu from the Pa.tisambhiddmagga (whether or not they are
 
actual extracts is not clear), an [[ancient]] commentary transmitted in the
 
Khuddaka-nikdya of the PSli [[Canon]], and unique to the TheravSdin school.  
 
  
The non-canonical {{Wiki|inscriptions}} provide further convincing {{Wiki|evidence}} for
+
The qualities attributed to the [[Buddha]] as Dliagava in [[Sari]]-  
a TheravSdin presence. The Sriksetra list of seven [[vipassana]] nd/ia-s has a
+
putta’s [[lion’s roar]] bear remarkably little resemblance to the points
parallel in the [[Visuddhimagga]], and an inscribed [[octagonal]] pillar from U
+
claimed by the [[Buddha]], in the [[name]] of [[Tathagata]], to be his
Tapao gives a set of verses on the [[four truths]] that are cited in that work
+
[[powers]] and confidences. Only in points (xiv), (xvi) and (xvii) of  
and in other works of the school. 17 The [[Visuddhimagga]] is, of course, one
+
quote (14) is there any correspondance and this is with the list of  
of the most representative and most authoritative texts of the MahSvihSra
+
quote (8) above, regarding points (vii), (viii) and (ix) respectively.
  
15. See Skilling forthcoming (c) for references. The [[Theravadins]] [[traditionally]]  
+
I have argued 97 that the collection of [[suttas]] now known as
describe the [[language]] of their texts as [[Magadhi]], “the [[language]] of [[Magadha]]":
+
[[Dlgha Nikaya]] was originally a collection of [[suttas]] grouped
see von Hinflber 1994.  
+
together through their effectiveness in gaining converts and lay
 +
support (and that for that [[reason]] it is entertaining). The ending of
 +
this [[sutta]] shows clearly its {{Wiki|propaganda}} purposes. After [[Sariputta]]  
 +
has finished, a [[monk]], [[Udayin]], remarks that the [[Tathagata]] will not
 +
proclaim himself, although any other [[ascetic]] who had even one of
 +
those qualities would boast about it. The [[Buddha]], also {{Wiki|speaking}}
  
16. There are a very few {{Wiki|orthographic}} variants, for which see c. g. Skilling
 
1992,84—with reference to the work of von Hiniibcr—and forthcoming (a).
 
  
17. See Skilling forthcoming (a) for references.  
+
95 asesatn abhijiiniili. ibid.  
98 J1ABS20.1
 
  
Thcravada. An inscription found in association with a giant pair of Bud -
+
96 Ibid.  
dhapada at Amphoc Si [[Maha]] Phot in Prachin Buri province gives three
 
[[Pali]] [[stanzas]] in homage to the [[Buddha]], [[Dhamma]], and Sanjgha. The stan¬
 
zas, in the vasaniaiilaka metre, are from the Telakataha-gathd , a work of
 
unknown authorship believed to have been composed in [[Ceylon]]. Accord¬
 
ing to the opening {{Wiki|Khmer}} portion, the {{Wiki|epigraph}} was set up by one
 
[[Buddhasiri]] in CE 761. 18 The sacca-kicca-kata-ncmam verse is known
 
only from late [[Theravadin]] texts: it is noteworthy that the [[Siamese]] inscrip¬
 
tions (the verse occurs several times) are much earlier than the known
 
texts that give the verse. 19
 
  
From the point of view of both [[language]] and contents, I conclude that
+
97 Mar.nc (1990): 4.  
the [[Pali]] {{Wiki|inscriptions}} of [[Burma]] and [[Siam]] give firm {{Wiki|evidence}} for a
 
[[Theravadin]] presence in the Irrawaddy and Chao Phraya basins, from
 
about the 5th century CE onwards. 20 From the extent and richness of the
 
{{Wiki|evidence}} it seems that the Thcravada was the predominant school, and
 
that it enjoyed the {{Wiki|patronage}} of ruling and economic elites. 21 But 1 do not
 
mean to suggest that [[religious]] [[society]] was monolithic: other schools may
 
well have been {{Wiki|present}}, or have come and gone, and there is ample evi¬
 
dence for the practice of [[Mahayana]] and [[Brahmanism]] in the region. 22
 
  
  
18. See Charuk nai prathet [[thai]] 2529,1: 179-86 and Rohanadeera 1988. The*'
+
about himself as [[Tathagata]], agrees with this rather emphatically,
Telakataha-gatha was edited by Edmund R. Goonaratne (1884).  
+
and then instructs [[Sariputta]] to give this [[discourse]] frequently to
 +
those among the followers, [[monks]], [[nuns]], lay-men and -women,
 +
who [[feel]] [[doubt]] and hesitation concerning the [[Tathagata]] 98 . In this
 +
way the [[Buddha]] specifically approved this as a list of his qualities
 +
which may be [[taught]] to followers. I think it is significant that he
 +
imposes this limit, i.e. that he docs not [[acknowledge]] this as a list
 +
which is to be defended before a general public 99 .  
  
19. See Skilling forthcoming (a) for references. . ^ „ ,  
+
There is another occasion when [[Sariputta]] roars his [[lion’s roar]] 100 , Here a [[monk]] goes to the [[Buddha]] and accuses [[Sariputta]] of
 +
an offence. The [[Buddha]] sends for [[Sariputta]]. [[Ananda]] and [[Maha Moggalana]] immediately call all the [[monks]], telling them to come
 +
because ‘[[Sariputta]] is about to roar his [[lion’s roar]] in the presence
 +
of the [[Buddha]]’ 101 . Clearly they expect a theatrical occasion.
 +
[[Sariputta]] defends himself against the accusation. He agrees that
 +
someone who is not [[mindful]] of the body’s [[action]] 107 might have
 +
done such a thing, but as for himself, ‘his [[heart]] is like the [[earth]],
 +
[[abundant]], .extensive, [[boundless]], without [[hatred]], doing no harm’ 101
 +
and, moreover, he is ‘filled with [[horror]], loathing and {{Wiki|disgust}} at his
 +
foul [[body]] 106 , and he carries it around like a dripping [[bowl]] of fat 105 .
 +
The accusing [[monk]] immediately begs [[Sariputta’s]] pardon. The
 +
[[Buddha]] reprimands him, and then says to [[Sariputta]], ‘Forgive this
 +
IV 377; U. Woodward, GS IV 251.
  
20. We must wait for a comprehensive study of Indie loan-words in early Mon
+
Duddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)  
{{Wiki|inscriptions}} from [[Siam]] before we can determine the [[degree]] to which they use
 
[[Sanskrit]] or [[Pali]]. An example of the former is the [[word]] [[punya]] , {{Wiki|ubiquitous}} in the
 
{{Wiki|epigraphs}}. A possible example of the [[latter]] is the term updjhay , derived more
 
probably from [[Pali]] [[upajjhaya]] (also upajjha and upajjha) than [[Sanskrit]]
 
upddhydya , in an inscription from Lopburi: see Cocdfcs 1961, 8, II (1). Another
 
[[form]], from two ca. 9th century “votive tablets” is pajhSy : Charuk nai prathet
 
[[thai]] 2529, II: 85-89, 90-94 (note that the [[word]] occurs side-by-side with
 
acaryya).
 
  
21. Stargardt (p. 200) remarks of the [[relic]] chamber of the “Khin Ba mound,”
 
the source of a 20-leaf golden [[Pali]] text: “although many other [[relic]] chambers
 
were discovered at Sri K$etra, this was the only one to survive intact, and its
 
contents exceeded—in number, [[quality]] of workmanship, and [[concentration]] of
 
{{Wiki|precious metals}} and stones—even the [[relic]] chamber of the Bhatjiprolu stGpa in
 
[[Andhra]]”
 
  
22. The practice of MahSySna is compatible with any of the Yinaya schools,
+
[[foolish]] man, before his head splits into seven pieces’ 106 .  
[[including]] the Thcravada, and [[brahmans]] played (and continue to play) an active
 
role in South-east {{Wiki|Asian}} “[[Buddhist]]” {{Wiki|societies}}, both court and common. The
 
schools or [[religious]] groups should be regarded as interactive and complemen-
 
  
 +
A further [[lion’s roar]] is attributed to [[Sariputta]] in the Sarp-
 +
yutta [[Nikaya]] 107 . Here a [[monk]] reports to the Buddha.that [[Sari]]¬
 +
[[putta]] has claimed [[arahantship]]. The [[Buddha]] summons [[Sariputta]]
 +
and challenges him. [[Sariputta]] is able to answer all the [[Buddha’s]]
 +
questions satisfactorily and the [[Buddha]] leaves the scene. [[Sariputta]]
 +
then proclaims to the [[bhikkhu]] that, although it took him a while
 +
to find his answer to the [[Buddha’s]] first challenge, once he had
 +
found his wits, he could have gone on answering for several
 +
nigh:s loS . Tins proclamation is reported to the [[Buddha]] by one of
 +
the [[monks]], Kajarakkhartiya, who as his [[name]]" shows is a [[noble]]
 +
( khaitiya ), and who may therefore have had some [[knowledge]] of
 +
[[debate]] conventions. It is this [[monk]] who gives the utterance the
 +
designation ‘[[Sariputta’s]] [[lion’s roar]]’ 109 although the expression ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ itself docs not appear in [[Sariputta’s]] utterance. The [[Buddha]]
 +
supports Sariputta’r claim, using the same terms as [[Sariputta]] did
 +
in his proclamation: ‘If I were to question [[Sariputta]] on this {{Wiki|matter}}
 +
differently, with different words (or) differently according to a
 +
different method, [[Sariputta]] would explain this {{Wiki|matter}} to me,
 +
differently, with different words (or) differently according to a
 +
different method’ 110 . . .
  
i SKILLING 99
+
This so-called ‘[[lion’s roar]]' is qualitively different from [[Sari]]- •
  
1 The Question of Origins
 
  
The [[Theravadin]] [[samgha]] of [[Ceylon]] was divided into two main rival
+
106 U.ama Siiripulla imassa inoghapurisassa. purassa tatth' eva sattadhd
branches, the Mahiiviharavasins and Abhayagirivasins. After more than a
+
muddhd phulissali'ti. A IV 378. Sec Witte), op. tit* regarding this threat. The  
thousand years of contention for legitimacy and {{Wiki|patronage}}, the former
+
threat ib surprising here as the accusing [[monk]] was neither questioning nor being
won out, and absorbed the [[monks]] and [[monasteries]] of the [[latter]]. Most
+
questioned by [[Sariputta]] although he may be taken to have challenged him,
regrettably for our purposes, the {{Wiki|literature}} of the [[Abhayagiri]], which
+
albeit behind his back.  
included a chronicle of the school, was allowed (or perhaps encouraged)  
 
to disappear, with the result that no undisputed [[Pali]] text of the school sur¬
 
vives. 23 The [[Theravada]] that we know today is the Mahivihara [[tradition]],"
 
as settled by the time of the prolific commentator [[Buddhaghosa]] in the 5th
 
century. The later [[Pali literature]] of the sub-commentaries (JikSs) and J
 
manuals, although [[subject]] to further [[development]] and a variety of influ¬
 
ences, also belongs'to the [[Mahaviharavasin]] [[lineage]].  
 
  
Both schools maintained contacts with [[India]]: with KSncipuram,
+
107 S II 50-5.  
[[Andhradesa]], and [[Magadha]]. Is there any {{Wiki|evidence}} for the presence of
 
either school in early South-east {{Wiki|Asia}}? The [[Wikipedia:canonical|canonical]] {{Wiki|inscriptions}}—
 
[[including]] the [[Abhidhamma]] “extracts”—could belong to either the
 
Abhayagirivasins or the [[Mahaviharavasins]], since both are believed to
 
have transmitted a similar [[canon]] in [[Pali]], and both held broadly similar
 
[[tenets]] and used a similar technical vocabulary. 24 It seems that the
 
[[Abhayagiri]] also transmitted the [[Patisambhidamagga]], or at least a similar
 
text, since passages cited i.i the [[Vimuttimagga]] (for which see below) have
 
parallels in that work. The nabadhakani yato dukkhanj, verses, known at
 
{{Wiki|present}} only from [[Mahavihara]] texts such as the [[Visuddhimagga]], are given
 
in citation, and are not original to the works in question: that is, *hey
 
originate from an earlier text that may have been accepted by both
 
schools.  
 
  
The [[Vimuttimagga]] , a treatise associated with the [[Abhayagiri]], was Well-
+
[[108]] S II 54.  
known outside of [[Ceylon]] (whether it was composed in that country or in
 
[[India]] remains under [[debate]]). A comprehensive manual of practice and
 
  
 +
109 S Ji 55. 5 46.
  
tary rather than mutually exclusive. For [[Avalokitesvara]] in South-east {{Wiki|Asia}} see
+
no s i: so.  
Chutiwongs 1984 (especially ch. 3 on [[Burma]] and ch. 4 on Central [[Thailand]])
 
and Chutiwongs and Leidy 1994; for [[brahmanism]] in the region see Dawee
 
1982. ..  
 
  
23. See Skilling 1993a.
+
Manne — [[The Lion’s Roar]]
  
24. The canons of the two schools were not [[identical]] (and is it not historically
+
putta’s previous one in .several important ways. In the. first place
and humanly improbable, rather impossible, that two canons transmitted for
+
it is not a proclamation of the [[Buddha’s]] qualities: it is Siiriputta’s
centuries from an early date—the [[Abhayagiri]] was founded in the 1st century
+
demonstration of his [[own]] [[understanding]] of the [[Teaching]]. Second¬
BCE—at separate [[monastic]] centres should be so?): see the important refer¬
+
ly, and most importantly, this utterance is not termed a ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ by the [[Buddha]], but only by a [[monk]]. The [[monk]] uses this
ences in von Hiniiber 1995, 36-38.  
+
{{Wiki|terminology}} in his report to the [[Buddha]] and the [[latter]] uses
 +
different {{Wiki|terminology}} in his answer. On the previous occasion it
 +
was the [[Buddha]] who gave the [[name]] ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ to [[Sariputta’s]]
 +
utterance. Here the text specifically [[attributes]] different termino¬
 +
logy to him. In this {{Wiki|literature}} prone to repetition, the absence of
 +
repetition where it could be expected must be regarded as
 +
significant. Instead of the repetition, the [[Buddha]] describes
 +
Sarifiutta as someone* who has ‘well-mastered the [[sphere]] of
 +
[[religion]]’ 111 .  
  
{{Wiki|theory}}, composed by [[Upatissa]] (Skt. [[Upatisya]]) perhaps by the 2nd century
+
[[Sariputta]] is attributed with three different types of [[lions]]’ roar.
CE, it was translated into {{Wiki|Chinese}} in SIS. Interestingly, the [[translator]],
+
Two of these can be regarded as genuine, the criterion for
*Samghabhara, was a [[bhiksu]] of [[Funan]] (an early South-east {{Wiki|Asian}} polity
+
genuineness being that the texts have the [[Buddha]] himself so
known from {{Wiki|Chinese}} sources, and located by the savants in the deltaic
+
designate the utterance. These are (i) when the ‘[[lion’s roar]]* took
regions of [[Cambodia]]). 25 The {{Wiki|manuscript}} of the [[Vimuttimagga]] , along with
+
place in [[debate]] circumstances in praise of the [[Buddha]] (D 28X and
the other texts translated by *Samghabhara, was brought to [[China]] in 503
+
' (ii) when the [[lion’s roar]]’ took place in defence of, and asserting
by another [[monk]] of [[Funan]], ♦Mandrasena. 26 Since none of the other texts
+
the [[quality]] of his [[own]] [[mental state]] (A IV 238). The third, Le. the  
brought from [[Funan]] are [[Theravadin]], and some belong to the MahSyana, 27
+
final example in this section cannot be accepted as a true ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ as, according to the text, the [[Buddha]] did not give it this
the fact that the [[Vimuttimagga]] was among them attests only to the avail¬
+
title. In none of these is the location a public assembly, but rather
ability of that text in [[Funan]]: it cannot be interpreted [[as evidence]] for a
+
these are private lion’s roars made only before the [[Sangha]] of
(non-Mahavihara) [[Theravadin]] presence. 28 Since *Samghabhara did some
+
[[monks]].  
of his translation work in the “Funancse Pavilion," 2 * and enjoyed the
 
{{Wiki|patronage}} of the [[Emperor]], it seems that Funanese [[Buddhism]] was
 
accorded some esteem.  
 
  
(For insular South-east {{Wiki|Asia}}, we have one clear piece of {{Wiki|evidence}}: the  
+
There js one occasion in each of the [[Thera]]- and [[Theri-gatha]]  
inscription from Ratu [[Baka]] in central {{Wiki|Java}}, dated CE 792, which refers to
+
when a [[monk]] utters his ‘[[lion’s roar]],  
an “[[Abhayagiri]] -[[vihara]] built for the [[Sinhalese]] [[samgha]].” On the mainland,
 
but outside of our period, there is mention of an [[Abhayagiri]] in the con¬
 
cluding {{Wiki|Khmer}} portion of a [[Vajrayanist]] [[Sanskrit]] palsograph, dated CE
 
1066, from the vicinity of Nakhon Ratchasima [Korat] in Central [[Siam]]. 30
 
The precise location of this [[Abhayagiri]] is unknown, and it is by no means
 
certain that the {{Wiki|toponym}} should be related to the [[Abhayagiri]] school: the
 
inscription names only an “[[Abhaya]] Mountain" [ [[giri]] : without the [[word]]
 
[[vihara]]], where images of “Buddhalokesvara” and others were installed
 
and later renovated.)
 
  
25. For the school-affiliation (and [[name]] of the translated and date of transla¬
 
tion, about which there has been some [[confusion]]) see Skilling 1994.
 
  
26. Li-tai [[san-pao]] chi, T. no. 2034, 49.98c.6-7; Kai-yiian shih-chiao lu, T.
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
no. 2154,55.537c. 18—19. The Annals of the {{Wiki|Liang Dynasty}} confirm that [[Funan]]
 
was one of the countries that sent tribute in 503.1 am grateful to Bhikjuni
 
Virtita Tseng for checking the {{Wiki|Chinese}} sources.
 
  
27. The works are listed in [[Nanjio]] 1975, II §§ 101, 102; [[Bagchi]] 1927,414-
 
18; Repertoire du [[canon]] bouddhtque sino-japonais, Fascicule annexe du
 
HdbSgirin (1978) 267 (s. v. “Mandarasen"), 281 (s. v. “Sogyabara”).
 
  
28. The [[Vimuttimagga]] was also known in [[North India]]: the [[chapter]] on the
+
(15) 175. 'Come, [[Nandaka]], let us go into the presence of the  
[[dhutanga]] -s was translated into [[Tibetan]] under the title Dhutagunanirdesa
 
afound CE 800, and long [[sections]] were cited by DaSabalasrlmitra, a [[North]]
 
[[Indian scholar]], probably in the 12th century, in a work preserved only in
 
[[Tibetan translation]]: see Skilling 1987,1993b, and 1994 for references.
 
  
29. [[Bagchi]] 1927,416.  
+
[[preceptor]]. We shall roar the [[lion’s roar]] face to face
 +
with the best of the [[Buddhas]].  
  
30. See Chirapat 1990,12 (text line 32), 13 (tr.).  
+
176. We have now [[attained]] that goal for which, with
 +
[[compassion]] for us, the [[Wikipedia:Sage (sophos|sage]] made us go forth — the
 +
{{Wiki|annihilation}} of all [[fetters]]’ 112 . •
 +
 
 +
(16) 331. *... The [[Buddha’s teaching]] has been done.
 +
 
 +
332. Allow me, [[noble lady]], 1 wish to go to [[Savatthi]]: I shall
 +
roar a [[lion’s roar]] in the presence of the {{Wiki|excellent}}
 +
[[Buddha]]’" 1 .
 +
 
 +
The [[reason]] for these ‘lion’s roars’, as the texts she./, is that
 +
the [[disciple]] has [[attained]] the final goal and wishes to announce
 +
this to, and perhaps have it confirmed by, the [[Buddha]]. This may
 +
be {{Wiki|evidence}} of a {{Wiki|custom}} or a tendency to proclaim this [[degree]] of
 +
personal [[attainment]] publicly in the presence of the [[Buddha]]. As,
 +
however, only two examples arc attested, one in [[Theragatha]], one
 +
in Thcrigatha, it is impossible to be certain of this. These
 +
instances could be also be cases of {{Wiki|poetic}} licence
 +
 
 +
A [[monk]] might also be described as a ‘lion’s roarer’. In a list
 +
that gives the [[highest]] qualities of various [[monks]], the [[monk]]
 +
Plndola [[Bharadvaja]] is called chief of the [[disciples]] who are lion’s
 +
roarers' u . There is no [[sutta]] passage which tells us what he
 +
roared" 5 .
 +
 
 +
Whereas the Buddha’slion’s roar is a public event governed
 +
by what we may [[imagine]] were the [[debate]] {{Wiki|rules}} of the time, the
 +
[[monk's]] lion’s roars, insofar as we can tell from the small number
 +
 
 +
 
 +
112 Tr. K.R. Norman. [[Elders]] Verses (EV) \X
 +
 
 +
113 Tr. Norman; F.V U.34.
 +
 
 +
114 A l 23.
 +
 
 +
115 C.P. Malalusekcra. {{Wiki|Dictionary}} of [[Pali]] Proper Names t x.v. [[Pindola-Bharadvaja]].
 +
 
 +
Manne — [[The Lion’s Roar]]
 +
 
 +
that remain to us in this {{Wiki|literature}}, were private events, assertions
 +
in front of the [[Teacher]] and the [[Sangha]] and not open to public
 +
challenge.
 +
 
 +
3. [[Suttas]] with [[sihanada]] in their titles.
 +
 
 +
There are three [[suttas]] with [[sihanada]] in their title, i.e.
 +
[[sihanada]] [[suttas]], in D; Kassapa-sihaniida [[Sutta]] (No.8), Udum-
 +
barika-sihanada [[Sutta]] (No.25), and Cakkavatti-sihanada [[Sutta]]
 +
(No.26); two in M: Cuja-slhanada [[Sutta]] (No.ll) and Maha-sihanida
 +
[[Sutta]] (No.12), which gives this [[name]] to the [[vagga]]" 6 , and a [[Siha]]¬
 +
[[nada]] [[Vagga]] in A IV 373-96.
 +
 
 +
The M [[sihanada]] [[suttas]] arc both [[suttas]] with [[debate]] [[elements]].
 +
The [[Cula-sihanada Sutta]] is a {{Wiki|sermon}} in which the [[Buddha]] teaches
 +
his [[monks]] [[debate]] [[techniques]]; in the Mahi-slhanada [[Sutta]] he re¬
 +
futes a challenge [[Sunakkhatta]] is reported to have made against
 +
him. The D'sihunida [[suttas]] are more diverse. Two [[concern]]
 +
challenges-^ - .n the Kassapa-sihaniida [[Sutta]], [[Kassapa]] challenges the
 +
[[Buddha]] on the theme of [[asceticism]], and the [[Buddha]] refutes this
 +
challenge, while the Udumbarikarslhanada [[Sutta]] concerns a
 +
challenge made against the [[Buddha]] by [[Nigrodha]] in [[Queen]]
 +
Udumbarika’s Park. It is, however, hard to see what the common
 +
[[element]] is in the shared [[name]] regarding the third, the [[Cakka]]¬
 +
vatti-sihanada [[Sutta]], which is a tale about good rulership. The
 +
[[Sihanada Vagga]] of the A gets its name'from its first [[sutta]], which
 +
is the [[lion’s roar]] by [[Sariputta]] in which he proclaims his [[own]]
 +
[[attainments]].
 +
 
 +
In their diversity the relationship between the names of
 +
slhan&da [[suttas]] and their content reflects that ol the contents of
 +
the various sihunadas. Both challenges and proclamations of
 +
 
 +
 
 +
116 See l.B. Horner. [[Middle Length Sayings]] (MLS) 1 xiv.  
 +
 
 +
Mannc — [[The Lion’s Roar]]
  
, i SKILLING 101
+
[[own]] [[understanding]] of his [[Teaching]], telling what one had seen,  
  
I All told, there is no conclusive local {{Wiki|evidence}} that the early Theravida
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
of South-east {{Wiki|Asia}} was affiliated with either the MahSvihiira or the
 
[[Abhayagiri]]. We may also note the absence of references to South-east
 
{{Wiki|Asia}} of the period in the chronicles of [[Ceylon]], 31 and reflect that in the
 
great period of reform (hat swept the region in the 14th and 15th ra»ntinfr s
 
the new [[ordination lineage]] was {{Wiki|distinguished}} by the [[name]] Sihala-sdsana.
 
Might this not suggest that the old [[tradition]] did not associate itself with
 
[[Ceylon]]?
 
  
It is therefore probably futile to try to trace the [[Theravada]] of the period'
+
[[attainments]] arc found. Probably the Cakkavatti-slhanada [[Sutta]]  
to either of the [[Ceylon]] schools. It is likely that [[Buddhism]] arrived in the
+
should be regarded as falling into the [[latter]] category. It is the
area at an early date—perhaps even from the time of [[Sona]] and Uttara’s
+
proclamation of the [[attainments]] and qualities of the best [[ruler]].
  
 +
4. The ‘[[lion's roar]]' and ihe [[debate]] [[tradition]]
  
 +
In the [[Pali]] [[Nikayas]] the. term [[sihanada]] — ‘the [[lion’s roar]]’ —
 +
is used for various types of {{Wiki|expressions}}. When the [[Tathagata’s]]
 +
[[lion’s roar]] is referred to we are close to the {{Wiki|Vedic}} [[religious]]
 +
{{Wiki|speech}} contest or [[Debate]] which Witzel has described in his
 +
article. When the '[[lion’s roar]]’ is attributed to a [[disciple]], we find
 +
that it is his [[own]] claim to [[attainments]]. Both the [[Tathagata’s]] ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ and that of a [[disciple]] are utterances which the speaker is
 +
willing to defend in public, the former in front of a large public
 +
of the [[world]], the [[latter]] in front of the smaller public of the
 +
[[monks]]. It seems then that the [[Buddhists]] have adapted the {{Wiki|Vedic}}
 +
[[tradition]] of challenges in [[debate]] to their [[own]] purposes, using
 +
their [[own]] {{Wiki|terminology}} — sihandda — and generalising it to
 +
include a [[monk’s]] public [[assertion]] of his achievements. [[Suttas]] wit^
 +
[[sihanada]] in their title generally confirm this usage. As we*do not
 +
usually know how and when a [[sutta]] got its title, only limited
 +
{{Wiki|weight}} can be [[attached]] to this last point %
  
[[mission]] to SuvawabhOmi during the reign of [[King Asoka]], as [[traditionally]]
+
5. Conclusions.  
held. Whether this [[Buddhism]] belonged to the TheravSdin [[lineage]] from
 
the start, or whether that [[lineage]] asserted itself later, cannot be said (and
 
what did the term TheravSdin mean in the pre-Buddhaghosa period, and
 
outside of Ceylon?)—but there is no [[doubt]] that it evolved {{Wiki|independently}}
 
of the [[Ceylon]] schools..Over the centuries it would have undergone mul¬
 
tiple [[influences]], as [[monks]] (and perhaps [[nuns]]) from different regions of
 
[[India]] criss-crossed the region, and as local [[monks]] travelled throughout the
 
region and to different parts of [[India]]. 32 There is {{Wiki|evidence}} for connections
 
with Andhraclcsa and the [[South]], for example in the layout of early [[Pyu]]
 
[[stupas]] and [[viharas]], such as those from [[Beikthano]]. 33 There is also evi-
 
  
 +
I said in the introduction that a study of the notion of the
 +
‘[[lion’s roar]]’ showed the inventive and [[creative way]] the reciters
 +
conveyed the [[Buddha’s]] message, relating its content to the cus¬
 +
toms and [[traditions]] of their [[society]]. In fact it provides a variety
 +
of examples of their way of going about their task.
  
31. See here Ray 1939,52. Sirisena (1978,58) remarks that “[[Sri Lanka’s]] close
+
First a [[word]] about the reciters.  
[[religious]] contacts with [[Burma]] started only from the eleventh century." His
 
work offers a [[wealth]] of information—from chronicles, inscriptions—on the
 
relations between [[Ceylon]] and South-east {{Wiki|Asia}} but, as the title indicates, all
 
from the later period.  
 
  
32. If anything is clear from the time of our earliest records—the Tripifaka
+
Recounting those aspects of daily [[life]] one had shared with
itself (e. g. the Punnovada-sutta , MN 145)—up to. the {{Wiki|present}}, it is that [[monks]]  
+
the [[Buddha]] to one’s fellow practitioners, passing on to them the  
travelled, even in the face of adversity or [[danger]]. The [[subject]] is addressed by
+
content of the [[discourses]] one had heard — that is to say, one’s
[[Vasubandhu]], who in his Vy&khy&yukti gives in verse seven [[reasons]] why the
 
[[Buddha]] travelled (note the technical term, known from the [[canon]], carikdni
 
[[carati]]) and fifteen [[reasons]] why auditors ( [[sravaka]]) did so ({{Wiki|Peking}} edition of the  
 
[[Tibetan Tripitaka]], vol. 113, {{Wiki|cat}}. no. 5562, [[sems tsam]] si, 44b6 foil.). The verses
 
are available in [[Sanskrit]] citation in [[Haribhadra]] 1960,271.30 and 274.19.
 
  
33. See e. g. Stargardt 1995, 200, 205. It is intriguing that the [[dukkham]]  
+
certainly began as early as [[Buddhism]] itself did. The first converts
dukkhasamuppadam verse, inscribed at least twice in [[Siam]], is also known (but
+
and earliest [[monks]] would obviously talk to each other about the
in a lightly [[Sanskritic]] [[form]]) from an inscription from [[Andhra]]: see Skilling
+
[[Buddha]] and the [[Teaching]], and keep each other informed about
1991 and 1992 for details. The use of the [[Pallava]] [[script]] cannot in itself be cited
+
what had happened during, for example, an absence due to an
[[as evidence]], since that [[script]] was employed from an early date throughout insu-
+
[[almsround]] or a [[meditation retreat]]. What had happened would
 +
include what had been [[taught]], who the [[Buddha]] had talked to in
 +
particular, who came to see him, what advice he gave, and so
 +
forth. As the {{Wiki|community}} grew and spread this was [[essentially]] its
 +
way to keep in {{Wiki|touch}} and up to date. Some [[people]] [[love]] to re¬
 +
count, to narrate stories, to share their [[experiences]], to tell.
 +
Probably those who tpld about the [[Buddha]] and the [[Teaching]]  
 +
especially well were invited to do so again and again and became
 +
known as good reciters. Telling skilfully requires invention and
 +
the texts are indeed full of {{Wiki|literary}} inventions created by very
 +
[[skilful]] raconteurs.
  
J ki kuO 4.W. J
+
The early reciters told about true events, events in which
 +
they had participated as observers and witnesses. Although we
 +
cannot know whether the accounts of the [[debates]] in D contain
 +
any actual words that the [[Buddha]] spoke, the style of [[debating]]
 +
they attribute to him is consistent and differentiated from that
 +
attributed to other [[debaters]], and they are true to the {{Wiki|Vedic}} [[debate]]
 +
[[tradition]] 157 . The early reciters also passed on the [[experiences]] of
 +
others that had been told to them. In telling a tale there are
 +
always modifications depending on the [[character]] and interests of
 +
the teller.  
  
 +
The early reciters created similes. A simile that compares the
 +
[[Buddha]] to a [[lion]] is hardly surprising. The comparison between a
  
i dcnce for contacts with [[North India]]: the influence of [[Gupta]] idioms on
+
117 See Manne (1990) and (1992).
  
! Dvaravati [[Buddha]] images, and the practice of enshrining the ye [[dhamma]]
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (19 96)
  
verse or the [[paticcasamuppada]] [[formula]] in [[stupas]], which was widespread
 
j throughout the [[North]], but rare in the [[South]] 34 and [[Ceylon]]. 35 The
 
  
Telakataha verses suggest contacts with the [[latter]] country, as does, per-
+
(15) 175. 'Come, [[Nandaka]], let us go into the presence of the  
| haps, a short and enigmatic Old Mon inscription from the Narai or Khao
 
  
[[Wong]] [[cave]] in Saraburi, dated to circa 12th century BE (CE 550-650),
+
[[preceptor]]. We shall roar the [[lion’s roar]] face to face
 +
with the best of the [[Buddhas]].
  
! which refers to an [[Anuradhapura]]. 36 Whether the reference is to the  
+
176. We have now [[attained]] that goal for which, with
 +
[[compassion]] for us, the [[Wikipedia:Sage (sophos|sage]] made us go forth — the  
 +
{{Wiki|annihilation}} of all [[fetters]]’ 11J . •
  
[[ancient]] capital of [[Ceylon]] or to a local site cannot be said, although the
+
(16) 331. '... The [[Buddha’s teaching]] has been done.
| [[latter]] seems more likely: the important point is that the {{Wiki|toponym}} is oth-
 
  
j- erwise known only from [[Ceylon]]. 37
+
332. Allow me, [[noble lady]]; 1 wish to go to [[Savatthi]]: I shall
 +
roar a [[lion’s roar]] in the presence of the {{Wiki|excellent}}
 +
[[Buddha]]’ 113 .  
  
| lar, peninsular, and mainland South-east {{Wiki|Asia}}, for {{Wiki|secular}} and [[religious]] (both
+
The [[reason]] for these ‘lion’s roars’, as the texts she./, is that
 +
the [[disciple]] has [[attained]] the final goal and wishes to announce
 +
this to, and perhaps have it confirmed by, the [[Buddha]]. This may
 +
be {{Wiki|evidence}} of a {{Wiki|custom}} or a tendency to proclaim this [[degree]] of
 +
personal [[attainment]] publicly in the presence of the [[Buddha]]. As,
 +
however, only two examples arc attested, one in [[Theragatha]], one
 +
in Thcrigatha, it is impossible to be certain of this. These
 +
instances could be also be cases of {{Wiki|poetic}} licence
  
[[Brahmanical]] and [[Buddhistic]]) records.  
+
A [[monk]] might also be described as a ‘lion’s roarer’. In a list
 +
that gives the [[highest]] qualities of various [[monks]], the [[monk]]
 +
Plndola Bharadvftja is called chief of the [[disciples]] who are lion’s
 +
roarers 114 . There is no [[sutta]] passage which tells us what he
 +
roared 113 .  
  
34. For some Southern examples in the [[Pallava]] [[script]] see Rea 1990, 149-80
+
Whereas the Buddha’slion’s roar is a public event governed
and pis. 51-64 (and also [[Mitra]] 1980, 218-20). The {{Wiki|inscriptions}} that I am able
+
by what we may [[imagine]] were the [[debate]] {{Wiki|rules}} of the time, the  
to decipher from the Stygian reproduction of the plates give the ye dharmS
+
[[monk's]] lion’s roars, insofar as we can tell from the small number
verse in [[Sanskrit]]. Rea describes [[die]] site as “one of the most remarkable groups
 
  
of [[Buddhist]] remains in the Presidency” (then in [[Madras]], the site is now in
 
District [[Visakhapatnam]] of [[Andhra Pradesh]]). Further [[south]], at Gummadidurru
 
j (District [[Krishna]]) were found “127 clay tablets of the size of an eight-anna
 
  
piece and bearing the [[Buddhist]] [[creed]] in {{Wiki|Nagari}} characters of the late tnediasval ,
+
112 Tr. K.R. Norman. [[Elders]] Verses (EV) 1 2.  
period" (.[[Archaeological Survey of India]], Annual Report, 1926-27-, Rpr. [[Delhi]]:
 
ja 1990, 155-56: see also [[Mitra]] 1980, 212).  
 
  
i : 35. That the practice was not unknown to the late [[Ceylon]] Ther‘av3d4 miay be
+
113 Tr. Norman; EV 11,34.  
  
seen from the SSratthadipanI (a text some centuries younger than our examples
+
114 A 1 23.  
from the field), which defines a dhamma-cetiya as u [a [[cetiya]] ] built after
 
depositing a [[book]] inscribed with [[conditioned arising]], etc.*: Mah&makuta ed.,
 
vol. 1 ([[Bangkok]]), 2511 [1968], p. 263, ult paticcasamupp&dadilikhitapottha-
 
kanf nidahitvS katam pana dhammaceliyany [[nama]]. (I am grateful to the late U
 
Bo Kay of {{Wiki|Pagan}} for the.reference.) We may compare the [[definition]] with
 
[[Candragomin]] (6th—7th century CE?) as cited by [[Haribhadra]] (late 8th century)
 
in his Abka (BST 4, 361.15) yatra hi [[nama]] pudgalanair&tmya-dyotikayd ye
 
[[dharma]] hetuprabhavd ity adigathaya adhif/hito bhUbhdgah stHpo matah . For
 
some of the few ye dhartnd {{Wiki|inscriptions}} known from [[Ceylon]], see Mudiyanse
 
1967, 29-30 (in {{Wiki|Nagari}}, on images that Mudiyanse, with good [[reason]], deems
 
imported), 92-95 (in [[Sinhalese]] characters, possibly in [[Pali]]), and 97. [[Ceylon]] is
 
rich in deposited texts, but mostly in [[Sanskrit]], and of [[mantra]], dhdranl, or
 
[[Prajhaparamita]], rather than extracts from the [[Pali canon]]: see Mudiyanse 1967,
 
[[Schopen]] 1982, and von Hiniiber 1984.  
 
  
! 36. Charuk naiprathet [[thai]] 2529,11:42-47.  
+
115 C.P. Malalasckcra, {{Wiki|Dictionary}} of [[Pali]] Proper Names , x.v. Pindola-Dharadvaja.  
  
37. That is, no other references are given in {{Wiki|Monier-Williams}} 1976,37c, or in
+
Manne — [[The Lion’s Roar]]  
i [[Malalasekera]] 1983, 83-85.
 
  
SKILLING
+
that remain to us in this {{Wiki|literature}}, were private events, assertions
 +
in front of the [[Teacher]] and the [[Sangha]] and not open to public
 +
challenge.
  
 +
3. [[Suttas]] with [[sihanada]] in their titles.
  
We should not regard the establishment and [[development]] of [[Buddhism]]  
+
There are three [[suttas]] with [[sihanada]] in their title, i.e.  
in the region as a mere mechanical process: it was rather a-hpman, and ....  
+
[[sihanada]] [[suttas]], in D; Kassapa-slhanada [[Sutta]] (No.8), Udum*
hence unpredictable, progress in which decisions were made and acted
+
barika-slhanada [[Sutta]] (No.25), and Cakkavatti-sihanada [[Sutta]]
upon by {{Wiki|individuals}} and communities. A single {{Wiki|charismatic}} moink could
+
(No.26); two in M: Cuta-sihanada [[Sutta]] (Noll) and Maha-slhan5da
attract followers and sponsors of {{Wiki|status}} to his school; a angle [[ruler]] could,
+
[[Sutta]] (No.12), which gives this [[name]] to the [[vagga]] 116 , and a [[Siha]]¬
whether for {{Wiki|political}}, economic, or purely [[religious]] [[reasons]], decide to
+
[[nada]] [[Vagga]] in A IV 373-96.  
favour a particular samgha.w Changing trade routes or {{Wiki|political}} alliances
 
could bring new patterns of {{Wiki|patronage}}. ,
 
  
Perhaps because of the absence of indigenous information—of contem¬
+
The M [[sihanada]] [[suttas]] are both [[suttas]] with [[debate]] [[elements]].
porary chronicles or histories—the [[Buddhism]] of early South-east {{Wiki|Asia}} is
+
The Cuja-sihanada [[Sutta]] is a {{Wiki|sermon}} in which the [[Buddha]] teaches
all too often portrayed as an [[inanimate]] {{Wiki|cultural}} package that was passively
+
his [[monks]] [[debate]] [[techniques]]; in the Maha-slhanada [[Sutta]] he re¬
received from abroad. All the {{Wiki|evidence}}, however, is against this. The
+
futes a challenge [[Sunakkhatta]] is reported to have made against
[[Buddhism]] of the Chao Phraya plain was not a simple copy from [[Ceylon]]  
+
him. The D'sihan&da [[suttas]] arc more diverse. Two [[concern]]
or [[India]]: from the time of the very first {{Wiki|evidence}}, it already has a unique,
+
challenges:"in the Kassapa-slhanada [[Sutta]], [[Kassapa]] challenges the  
face, implying an earlier [[evolution]] for which no records remain. The sur¬
+
[[Buddha]] on the theme of [[asceticism]], and the [[Buddha]] refutes this
viving {{Wiki|artifacts}} are {{Wiki|expressions}} of a mature and refined {{Wiki|culture}}, with spe¬
+
challenge, while the Udumbariktl-sihanada [[Sutta]] concerns a
cial features like the large and ornate stone dhammacakkas; the plan of
+
challenge made against the [[Buddha]] by [[Nigrodha]] in [[Queen]]  
the [[stupas]] or [[caityas]], and the style of their {{Wiki|stucco}} [[art]]; the style of the
+
Udumbarikii’s Park. It is, however, hard to see what the common
[[Buddha]] images; the rich terracotta [[art]] (the so-called votive tablets); and
+
[[element]] is in the shared [[name]] regarding the third, the [[Cakka]]¬
motifs that remain to be explained, such as the so-called Banaspati image.
+
vatti-sihanada [[Sutta]], which is a tale about good rulership. The
From this {{Wiki|evidence}} we can only deduce that the [[Buddhism]] of the Chao
+
Sihanida [[Vagga]] of the A gets its name'from its first [[sutta]], which
Phraya valley is the flowering of a “local genius.” The same may be said
+
is the [[lion’s roar]] by [[Sariputta]] in which he proclaims his [[own]]  
of the [[Buddhism]] of the [[Pyu]], which had its [[own]] [[architecture]] and terracotta
+
[[attainments]].  
[[art]], and local practices such as the urn-burial of [[people]] of {{Wiki|status}}. The two
 
[[realms]] were flourishing centres of [[Buddhist]] {{Wiki|culture}}, in their [[own]] right, on
 
an {{Wiki|equal}} footing with contemporary centres like [[Anuradhapura]]. 39
 
  
To conclude, we may turn to [[Laos]] and [[Cambodia]]. Is there any {{Wiki|evidence}}
+
In their diversity the relationship between the names of
of early [[Theravadin]] [[activity]] in these countries? Very little [[information]] is
+
[[sihanada]] [[suttas]] and their content reflects that of the contents of  
available for [[Laos]]. In 1968 a [[standing]] stone [[Buddha]] in Dvaravati style,
+
the various sihanadas. Both challenges and proclamations of
  
  
38. That a single [[monastic]] could make enormous and enduring contributions
+
116 See l.B. Horner, [[Middle Length Sayings]] (MLS) l xiv.  
to a culture—in manifold aspects—may be seen from countries for which we
 
have records. [[Atisa]] and [[Bu ston]] spring to [[mind]] for [[Tibet]], [[Kukai]] for [[Japan]].  
 
  
39. The situation was perhaps not much different from that of today, when the
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
[[Buddhisms]] of [[die]] Mon, [[Burmese]], Central [[Thai]], Shan, [[Lanna]] Tai, Lao. and
 
{{Wiki|Khmer}} arc each quite {{Wiki|distinctive}}. We might also bear in [[mind]] that—from the
 
point of view of Madhyadesa—Ceylon, [[Andhra]], and South-east {{Wiki|Asia}} were
 
equally foreign cultures, and that there is no valid [[reason]] to relegate the last-
 
named to a lower rank. In a [[sense]] “local” and “foreign” arc modem constructs:
 
the South-east {{Wiki|Asian}} cultures that adopted [[Indian]] [[cosmology]] did not hesitate to
 
place themselves within Jambudlpa.
 
  
  
190 cm. in height, was found at Ban Thalat in {{Wiki|Vientiane}} province. The
+
[[attainments]] arc found. Probably the Cakkavatti-sJhanada [[Sutta]]  
image and the accompanying Mon inscription have been dated to the 7th-  
+
should be regarded as falling into the [[latter]] category. It is the  
8th centuries. 4 ® The finds suggest that the Mon [[Buddhism]] of the right
+
proclamation of the [[attainments]] and qualities of the best [[ruler]].  
bank of the Mekhong [[River]] (the Mun and Chi valleys) also spread to the  
 
left bank, but much more research needs to be done into the [[nature]] of the  
 
[[Buddhism]] of the middle Mekhong valley before anything more can be
 
said.  
 
  
In Cambodia—which is rich in structural remains and lithographs—no
+
4. The ‘[[lion's roar]]' and the [[debate]] [[tradition]]  
[[ancient]] P5li {{Wiki|inscriptions}} have been found, and [[scriptural]] extracts of the  
 
type discussed above are unknown, with one exception. This is an epi¬
 
graph of two lines, engraved in small “pro-Angkorian” letters on the back
 
of a [[standing]] [[Buddha]] image (90 cm. in height) from Tuol [[Preah]] Theat in
 
Kompong Speu province (now in the Musee Guimet). 4 * The text reads: 42
 
  
ye [[dhamma]] hetuprabhava tesam hetum tathagato avaca
+
In the [[Pali]] [[Nikayas]] the term [[sihanada]] — ‘the [[lion’s roar]]’ —
 +
is used for various types of {{Wiki|expressions}}. When the [[Tathagata’s]]
 +
[[lion’s roar]] is referred to we are close to the {{Wiki|Vedic}} [[religious]]
 +
{{Wiki|speech}} contest or [[Debate]] which Witzel has described in his
 +
article. When the ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ is attributed to a [[disciple]], we find
 +
that it is his [[own]] claim to [[attainments]]. Both the [[Tathagata’s]] ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ and that of a [[disciple]] are utterances which the speaker is
 +
willing to defend in public, the former in front of a large public
 +
of the [[world]], the [[latter]] in front of the smaller public of the
 +
[[monks]]. It seems then that the [[Buddhists]] have adapted the {{Wiki|Vedic}}
 +
[[tradition]] of challenges in [[debate]] to their [[own]] purposes, using
 +
their [[own]] {{Wiki|terminology}} — [[sihanada]] — and generalising it to
 +
include a [[monk’s]] public [[assertion]] of his achievements. [[Suttas]] witjt
 +
[[sihanada]] in their title generally confirm this usage. As we*do not
 +
usually know how and when a [[sutta]] got its title, only limited
 +
{{Wiki|weight}} can be [[attached]] to this last point.
  
tesaii cp yo nirodho evamvadi mahasamano.  
+
5. Conclusions.  
  
The verse differs from the [[Pali]] of the Mahdvagga ([[Vinaya]] 140) in giving
+
I said in the introduction that a study of the notion of the  
hetuprabhava for hetuppabhava and avaca for aha, and cannot be cited [[as evidence]] for a [[Theravadin]] presence. 43 Otherwise, the earliest [[Pali]]
+
[[lion’s roar]]’ showed the inventive and [[creative way]] the reciters
inscription dates from CE 1308—and thus belongs to the heyday of the
+
conveyed the [[Buddha’s]] message, relating its content to the cus¬
[[Theravadin]] {{Wiki|renaissance}}” in Ramannadesa, [[Burma]], Central [[Siam]], the
+
toms and [[traditions]] of their [[society]]. In fact it provides a variety
[[Lanna]] {{Wiki|Kingdom}}, and other northern principalities. 44
+
of examples of their way of going about their task.  
  
 +
First a [[word]] about the reciters.
  
40. Boun Souk 1971,14 (with photograph); Vothu Tinh 1983,42-43.
+
Recounting those aspects of daily [[life]] one had shared with
 +
the [[Buddha]] to one’s fellow practitioners, passing on to them the
 +
content of the [[discourses]] one had heard — that is to say, one’s
  
41. It is not without [[interest]] that the ye [[dhamma]] verse is also inscribed (in
+
[[The Lion’s Roar]]  
P51i) on the back of a [[standing]] Dvaravatl-style [[Buddha]] image (196 cm. in
 
height) from Ratchaburi, dated to ca. 12th century BE (CE 550-650): sec
 
Charuk nai prathet [[thai]] 2529,1:72-74. Another Dvaravati [[Buddha]] image with
 
a (fragmentary) [[Pali]] ye [[dhamma]] inscription “en caractfcres prerngkoriens peu
 
soignes” is in the Korat Museum: “Inscription sur une statue de [[Buddha]] du
 
Musee de Korat,” in Cccd&s 1964,162.
 
  
i 42. Cades 1964,108. The image is illustrated in Dupont 1955, Pis. 45 B and
 
! 46 C.
 
  
43. Note that there are many examples of the ye [[dharma]] verse in a mixed or
+
[[own]] [[understanding]] of his [[Teaching]], telling what one had seen,
1 [[Sanskritic]] [[Pali]] from [[India]], and that they have yet to be subjected to sustained
+
heard and [[experienced]] while one was with the [[Teacher]], all that
' {{Wiki|linguistic}} and palxographic analysis.  
+
certainly began as early as [[Buddhism]] itself did. The first converts
 +
and earliest [[monks]] would obviously talk to each other about the
 +
[[Buddha]] and the [[Teaching]], and keep each other informed about
 +
what had happened during, for example, an absence due to an
 +
[[almsround]] or a [[meditation retreat]]. What had happened would
 +
include what had been [[taught]], who the [[Buddha]] had talked to in
 +
particular, who came to see him, what advice he gave, and so
 +
forth. As the {{Wiki|community}} grew and spread this was [[essentially]] its
 +
way to keep in {{Wiki|touch}} and up to date. Some [[people]] [[love]] to re¬
 +
count, to narrate stories, to share their [[experiences]], to tell.
 +
Probably those who tpld about the [[Buddha]] and the [[Teaching]]
 +
especially well were invited to do so again and again and became
 +
: known as good reciters. Telling skilfully requires invention and
 +
the texts are indeed full of {{Wiki|literary}} inventions created by very
 +
[[skilful]] raconteurs.  
  
i 44. Cadfes 1989,282-89. The inscription is a {{Wiki|royal}} record of a [[religious]] foun-
+
The early reciters told about true events, events in which
| dation, and not a [[scriptural]] extract.  
+
they had participated as observers and witnesses. Although we
 +
cannot know whether the accounts of the [[debates]] in D contain
 +
any actual words that the [[Buddha]] spoke, the style of [[debating]]
 +
they attribute to him is consistent and differentiated from that
 +
attributed to other [[debaters]], and they are true to the {{Wiki|Vedic}} [[debate]]
 +
[[tradition]] 117 . The early reciters also passed on the [[experiences]] of
 +
others that had been told to them. In telling a tale there are
 +
always modifications depending on the [[character]] and interests of
 +
the teller.  
  
 +
The early reciters created similes. A simile that compares the
 +
[[Buddha]] to a [[lion]] is hardly surprising. The comparison between a
  
SKILLING 105
 
  
 +
117 See Manne (1990) and (1992),
  
There is certainly {{Wiki|evidence}} of the presence of [[Buddhism]] in the early
 
period: stone, metal, and wooden images Of the [[Buddha]], 45 of [[Maitreya]], 4 ®
 
and of AvaiokitesVara, 47 and occasional mention in [[Sanskrit]] or {{Wiki|Khmer}}
 
dedicatory {{Wiki|inscriptions}}. {{Wiki|Chinese}} sources record that [[monks]] travelled back
 
and forth between [[Funan]] and the [[Middle Kingdom]], but say nothing about
 
their school-affiliation. The [[Vimuttimagga]] and other [[Buddhist texts]],
 
[[including]] some of the MahSyana, were sent to [[China]] from [[Funan]] in the
 
early 6th century. The opening verses of the Telakafaha-gatha are known
 
from an 8th century inscription from Prachin Buri, which may be said to
 
belong to the {{Wiki|Khmer}} {{Wiki|cultural}} [[sphere]]. Furthermore, some of the early
 
[[Buddha]] images of [[Cambodia]] are stylistically affiliated to those of
 
Dvaravatl. On the other hand, it is remarkable that in’ [[Cambodia]] there are
 
no ruins of monumental brick [[stupas]], so common in [[Pyu]] and Mon veas,
 
or even of smaller complexes of votive [[stupas]] . Poisselier has noted that
 
none of the [[ancient]] {{Wiki|epigraphs}} refer to [[stupas]] , and that none of the known
 
[[stupa]] remains are earlier than the 12th century. 43 Nor is there any evi¬
 
dence of a practice shared by [[Pyu]] and Mon [[Buddhists]]: the mass-produc¬
 
tion from moulds of clay “votive tablets.” Here too Boisselier remarks
 
that these prah patima are not well-attested until the 12th century. 4 ® In
 
sum, while [[Buddhists]] were certainly active in [[Cambodia]] during the early
 
period, it seems that the dominant ideology remained that of the brah¬
 
mans, and that [[Buddhism]] or [[Buddhistic]] cu’ ture did not flourish among the
 
kJimer to the [[degree]] that it did among the [[Pyu]] and the Mon.
 
  
BIBLIOGRAPHY
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
  
References to [[Pali]] texts are to the editions of the [[Pali Text Society]], by page and
 
line or by verse. BSR - [[Buddhist Studies]] Review ([[London]]); UJ ■ Indo-lranian
 
Journal ; JPTS - [[Journal of the Pali Text Society]] ([[Oxford]]); JSS ■ Journal of the
 
[[Siam]] [[Society]] ([[Bangkok]]).
 
  
[[Aung]] Thaw. 1972. Historical Sites in [[Burma]]. [[[Rangoon]]].  
+
great man and a [[lion]] [[exists]] in other [[Indian]] texts" 8 . It [[exists]] too in
 +
our [[language]]" 9 , and doubtless in many other [[languages]] which
 +
have inherited the [[idea]] that the [[lion]] is the [[king]] of the {{Wiki|beasts}}.  
 +
[[Lions]] roar, so the [[Buddha]] roars too. The early reciters attributed
 +
the [[epithet]] ‘[[lion]]’ to the [[Buddha]], expanded the comparison to
 +
describe the likenesses and included the detail of \he (lion’s) ‘roar’.  
 +
The {{Wiki|evidence}} (to be considered in detail below) suggests that it
 +
was the [[existence]] of this simile which inspired the reciters to
 +
attribute a content to, or to invent a content for the [[Buddha’s]]
 +
[[lion’s roar]].  
  
[[Bagchi]], Prabodh [[Chandra]]. 1927. Le [[canon]] bouddhique en Chine: Les traduc-
+
Having set the scene, so to speak, with regard to the early
teurs et les traductions. Tome I. {{Wiki|Paris}}.  
+
reciters, we can now show how our [[investigation]] of the texts
 +
about the [[lion’s roar]] supports these [[ideas]].  
  
45. See Dupont 1955,189f210.  
+
First of all there is the invention of situating the [[Buddha’s]]
 +
[[lion’s roar]] within a [[tradition]] of [[debate]]. The term ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ is
 +
not connected with the {{Wiki|Vedic}} [[debate]] [[tradition]]. It occurs neither in
 +
the [[Upanisads]] nor in the [[Brahmanas]]. As the [[Buddhist texts]] can be
 +
so [[faithful]] and so accurate in their [[representation]] of the {{Wiki|Vedic}}
 +
[[tradition]] 120 , we can conclude from this that the term ‘[[lion’s roar]]’
 +
for a challenge is an invention of the [[Buddhist]] reciters. We can
 +
further conclude that it was part, of this invention fictitiously to
 +
situate the [[lion’s roar]] challenge within the [[debate]] [[tradition]]. Some
 +
details placed within the [[Buddha’s]] [[lion’s roar]] probably authen¬
 +
tically belong to the {{Wiki|Vedic}} [[debate]] [[tradition]]: the [[Buddha’s]] re¬
 +
futation of a potential challenge to his capacities as a debater
 +
may be among these 121 , though 1 specify that I mean that these
  
46. Sec the examples in Chutiwongs and Leidy 1994, and Dupont 1955, pis.
 
29 A and 30 A.
 
  
47. For examples see Chutiwongs 1984 (chap. 5), Chutiwongs and Leidy
+
118 Sec Monier-WiUiams, s.v. si/nfui for many examples.  
1994, and Dupont 1955, pis. 12 B. 22 AB, 28 A, 29 B, 30 B, and 31 A.  
 
  
48. Boisselier 1966,97.  
+
119 We have ihc {{Wiki|expressions}} ‘a [[lion]] among men, ‘the strength of a [[lion]]', etc.  
  
49. Boisselier 1966* 300. For “Saintes Empreintes” in [[Cambodia]], see
+
120 See Witxel. op. citz Manne (1990). (1992).  
Boisselier's §§ 219,256-57,303, and Fig. 70.  
 
  
 +
121 [[Formula]] (4). Sec also Manne (1992).
  
100 J1ABS20.1
+
Manne — [[The Lion’s Roar]]
  
  
Barcau, Andre. 1955. Les sectes bouddhiques du Petit Vehicule, Publications
+
represent the demands of the [[tradition]] on a debater and not that
de 1’Ecolc framjaise d’Extreme-Oricnt 37. {{Wiki|Paris}}.  
+
the [[Buddha]] himself uttered these very phrases. There is no way
 +
we can establish as a fact which phrases the [[Buddha]] ever uttered.  
 +
Other details have to be accounted for differently.  
  
Bauer, [[Christian]]. 1991. “Notes on Mon {{Wiki|Epigraphy}}." JSS 79.1: 31-83.  
+
I have argued that the early reciters spontaneously created
 +
similes, and with them, in this example of the [[lion’s roar]],
 +
frameworks within which they could {{Wiki|present}} their accounts. With
 +
regard to the aspects of the [[Teaching]] that come within the ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ and the [[powers]] and confidences of the Tathiigata, l think
 +
that here we see redactors usihg such a framework inventively.
 +
The framework is that of the simile that compares the [[Buddha]] to
 +
a [[lion]] and [[attributes]] content to his roar. The [[existence]] of this
 +
framework, and the illogicality (why these particular aspects?) of
 +
the examples that remain to us of the Teachings placed within it,
 +
suggest the likelihood that many other aspects of the [[Teaching]]
 +
were also placed within it but those cited here aje the only ones
 +
that have' come down to us in these texts. With regard to the
 +
qualities of the [[Tathagata]] that are placed within this framework,
 +
these are not particularly coherent, those in quote (8) comprising
 +
adaptations of other [[formulas]], especially that of paras. 40-94 of
 +
the [[Samannaphala Sutta]], those in quote (11) perhaps based upon a
 +
challenge that was once made against the [[Buddha]] and of which
 +
no record remains in these texts.  
  
Boisselier, J[canJ. 1966. Lc •:ambodge. Manuel d’archeologie d’Extreme-
+
Having invented the attribution of a [[lions]] roar to the
{{Wiki|Orient}}, Premiere Partie: Asie du Sud-Est, Tome 1. {{Wiki|Paris}}.  
+
[[Buddha]], the redactors generalised this invention to include trunks
 +
as well. With regard to the [[monk’s]] lion’s roars, the permission to
 +
the [[monks]] to make a ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ about the four types of samairu
 +
is an example of textual muddle 122 . Probably [[Sariputta’s]] great irn-
  
Boun Souk, Thao. 1971. Limage du [[Buddha]] dans lart lao . {{Wiki|Vientiane}}.
 
  
Charuk nai praihei [[thai]], 2529. [[Bangkok]]
+
122 See Manne (1990): 4.1
  
Chirapat Prapandvidya. 1990. “The Sab Bak Inscription: {{Wiki|Evidence}} of an Early
 
[[Vajrayana]] [[Buddhist]] Presence in [[Thailand]] " JSS 78.2:10-14.
 
  
Chutiwongs, [[Nandana]]. 1984. The [[Iconography]] of Avalokiteivara in Mainland
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, .1 (1996)
{{Wiki|South East Asia}} . Diss. U. of [[Leiden]].  
 
  
Chutiwongs, [[Nandana]], and Denise Patry Leidy. 1994. [[Buddha of the Future]] .
 
[[New York]] and {{Wiki|Singapore}}.
 
  
Copies, George. 1961. Recueil des Inscriptions du [[Siam]] , Deuxi&me Partie:
+
poriance attracted to him a ho the attribution of various lion’s
Inscriptions de Dvdravati, de Qrivijaya et de Lavo . [[Bangkok]].  
+
roars. One of [[Sari]] putta’s lion’s roars is a piece of [[pure]] {{Wiki|propaganda}},  
 +
while the other two [[form]] part of dramatic stories' The anomaly
 +
between these lion’s roars, two being designated as such by the
 +
[[Buddha]] while the third docs nut possess such purported authori¬
 +
sation may reflect the different {{Wiki|tendencies}} on the part of the
 +
reciters regarding what they would or would not put into a [[lion’s roar]]. The examples in the [[Thera]]- and Therl-gatha are clearly
 +
[[poetry]], as is the attribution of the [[epithet]] ‘lion’s roarer’ to a [[monk]].  
  
1964. Inscriptions du Cambodge . Voi. 7. {{Wiki|Paris}}.  
+
A simile is invented, a [[lion’s roar]] is created for the [[Buddha]],
 +
and then for the [[monks]]. The next step is to impose this invention
 +
on suuus (the inclusion of the term slhan&da in their titles may
 +
reflect late [[ideas]] in which [[suttas]] were particularly important).  
 +
Thus is [[tradition]] created!
  
1989. “La plus ancienne inscription en pSli du Cambodge." Articles
 
  
sur le pays khmer. {{Wiki|Paris}}: 282-89 (= Etudes cambodgiennes 32, originally
+
[[ABHIDHAMMA]] STUDIES
published in BfifEO 36).
 
  
Dawcc Dawcewam. 1982. [[Brahmanism]] in South-East {{Wiki|Asia}} (From the earliest
+
At the [[British]] [[Buddhist]] Association, [[London]], we shall, be
time to 1445 A.D .). {{Wiki|New Delhi}}.  
+
reading again from September Dhammasahgani, [[Vibhanga]],
 +
[[Patthana]] and Commentaries in English translation. We
 +
welcome those wishing to study along with us. They should
 +
[[contact]]:
  
Dupont, Pierre. 1955. La statuaire preangkorienne , Ascona.  
+
A Haviland-Nye
 +
11 Biddulph Road
 +
[[London]] W9 1JA
 +
Tel/Fax: 0171 286 5575.  
  
[[Haribhadra]]. 1960. Abhisamayalanjikardloka. Ed. P. L. [[Vaidya]]. [[Buddhist]] San¬
+
[[DEATH]] AS [[MEDITATION]] SUBJECT IN THE [[THERAVADA]] TRADITION
skrit Texts 4. [[Darbhanga]].
 
  
von Hinuber, Oskar. 1984. Sieben Goldblatter einer PancavimSatisahasrika
 
[[Prajhaparamita]] aus Anurddhapura. Gottingen. ^ "
 
  
-. 1985. “Epigraphical Varieties of Continental [[Pali]] from Devnimori
+
In 1986, headlines such as ‘[[U.S.]] [[Buddhist monk]] [[meditates]] on
 +
[[decaying corpses]]’ 1 and ‘[[Corpses]] remind me of [[nature of Samsara]]’ 1
 +
were on the front page of [[Sinhalese]] newspapers. The articles were
 +
describing the peculiar [[meditation practice]] of an [[American]] [[monk]]
 +
named Alokadhamma. I’hree years after his [[ordination]], [[Bhikkhu]]
 +
Alokadhamma had become famous throughout the [[island]] of [[Sri Lanka]] because he resided in a [[cave]] in the company of two
 +
decomposing [[bodies]] placed in a glass cage, with four other [[bodies]]
 +
laid outside. These reports became the impetus for the attempt to
 +
answer the question that this paper is revolving around: what is
 +
the place and the role of the [[meditation]] on [[death]] within the
 +
contemporary [[Theravada Buddhist tradition]]?
  
and {{Wiki|Ratnagiri}}[[Buddhism]] and its [[Relation]] to Other [[Religions]]: Essays in  
+
Alokadhamma’s practice was most probably derived from the
Honour of Dr, [[Shozen]] Kumoi on his Seventieth Birthday, {{Wiki|Kyoto}}: 185-200.
+
[[Satipatthana Sutta]], where the [[Buddha]] describes the nine types of
 +
[[charnel-ground]] [[meditation]]. In order to clarify this unusual prac¬
 +
tice, however, the position as put forth in [[Theravada]] {{Wiki|literature}}  
 +
first needs to be investigated. This will clarify the [[boundaries]] of
 +
the two major [[meditation practices]] centred on [[death]], it. [[asubha]]-
 +
bhavaiia and [[maranasati]]. Secondly, in an attempt to conceptualise
 +
the contemporary practice, 1 will allude to eleven qualitative
 +
interviews that I conducted with [[Buddhist monks]] and with a [[dasa]]  
 +
sil matavo in [[Sri Lanka]] during May 1993; it is important to em-  
  
-—. 1994. “On the History of the [[Name]] of the [[Pali Language]]." Selected
 
  
Papers on [[Pali]] Studies . [[Oxford]]: 76-90.  
+
' 1 [[Dharmasiri]] Gamage, VS. [[Buddhist monks]] [[meditates]] on [[decaying corpses]]*. The
  
-. 1595. “[[Buddhist Law]] According to the Theravada-Vinaya: A Sur¬
+
[[Sunday]] Observer , {{Wiki|Colombo}}, 2 November 1986.  
vey Oa {{Wiki|Theory}} and Practice." JIABS 18.1:7-45.  
 
  
Goonaratnc, Edmund R., ed. 1884. “Telakataha-gatha " JPTS . Rpt. vol 1
+
2 [[Id]]., ‘[[Corpses]] remind me of [[nature of Samsara]]’, op. cit „ 9 November 1986.  
([[London]]: 1978)49-68.  
 
  
Luce, G. H. 1974. “The Advent of [[Buddhism]] to [[Burma]].” [[Buddhist Studies]] in
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
Honour of /. B. Horner . Eds. L. Cousins et al Dordrecht and [[Boston]]: 119-
 
38.
 
  
[[Malalasekera]], G. P. 1983. {{Wiki|Dictionary}} of [[Pali]] Proper Names, Vol. 1. {{Wiki|New Delhi}}. 1st ed. 1937.
 
  
[[Mitra]], Debala. 1980. [[Buddhist]] Monuments, [[Calcutta]]. 1st pub. December 1971.
+
Manue — [[The Lion’s Roar]]  
Monier-Wiliiams, Monier. 1976. A Sanskfit-English {{Wiki|Dictionary}}, [[Delhi]]. 1st ed.
 
[[Oxford]]: 1899.
 
  
Mudiyanse, Nandasena. 1967. [[Mahayana]] Monuments in [[Ceylon]]. {{Wiki|Colombo}}.
 
  
[[Nanjio]], Bunyiu. 1975. A Catalogue of the {{Wiki|Chinese}} Translation of the [[Buddhist Tripitaka]] , the [[Sacred]] [[Canon]] of the [[Buddhists]] in [[China]] and [[Japan]], [[San Francisco]]. 1st ed. [[Oxford]]: 1883.  
+
grcai man and a [[lion]] [[exists]] in other [[Indian]] texts 118 . It [[exists]] too in
 +
our [[language]] 119 , and doubtless in many other [[languages]] which
 +
have inherited the [[idea]] that the [[lion]] is the [[king]] of the {{Wiki|beasts}}.
 +
[[Lions]] roar, so the [[Buddha]] roars too. The early reciters attributed
 +
the [[epithet]] [[lion]]’ to the [[Buddha]], expanded the comparison to
 +
describe the likenesses and included the detail of \he (lion’s) ‘roar’. '
 +
The {{Wiki|evidence}} (to be considered in detail below) suggests that it
 +
was the [[existence]] of this simile which inspired the reciters to
 +
attribute a content to, or to invent a content for the [[Buddha’s]]  
 +
[[lion’s roar]].  
  
Ray, Nihar-Ranjan. 1939. “Early Traces of [[Buddhism in Burma]] " Journal of  
+
Having set the scene, so to speak, with regard to the early
the Greater [[India]] [[Society]] 6.1 (Jan., 1939): 1-52.  
+
. reciters, we can now show how our [[investigation]] of the texts
 +
about the [[lion’s roar]] supports these [[ideas]].  
  
Rea, A. 1990. “A [[Buddhist Monastery]] on the Sankaram Hills, Vizagapatam
+
First of all there is the invention of situating the [[Buddha’s]]
District." [[Delhi]]. 1st ed. Archccological Survey of [[India]], Annual Report,
+
[[lion’s roar]] within a [[tradition]] of [[debate]]. The term ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ is
1907-8,  
+
not connected with the {{Wiki|Vedic}} [[debate]] [[tradition]]. It occurs neither in
 +
the [[Upanisads]] nor in the [[Brahmanas]]. As the [[Buddhist texts]] can be
 +
so [[faithful]] and so accurate in their [[representation]] of the {{Wiki|Vedic}}
 +
[[tradition]] 120 , we can conclude from this that the term ‘[[lion’s roar]]’
 +
for a challenge is an invention of the [[Buddhist]] reciters. We can
 +
further conclude that it was part, of this invention fictitiously to
 +
situate the [[lion’s roar]] challenge within the [[debate]] [[tradition]]. Some
 +
details placed within the [[Buddha’s]] [[lion’s roar]] probably authen¬
 +
tically belong to the {{Wiki|Vedic}} [[debate]] [[tradition]]: the [[Buddha’s]] re¬
 +
futation of a potential challenge to his capacities as a debater
 +
may be among these 121 , though 1 specify that I mean that these
  
Rohanadeera, Mendis. 1988. “The Noen Sa Bua Inscription of Dong Si Mflha
 
Bo, Prachinburi." JSS 76:89-99.
 
  
Schopcn, Gregory. 1982. “The Text on the f Dharai)I Stones from [[Abhaya]]-  
+
118 See Monicr-Williams. s.v, sirnhu for many examples.  
giriya’: A Minor Contribution to the Study of MahaySna {{Wiki|Literature}} in
 
[[Ceylon]]." JIABS 5.1: 100-08.  
 
  
Sirisena, W. M. 1978. [[Sri Lanka]] and South-east {{Wiki|Asia}} : {{Wiki|Political}} , [[Religious]] and
+
119 We have ihc {{Wiki|expressions}} ‘a [[lion]] among men, ‘the strength of a [[lion]]’, etc.  
{{Wiki|Cultural}} Relations from A.D. c, WOO to c. 1500 . [[Leiden]].  
 
  
Skilling, Peter. 1987. “The Saniskftasamskrta-viniscaya of Dasabalasrimitra.”
+
120 See Witzcl, op. ci/; Manne (1990). (1992).  
BSR 4.1 :3-23.  
 
  
- . 199L “A [[Buddhist]] Verse Inscription from [[Andhra Pradesh]]." /D 34:
+
121 [[Formula]] (4). See also Manne (1992).  
  
239-46.
 
  
-. 1992. “Preliminary Report on a Recently Discovered [[Pali]] Inscrip¬
+
represent the demands of the [[tradition]] on a debater and not that
tion.” Warasan chotmaikhuo samnak-lekhanukan Somdetphrasangharat,
+
the [[Buddha]] himself uttered these very phrases. There is no way
Vol. I, No. 1, Oct.-Dcc. 2535 [1992):83-86; revised version under the title
+
we can establish as a fact which phrases the [[Buddha]] ever uttered.
“A Recently Discovered [[Pali]] Inscription from [[Nakhon Pathom]] " forthcoming
+
Other details have to be accounted for differently.
in JPTS,
 
  
- . 1993a. “A Citation from the * Buddhavanjisa Of the [[Abhayagiri]]  
+
I have argued that the early reciters spontaneously created
 +
similes, and with them, in this example of the [[lion’s roar]],
 +
frameworks within which they could {{Wiki|present}} their accounts. With
 +
regard to the aspects of the [[Teaching]] that come within the [[lions]]
 +
roar’ and the [[powers]] and confidences of the [[Tathagata]], 1 think
 +
that here we see redactors usihg such a framework inventively.
 +
The framework is that of the simile that compares the [[Buddha]] to
 +
a [[lion]] and [[attributes]] content to his roar. The [[existence]] of this
 +
framework, and the illogicality (why these particular aspects?) of
 +
the examples that remain to us of the Teachings placed within it,
 +
suggest the likelihood that many other aspects of the [[Teaching]]
 +
were also placed within it but those cited here are the only ones
 +
that have' come down to us in these texts. With regard to the
 +
qualities of the [[Tathagata]] that are placed within this framework,
 +
these are not particularly coherent, those in quote (8) comprising
 +
adaptations of other [[formulas]], especially that of paras. 40-94 of
 +
the Samaiinaphala [[Sutta]], those in quote (11) perhaps based upon a
 +
challenge that was once made against the [[Buddha]] and of which
 +
no record remains in these texts.
  
School." JPTS 18:165-75.  
+
Having invented the attribution of a [[lion’s roar]] to the
 +
[[Buddha]], the redactors generalised this invention to include ironks
 +
as well. With regard to the [[monk’s]] lion’s roars, the permission to
 +
the [[monks]] to make a ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ about the four types of sarnana
 +
is an example of textual muddle 122 . Probably [[Sariputta’s]] great inv
  
-. 1993b. “Thcravadln {{Wiki|Literature}} in [[Tibetan]] Translation." JPTS 19:
 
  
69-201.  
+
122 See Manne (1990>. 4.1
  
-. 1994. u [[Vimuttimagga]] and [[Abhayagiri]]: the form-aggregate according
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, .1 (1996)
  
to the Saniskrtdsamkftaviniscaya * JPTS 20: 171-210.
 
  
-. Forthcoming (a). [[Pali]] Inscriptions on a Stone Dhammacakka'and  
+
portancc attracted to him al'o the attribution of various lion’s
 +
roars. One of oariputta’s lion's roars is a piece of [[pure]] {{Wiki|propaganda}},
 +
while the other two [[form]] part of dramatic stories. The anomaly
 +
between these lion’s roars, two being designated as such by the
 +
[[Buddha]] while the third docs not possess such purported authori¬
 +
sation may reflect the different {{Wiki|tendencies}} on the part of the
 +
reciters regarding what they would or would not put into a [[lion’s roar]]. The examples in the [[Thera]]- and Therl-gatha are clearly
 +
[[poetry]], as is the attribution of the [[epithet]] ‘lion’s roarer’ to a [[monk]].
  
an Octagonal Pillar from Chai Nat." Forthcoming in JPTS,
+
A simile is invented, a [[lion’s roar]] is created for the [[Buddha]],
 +
and then for the [[monks]]. The next step is to impose this invention
 +
on [[suttas]] (the inclusion of the term slliandda in their titles may
 +
reflect late [[ideas]] in which [[suttas]] were particularly important).
 +
Thus is [[tradition]] created!
  
-. Forthcoming (b). “A [[Paritta]] Inscription from Srlk$etra in [[Burma]]."
 
  
Forthcoming in JPTS .
+
[[ABHIDHAMMA]] STUDIES
  
-. Forthcoming (c). “On the School-affiliation of the Tatna [[Dhamma]] -
+
At the [[British]] [[Buddhist]] Association, [[London]], we shall..be
 +
reading again from September DhammasaAgani, [[Vibhanga]],
 +
[[Patthana]] and Commentaries in English translation. We
 +
welcome those wishing to study along with us. They should
 +
[[contact]]:
  
paddT Forthcoming in JPTS,
+
A Haviland-Nye
 +
11 Biddulph Road
 +
[[London]] W9 1JA
 +
Tel/Fax: 0171 286 5575.
  
Stargardt, Janice. 1995. “The Oldest Known [[Pali]] Texts, 5th-6th century:
+
[[DEATH]] AS [[MEDITATION]] SUBJECT IN THE [[THERAVADA]] TRADITION
Results of the [[Cambridge]] Symposium on the [[Pyu]] Golden [[Pali]] Text from Sri
 
K$etra, 1S-19 April 1995." JPTS 21:199-213.
 
  
Supaphan na Bangchang. 2529 (1986). Wiwathanakan [[ngan]] khian phasa [[bali]]
 
nai prathet [[thai]] : charuk tatnnan phongsawadan son prakat, [[Bangkok]].
 
UThaMyat. 1963. [[Pyu]] Reader, [[Rangoon]].
 
  
Vothu Tinh. 1983. Les origines du [[Laos]], {{Wiki|Paris}}.  
+
In 1986, headlines such as ‘[[U.S.]] [[Buddhist monk]] [[meditates]] on
 +
[[decaying corpses]]’ 1 and ‘[[Corpses]] remind me of [[nature of Samsara]]’ 1
 +
were on the front page of [[Sinhalese]] newspapers. The articles were
 +
describing the peculiar [[meditation practice]] of an [[American]] [[monk]]
 +
named Alokadhamma. three years after his [[ordination]], [[Bhikkhu]]
 +
Alokadhamma had become famous throughout the [[island]] of [[Sri Lanka]] because he resided in a [[cave]] in the company of two
 +
decomposing [[bodies]] placed in a glass cage, with four other [[bodies]]
 +
laid outside. These reports became the impetus for the attempt to
 +
answer the question that this paper is revolving around: what is
 +
the place and the role of the [[meditation]] on [[death]] within the
 +
contemporary [[Theravada Buddhist tradition]]?
  
Frontispiece: the {{Wiki|calligraphy}} in Sino-Vietnamese
+
Alokadhamma’s practice was most probably derived from the  
characters (Norn) by Ven Thich Huyen-Vi reads:
+
Satipatfhana [[Sutta]], where the [[Buddha]] describes the nine types of
 +
[[charnel-ground]] [[meditation]]. In order to clarify this unusual prac¬
 +
tice, however, the position as put forth in [[Theravada]] {{Wiki|literature}}  
 +
first needs to be investigated. This will clarify the boundaries-of
 +
the two major [[meditation practices]] centred on [[death]], i a. [[asubha]]-
 +
[[bhavana]] and rnaranasati. Secondly, in an attempt to conceptualise
 +
the contemporary practice, 1 will allude to eleven qualitative
 +
interviews that I conducted with [[Buddhist monks]] and with a [[dasa]]
 +
sil matavo in [[Sri Lanka]] during May 1993; it is important to em-  
  
"Having transcended all [[illusions]],
 
in the end he [the [[Bodhisattva]]]
 
attains to [[Nirvana]]."
 
  
 +
* 1 [[Dharmasiri]] Gamage, VS. [[Buddhist monks]] [[meditates]] on [[decaying corpses]]'. The
 +
[[Sunday]] Observer , {{Wiki|Colombo}}. 2 November 1986.
  
The [[seals]], engraved by Ven. [[Bhikkhu]] [[Dhamma]]-
+
2 [[Id]]^ ‘[[Corpses]] remind me of [[nature of Samsara]]’, op, cil^ 9 November 1986.  
vlro of [[Thailand]], convey the same meaning as
 
the {{Wiki|calligraphy}}.  
 
  
Vol. U, 1
+
phasise that all the interviewees belonged to hermitages (arah-
 +
[[haka]]) where [[meditation]] is given priority. The two-fold procedure
 +
of textual and contemporary analyses will allow us further to
 +
understand the {{Wiki|theoretical}} and {{Wiki|modern}} {{Wiki|expressions}} of these
 +
practices.  
  
[[BUDDHIST]] STUDIES REVIEW
+
[[Bhikkhu]] Alokadhamma’s [[meditation]] on [[death]] seems to stem
 +
from the description of the nine [[charnel-ground]] [[meditations]] men¬
 +
tioned in the [[Satipatthana Sutta]]. This [[discourse]], [[traditionally]]
 +
considered the {{Wiki|theoretical}} base for [[meditation practice]], is divided
 +
into four main [[sections]]: [[meditation]] on the [[body]] ( [[kayanupassana]] ,),
 +
on the [[sensations]] ( [[vedananupassana]] ), on the [[mind]] {cittanu pas Sa¬
 +
na) and on the [[mental]] contents ( [[dhammanupassana]] ). The section
 +
concerned with the [[body]] is often regarded as the most eclectic of
 +
the four since it adumbrates different types of [[meditation]]. It
 +
discusses [[successively]] l) [[anapanasati]], [[mindfulness]] of the [[breath]],
 +
2) [[mindfulness]] of the [[four postures]] (walking, [[standing]], sitting and
 +
{{Wiki|lying}} down), 3) [[mindfulness]] of whatever [[activities]] one is involved
 +
in, 4) [[mindfulness]] of the repulsivcness by reviewing the thirty-one 3
  
  
1995
+
3 These 31 pans of the [[body]], along with the {{Wiki|brain}}, are the 32 [[subjects of meditation]] (katnmauhdna) that Buddhughosa includes in kayagatasati. ( ,..dvat •
 +
limsakamkammauhanam: — idam [[idha]] kayagaia sail ti adhippetam. Vism 240).
 +
We must point to the fact, however, that kayagaiasati is not restricted to those
 +
32 parts of the [[body]] in the Suita {{Wiki|literature}}, for it includes all the practices des¬
 +
cribed in the [[kayanupassana]] of the [[Satipatthana Sutta]] (see Kayagaiasati [[Sutta]], M
 +
111 89). We must also remark that although this portion of the [[Satipatthana]] is
 +
commonly known as the [[meditation]] on [[asubha]] (the ‘not-beautiful’), the term
 +
[[asubha]] is neither employed within the [[Satipatthana Sutta]] itself nor in commen-
 +
tarial {{Wiki|literature}} referring to this passage; in the [[Sumangalavilasini]], [[Buddhaghosa]]
 +
uses the term patikula (or [[patikkula]] ), meaning '{{Wiki|disgust}}*. Yet. the two practices
 +
seem to be analogous, for the [[Girimananda Sutta]] (A V [[108]]) defines [[asubha]] -
 +
sahha as the [[awareness]] of these 31 parts of the [[body]]. Although a slight {{Wiki|nuance}}
 +
may be introduced between [[asubha]] and asubhasahha we will, for the [[sake]] of
  
the [[asava]] and the ariya-savaka
+
Boisvert — [[Death]] as [[meditation]] [[subject]]  
  
 +
parts’of the [[body]], 5) [[mindfulness]] of the four .[[elements]] and finally,
 +
the practice that interests us, 6) the nine [[charnel-ground]] medi¬
 +
tations (nava slvathikapabbanlY. For each of these nine types of
 +
contemplation, a standard [[formula]] is used throughout. The only
 +
{{Wiki|nuance}} lies in the [[degree]] of decomposition of the [[body]] (or what
 +
is left of it) from the [[body]] that [[died]] the same day, to the rotten
 +
[[bones]] that have started [[transforming]] into dust. The [[formula]] runs
 +
like this: ‘as if'a [[monk]] were to see a corpse thrown aside in the
 +
[[charnel-ground]] [either [[dead]] since only one day, or since many
 +
months depending on the type of [[charnel-ground]] [[meditation]] one
 +
is involved in], he focuses on this [meaning his) [[body]] thus: "this
 +
[[body]] has the same [[nature]], it will become the same as that [[body]];
  
f nnctice of the [[Buddhist Path]], the
 
An important {{Wiki|purpose}} of th P , f t l anc j [[mindfulness]]
 
  
[[discipline]] of slla, the culuvauon of sdf^ntro^ ^ ^
+
[[simplicity]], adopt the common [[interpretation]] and refer to this practice as one
 +
belonging to [[asubha]] [[meditation]].
  
and so forth, >s 10 .^"““thesJthlit dull 'he [[mind]] and prevent
+
4 However, these six different typos of [[meditation]] within the section on the
flow of [[defilements]]. » insieht The [[asava]] come to an
+
[[body]] ([[kayanupassana]]) may not be as eclectic as it seems- if considered from a
 +
particular {{Wiki|perspective}}. Since this portion of the [[Satipatthana]] deals with the [[body]],
 +
it might be possible that the [[Buddha]] classified the [[six meditations]] related to the
 +
[[body]] temporarily, i.e in the same order as the [[evolution]] of the [[body]]. The first
 +
[[bodily]] [[activity]] to take place after [[birth]] is [[breathing]] (anapiina) and the baby re¬
 +
mains in the position he was laid (more or less); later the child learns to sit,  
 +
stand and walk (the [[four postures]]); subsequently, the child becomes {{Wiki|aware}} of his
 +
[[own]] [[person]], his separate [[existence]] and [[activities]] on which he can reflect ([[mind]]¬
 +
fulness of whatever [[activities]] one is involved in); when the child reaches his
 +
teens, [[passion]] emerges and therefore [[mindfulness]] of the repulsiveness by review¬
 +
ing the 31 parts of the [[body]] becomes appropriate; when the individual’s intellec¬
 +
tual capacity is at its peak, the more introspective practice of the [[four elements]]
 +
might be more appropriate; at the very end of [[life]], when the [[body]] returns to
 +
ashes, we find the nine [[charnel-ground]] [[meditations]] (nava sivathikapabbani). This
 +
{{Wiki|hypothetical}} scheme demands further [[investigation]] and does not imply that a
 +
specific practice ought to be undertaken exclusively during a particular period
 +
of [[life]].
  
the [[arising]] of underaupd'n^ mstght J ^ m ^
 
  
end finally in the en g tkat overwhelms. It seems
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
  
[[asava]] means‘influx or an f de fii e ments l and is
 
  
t0 mean both ‘inf low and th ogfto than is perhaps
+
it cannot escape it'" 5 6 . The recurring aspect of this [[formula]] stresses
actually mote near y sy y bears one along in
+
that the [[monk]] must establish a parallel with his own‘body by
 +
{{Wiki|reflecting}} on the fact that it possesses the same [[nature]] ( evarfi -
 +
[[dhammo]]) and that it will eventually reach the same [[state]] as that
 +
decaying [[body]] (evam- bliavi). V;
  
recognised. The ogham flood » <“ . (Dhp 47)> that  
+
We may raise the question of whether this particular passage
 +
prescribes the actual contemplation of [[corpses]], for the only expli¬
 +
cit prescription is to reflect on the fact that one’s [[own]] [[body]] will
 +
eventually be similar to those {{Wiki|lying}} in charnel-grounds. The text
 +
does not necessarily require that the [[practitioner]] observe a corpse*.  
 +
According to this passage, therefore, it does not seem {{Wiki|imperative}}
 +
for someone practising the nine [[charnel-ground]] [[contemplations]]
 +
actually to observe [[corpses]] at that [[moment]]; it is only said that this
 +
[[person]] must reflect on the fact that his [[own]] [[body]] is possessed of
 +
the same [[nature]] as that of the [[bodies]] at different stages of [[decay]].
  
[[Samsara]], that ‘overwhelms * S J f„ ,he earlier [[suttas]] the term
+
HowSver, in the sixth [[chapter]] of the [[Visuddhimagga]] ( [[Asubha]] -
‘drowns in the ocean of Sarpsara. in  
+
kamrncitthananiddesa), [[Buddhaghosa]] elaborates on the method of
 +
pursuing such a practice and describes the observation of [[corpses]]  
 +
at one of the ten different stages of decomposition. In this
 +
[[chapter]] [[ten stages]] are enumerated as asubhakammaffliaha ([[object of meditation]] for the practice of the non-beautiful); the bloated,
 +
the livid, the festering, the cut up, the gnawed, the scattered, the
 +
hacked and scattered, the bleeding, the worm-infested and the
 +
skeleton. These are basically the same as those nine described in  
  
[[ogha]] occurs more frequently^ [[kamma]] await .
 
  
[[Asava]] is J' Thas thc [[arahant]], by destroying the
+
5 puna ca [[param]] bhikkhavc [[bhikkhu]] seyyatha pi passeyya [[sari]] [[ram]] sivathikaya
 +
chadditam ckiimatam va dvihamalam va lihamatam vit uddhumatakam vinilakam
 +
vipubbakdjdiam. so imam eva kayam upasamharanli: ‘Ayam pi kho kayo evam-
 +
[[dhammo]] evam-bhitvi clam li'. D 11 295.
  
mg [[fruition]] m futur * 1 . a that would otherwise produce
+
6 The verb of ihc subordinate clause (passeyya) is in the optative tense
  
[[asava]] has destroyed the kamm ttenuate it. See, for
+
(sailami) and is preceded by an adverb (seyyatha) meaning ‘just as'.  
  
its effect in {{Wiki|future}} [[lives]], or at .[[east]]  
+
Boisvert — [[Death]] as [[meditation]] [[subject]]  
  
  
. for thc meaning of [[asava]] .  
+
the SatipaUhana [[Sutta]], the primary difference being that in the
 +
[[latter]], the {{Wiki|classification}} is arranged according to the period of
 +
[[decay]], while in the former it is according to the qualitative [[state]]
 +
of the [[corpses]]. Elaborate {{Wiki|training}} and preparation are prescribed
 +
prior to the culmination of practice — the actual contemplation
 +
of decaying [[bodies]] 7 . The commentator also explains the different
 +
approaches one ought to take during the actual contemplation*
 +
and also warns the reader that one should not use the [[body]] pf tbe
 +
opposite {{Wiki|sex}} for this practice. As Kevin Truinor has remarked*,
 +
[[Buddhaghosa]] does not seem to take into [[consideration]] the section
  
1 See l.B. Horner’s Middle *W ^ * evidcnl from a passage
 
  
2 That the [[Jains]] understood theJerm [[Vappa]] says , . . . there may
+
7 A [[monk]] must intensively prepare himself before selling forth lo the char¬
 +
nel-ground (or a similar place). According to [[Buddhaghosa]] (Vism 180X the prac¬
 +
titioner must first find a [[teacher]] to supervise him; one cannot undertake this
 +
[[discipline]] without guidance. Only after having learned everything from him,
 +
should the [[disciple]] find a proper dwelling (this ‘proper dwelling* is described ii*
 +
C1UV of Vism, §§1-20) and abide [[meditating]] (investigating; pariyesantena) on the
 +
[[subject]] that was given to him. Later, if he hears that a corpse is {{Wiki|lying}} at the
 +
[[root]] of a [[tree]], a village gate, a [[charnel-ground]], etc., he must first inform his
 +
{{Wiki|superior}} before setting forth and {{Wiki|undertaking}} his contemplation, the [[reason]] being
 +
that if he does not return due lo [[lions]], [[tigers]], {{Wiki|robbers}}, or others t . X the su¬
 +
perior could send some younger [[monk]] to rescue him. Then only, the text says,
 +
can he proceed ‘as [[happy]] as a [[warrior]] longing to {{Wiki|witness}} an inauguration', Bud¬
 +
dhaghosa also says that the [[yogi]] ought to go alone (eko adutiyo gacchali ) and
 +
should not approach the charncl-ground against the [[wind]] {pativata ), for his [[own]]
 +
[[body]] might react to the {{Wiki|smell}} and he might [[repent]] havmg undertaken this
 +
project.  
  
in the Ahguttara [[Nikaya]], where t nQl (yel ) ripened, because of  
+
8 The [[yogi]] ought to apprehend the sign ( nimitla ) (of the bloated. . . .) by 1)
 +
its {{Wiki|colour}}, 2) its mark (the three phases of [[life]]), 3) its shape, 4) its [[direction]], 5)
 +
its location, 6) its limitations, (Vism 184), 7) its joints, 8) its openings, 9) its
 +
concavities, 10) its convexities, and 11) all round (Vism 185). The last five
 +
4 approaches are only recommended if the [[practitioner]] has not grasped the sign.
 +
i 9 Trainor, Kevin. ‘In the [[Eye]] of the Beholder; NonaUachment and the [[Body]] in
 +
Subha‘s Verse ([[Therigatha]] 71)*, JAAR LXJ/l, note 35. pp.68-9. The verses referred
 +
to are Theragalha 393-8.
  
be. sir. a formerly done [[evil deed]]. [[suffering]] would flow in upon
 
  
which [[influxes]] ([[asava]]) to be exper.e d b possible the [[Buddhists]]
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)  
  
(«yyum) a man in a {{Wiki|future}} [[life]] (AU. P. ^
 
  
adopted the term from the [[Jains]]. b (i
 
  
  
oiuuio KCVACW i
+
of the rheragithi where an [[arahant]] is portrayed as [[contemplating]]
 +
a woman’s corpse in a [[charnel-ground]].
  
 +
In this [[chapter]], although the [[objects of meditation]] are
 +
cadavers, the {{Wiki|concept}} of [[death itself]] is totally absent. The chief
 +
aim of this practice is to develop [[asubha]] towards our [[own]] [[body]] ,
 +
and that of others, in order to eradicate any kind of [[lust]] or
 +
[[passion]] that may arise 10 . The {{Wiki|purpose}} of this [[meditation]] was not
 +
to develop an [[awareness]] of [[death itself]], but rather to stimulate
 +
some [[sense]] of [[repulsion]]. [[Buddhaghosa]] further characterises these
 +
[[ten meditations]] as belonging to asubhabhdvand, and he [[perceives]]
 +
them as {{Wiki|distinct}} from the [[meditation]] on [[death]] ( marandnussaii ),
  
example, Angulimala’s [[suffering]] three blows to the head and the
+
* for he devotes a full [[chapter]] to this type of [[meditation]], to which
.^[[Buddha’s]] remarks about it in M 86, that he should endure it as
+
wc will soon return. [[Buddhaghosa]] explains that the [[meditation]] on
he is experiencing the results of [[kamma]] that would otherwise
+
[[asubha]] particularly fits the [[greedy]] {{Wiki|temperament}} ( ragacarita ), and  
,have resulted in him being born in [[hell]]. It is the d$ava-flow
+
he further elaborates by correlating each of the ten degrees of  
that impels one on into {{Wiki|future}} [[births]] ( [[punabbhava]] ): the flow of
+
[[decay]] to a specific [[greed]]".  
[[sensuality]] ( karna ), [[ignorance]] ( [[avijja]] ) and being ( [[bhava]] ). There'
 
is also a fourth, (wrong) [[views]] ( [[ditthi]] ), that was added to the
 
[[asava]], but this ought perhaps to be covered by [[avijja]]. It should
 
be noted that [[avijja]] is not merely the absence of [[knowledge]] or
 
[[ignorance]], but means false or wrong [[understanding]] resulting in
 
[[wrong views]] and speculative [[knowledge]]. The negative prefix']
 
‘a- has six different meanings of which absence is only one.J
 
The a - in [[avijja]] has the same function as in [[adhamma]] which
 
is recognised as not merely meaning the absence of ‘righteous¬
 
ness’, but positive ‘wickedness’ as applied, for instance, to the
 
{{Wiki|behaviour}} of [[Devadatta]] 3 . Adharmah is the example given in
 
Saiiskrit {{Wiki|grammar}} for this use of the prefix l a-\
 
  
The [[arahant]], the khinasavo — ‘he in whom the [[asava]] arel
+
Although this correlation with the ten {{Wiki|expressions}} of [[greed]] is  
destroyed’ — by realising that the [[asava]] are no rhore, can truly
+
probably the construct of the commentator, the [[Sutta]] {{Wiki|literature}}
affirm, Finished is [[birth]] ...’ khlnajati, etc., i.e. the [[kamma]] that
 
would otherwise lead - to another [[birth]] and keep it in being is no
 
more. Thus the realisation that the [[asava]] are destroyed is the  
 
same as realising that [[rebirth]] will no longer occur, the necessary
 
[[reason]] or [[conditions]] for the {{Wiki|future}} [[birth]] no longer [[exist]]. If the
 
destruction is not complete, the alternative is anagamitaya , non¬
 
returning.
 
  
It is because the [[anagamin]] still has some Lhavasava that he
 
continues to ‘become’ and arises in the [[Brahma-world]] of the
 
[[Pure Abodes]]. As the [[sotapanna]] and [[sakadagamin]] are not rid of
 
  
 +
10 ’This filthy [[body]] stinks outright / Like ordure, like a privy’s site / This
 +
[[body]] men that have [[insight]] / Condemn, is [[object]] of a fools [[delight]] / A {{Wiki|tumour}}
 +
where nine holes abide / Wrapped in a coat of clammy hide / And trickling
 +
filth on every side / Polluting the [[air]] with stenches far and wide / If it per¬
 +
chance should come about / That what is inside came out / Surely a man
 +
wo’ild need u knout / With which to put the [[crows]] 'tend [[dogs]] to rout*. (Vism VI
 +
93, translation taken from The [[Path of Purification]] , p.203). It is [[interesting]] to
 +
note that in the Vism, the meaning of the term [[asubha]] is very similar to that
 +
of [[patikkula]] , i.e. rcpulsivcncss.
  
See ltivutiaka, suua 89
+
11 Vism, p.193 ff; Abhidiiamma and commeniarial {{Wiki|literature}} classifies
 +
personalities into six types of {{Wiki|temperament}} ([[carita]]): [[greedy]] ( rega ), hating ( [[dosa]]),
 +
deluded ([[moha]]), [[faithful]] {s add hi i), {{Wiki|intelligent}} ( bud d hi ) and speculative ([[vitakka]]).
 +
On these, see Vism, p.101 ff.
  
[[Ireland]] [[Asava]] and Arlya-Savaka
+
Boisvert — [[Death]] os [[meditation]] [[subject]]  
  
  
the [[asava]] (specifically the kdmdsava ) they will continue to be
 
born among [[devas]] and men in the [[Kamaloka]]. However, much
 
of their {{Wiki|past}} [[kamma]] has been destroyed so they will not con¬
 
tinue in [[Samsara]] for long and are completely excluded from the
 
[[lower realms]], the apdya. It is, apparently, at the [[moment]], of 1
 
stepping onto the [[Path]], the [[ariya-magga]], that a large amount of |
 
the [[burden]] of {{Wiki|past}} [[kamma]] awaiting [[fruition]] is destroyed, altered )
 
or oecomes inoperative. And therefore, it is at this [[moment]]
 
also that it is decided whether or not the dsava-flow will dry up
 
in that [[lifetime]] or will continue to flow for a little longer, but
 
not longer, than anqther seven [[births]], according to the [[Buddha]].
 
  
As it is connected with {{Wiki|past}} [[kamma]] which is so complex and
+
and especially the older [[sections]] — establishes an explicit link
varied for each {{Wiki|individual}}, and as a [[deed]] already done cannot be
+
between the practice of [[asubha]] [[meditation]] and the [[greedy]]
undone, a [[person]] has no choice in the {{Wiki|matter}} of whether he be-
+
{{Wiki|temperament}}. The Theragathii, for example, depicts the story of  
comes a [[sotapanna]], [[sakadagamin]], [[anagamin]] or [[arahant]]. All this
+
Singalapita who got rid of [[greed]] towards [[sensual desire]] through
leads to the startling conclusion that, at the time of the [[Buddha]],  
+
the contemplation of a skeleton (or at least the [[idea]], sahhd, of a
contrary to what came to be believed in later times, an in¬
+
skeleton) 12 . However, the two most explicit passages correlating
dividual did not progress from [[sotapanna]], etc., through to
+
the [[awareness]] of [[asubha]] with the diminution of [[lust]] arc found in
[[arahant]], but that the [[four paths]] and {{Wiki|fruits}} were 1 originally
+
the [[Samyutta Nikaya]] and [[Anguttara Nikaya]] where it is clearly
considered to be alternative [[attainments]]. By [[definition]] the
+
stated that [[asubha]] should be developed in order to rid oneself of
[[arahant]] attains the [[fruition]] of the [[path]], arhatta-phala , and .
+
[[lust]] 13 . Moreover, the various classifications of the qualities neces¬
[[extinction]] ( parinibbuna ) ‘here and now’ in this {{Wiki|present}}, [[life]]. Tile
+
sary for the eradication of [[lust]] always include [[asubha]] .or [[asubha]]-
[[anagamin]], however, cannot do this, he has missed the oppor¬
+
sahhd 1 *. Other passages in the [[Sutta]] {{Wiki|literature}} indicate that these
tunity and must continue on to the [[Pure Abodes]] and attain
+
qualities do not eradicate [[lust]], but lead to the {{Wiki|deathless}}, a term
[[extinction]] ‘there’, being unable to return ‘here’ to this [[life]] again.  
+
often equated with [[Nibbana]] 15 . More precisely, the [[Samyutta Nikaya]] indicates that properly [[cultivating]] the {{Wiki|recognition}} (sahhd)
For the [[sotapanna]] and [[sakadagamin]] it is not stated how they
+
of any of five types of cadavers (the skeleton, the worm-eaten,  
will attain [[Parinibbana]], so it is uncertain as to their [[fate]]. It is
+
the discoloured, the fissured and the inflated corpse) 14 can induce
possible they will attain it at the [[moment of death]] at the end of
+
.[[arahanthood]] or the [[state]] of non-return 11 . From what wc have
their last [[birth]].  
 
  
The simile is given in the [[suttas]] (c.g. M 105) of a man
 
struck with a poisoned arrow. A surgeon is obtained who
 
extracts the arrow, drains the [[poison]] and cleans up the wound.
 
  
  
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 12, 1 (1995)  
+
12 [[Thag]]. p.4 (18).
  
 +
13 Asubhaya [[cittam]] bhavehi. A 1 11K; [[asubha]] bhaveiabbii ragassa puhimaya. A
 +
IV 358.
  
wLhll fmmr patiem t0 l00k after the wound ’ 3001111 it and
+
14 In a list of 10. see A V 309-10; in a list of 9, A IV 465; in a list of 7. A
  
will hi! T T t,me ’ C0ver U and kee P ^ clean so that it
+
IV 148; in a list of 5. A IV 276.  
will heal completely. As the {{Wiki|patient}} follows this advice the
 
  
wound soon heals. In another case, although the wound was not
+
15 In a list of 9, at A IV 3B7; in a list of 7, A IV 46.
  
folh-)\ Cte \ ramed of the P°i son * thjs does not {{Wiki|matter}}. By
+
16 Aff/iiJtd, pulavaka, [[vinilaka]] . vicehiddaka. uddumutuka. These 5 are members
following the surgeon’s advice of [[looking after]] the wound it
 
does heal as in the first case, although it might possibly take a
 
itUe longer to do so. However, the situation [[exists]] where
 
omcone else is treated by the surgeon and the arrow extracted
 
but he ignores the advice given to look after the' wound. The
 
  
by* d°ust and'd rt ^ being conta ™nated
+
of Budtlhaghosa’s ten-fold list of axubhakkatnmauhana referred to previously.
  
dLh oHhc padent ^ ^  
+
17 S V 129-31. The Vism exemplifies this statement by presenting the story of
 +
[[Mahatissa]] [[Thera]]: upon [[seeing]] the {{Wiki|teeth}} (danUttlfuktc the lames of the {{Wiki|teeth}}. The
 +
author stresses that is it the [[bones]] \atthika\ that [[Mahatissa]] [[perceives]], for they are
 +
part of the skeleton and fall into the asubhakammaithana) of a woman running
 +
uway from her husband, [[Mahatissa]] acquired asubhasahha and [[attained]] [[Nibbana]].
 +
When her husband, seeking his wife, asked him whether lie had seen a woman
 +
C*yBD*>UOraLi^- :V17*54 VsIMKjn: V> i"W* f. • . "9WWiM*^f ~ * V-*~.- V
  
The surgeon, of course, is the [[Buddha]]. The poisoned arrow
 
crav.ng, the [[cause of suffering]] or the [[state]] of needing treat-
 
  
[[Buddha]] • y u XtraCtlnS the arrow and dra »ning the [[poison]] the
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
  
UD to the n, 1 " 8 1 iS ‘ [[health]] 0r Nibb3na - hereafter, it is
+
seen so far, the place ascribed to [[asubha]] within [[Wikipedia:canonical|canonical]] [[Pali literature]] is unequivocal: its [[cultivation]] car. lead to [[Nibbana]], or at
 +
least to great benefits such as the eradication of [[passion]] 18 .
  
up to the [[person]] concerned to attend to his [[own]] wound that is  
+
This type of [[meditation]] is dependent, to a certain extent, up¬
 +
on [[death]], for in many instances it uses [[death]] as an [[object]]. We use
 +
the term [[object]] in the [[sense]] that there is something [[visible]] or
 +
{{Wiki|tangible}} that can be observed. In these cases, the [[practitioner]] con¬
 +
templates cadavers. Although [[death]] as an [[object]] is not necessary
 +
to practise [[asubha]] [[meditation]], as with the contemplation of the
 +
thirty-one parts of the [[body]], it is often considered a crucial re¬
 +
quirement. It has already been noted that [[Buddhaghosa’s]] [[ten objects]] of [[meditation]] for the [[cultivation]] of [[asubha]] arc [[corpses]] at
 +
different stages of [[decay]]. Although [[Buddhaghosa’s]] {{Wiki|emphasis}} on
 +
contemplation of [[corpses]] is not accentuated in the [[Sutta]] {{Wiki|literature}},
 +
1 have found passages referring to it. There is, however, another
 +
type of [[meditation]] on [[death]], known as maratyasati , which is  
  
sr„L P3,h n so r hu comp,eu hca,th «
 
  
maJly [[attained]] The first case is lhat of the [[arahant]]. the next in
+
pass by, Mahiiiissa replied wilh \hc verses which later became famotis*in the  
which a variable amount of [[poison]] ([[ignorance]], avijjtisava) still
+
Thcravada [[tradition]]: Whether it was a man or a woman / That went by \
remains behind are those on the three lower pate Really
+
noticed not / But only that on this high road / There goes a group of [[bones]].
ere is the [[person]] who ignores the advice of the [[Buddha]] does
+
(Vism, p.2L Translation quoted from The [[Path of Purification]], p22\
no. enter the [[Path]] or goes off on a wrong [[path]] (seeT.'lOfl
 
He presumably by not stepping onto the [[Path]] does not become
 
  
iner«« and*ff a “f h ' S o MVa C0 " tin “ e 10 and
+
18 However, this practice has to be undertaken with extreme [[care]]. A passage
 +
of the [[Vinaya]] (Vin. Ill iSultavibhahga), p.68 fO reports that [[monks]] who have
 +
been instructed by the [[Buddha]] to cultivate [[asubha]] asked a [[samana]] named Miga-
 +
landaka to deprive them of [[life]], for their [[bodies]] had become an inconvenience
 +
to them. U is said that Migalandaka killed 60 [[monks]] in one day. The [[Buddha]],
 +
noticing that the number of [[monks]] had decreased, requested [[Ananda]] to assemble
 +
all the [[monks]]. To counteract ihe effect of this practice of [[asubha]], the [[Buddha]]
 +
[[taught]] [[anapanasati]] [[meditation]], the [[meditation]] on respiration. Although it is not
 +
explicit in the text, it seems that [[anapanasati]] is used to counterbalance the
 +
negative effects that may arise from the practice of [[asubha]], Thh incident is
 +
used in the [[Vinaya]] to explain the {{Wiki|rule}} ( [[parajika]] III) that a [[monk]] should not
 +
[[intention]] illy kill anyone or be the instrument in the {{Wiki|killing}} of anyone.
  
ncrease and [[accumulate]] Reverting or falling away, •giving un
+
Boisvert — [[Death]] as [[meditation]] [[subject]]  
  
the {{Wiki|training}}, ,s called '[[death]]’ elsewhere in the [[suttas]].
 
  
That the [[sotapanna]] is said to be born only up to seven
+
radically different from [[asubha]] [[meditation]], for it docs not use
 +
[[death]] as an [[object]], but rather as a [[subject]]. [[Death]] becomes the
 +
theme of the [[meditation]], and the [[practitioner]] is not required to  
 +
[[contemplate]] [[corpses]]. *
  
 +
Very few {{Wiki|allusions}} to [[maranasati]] are made in the [[Wikipedia:canonical|canonical]]
 +
{{Wiki|literature}} 19 , yet this practice seems central to the [[tradition]]. Most
 +
[[Buddhist traditions]] share the [[myth]] that before [[Gotama]] decided to
 +
leave the householder’s [[life]] to become a reduse, he came in con¬
 +
tact with [[four sights]]: [[sickness]], [[old age]], [[death]] and [[asceticism]]. It is
 +
these [[four sights]] that triggered [[Gotama’s]] [[desire]] to go forth. It is
 +
[[interesting]] to note that the middle two sights are [[elements]]
 +
| belonging to the paficcasamuppada, a [[doctrine]] central to the
  
[[Ireland]] [[Asava]] and Arlya-Savaka
+
j [[tradition]]. [[Old age]] and [[death]] cannot be avoided and, on account of
  
The number seven mere* ™ ($ pI36 ) is
+
j them, a whole {{Wiki|mass}} of [[suffering]] arises in the {{Wiki|future}} 20 . Facing the
  
ded to be preose. X ^“ of clay set beside the great
+
continuous presence of [[suffering]], as well as the inevitability of
given the simile of t small am0U nt. Thus, for the
+
I [[death]] which may be [[sensed]] through [[ageing]] and [[old age]], [[Gotama]]
  
[[earth]], meaninga t ^ awaiting fru ition, the huge [[burden]]  
+
sought [[release]] from this ongoing [[cycle of life and death]]. Quests
 +
j triggered by a similar realisation were also undertaken by other
  
£rief tem U >o Wrth, has all been wiped out and only a
+
I . characters in the [[Canon]], especially in the [[Jataka]] {{Wiki|literature}} 21 . All
  
minute {{Wiki|quantity}} is left.
 
  
 +
19 Actually, the term [[maranasati]] appears rarely in [[Wikipedia:canonical|canonical]] {{Wiki|literature}}. Jp my
 +
[[knowledge]], only 4 [[discourses]] of the Angultara [[Nikaya]] (A III 303-8; A IV
 +
316-22) arc centred around the them. 1 have not found occurrences elsewhere in .
 +
the [[Sutta]] {{Wiki|literature}}.
  
The [[arahant]] is called an aseklu u, -^*0 hasjims^
+
20 E\>am ctassa dukJJtakkhandhassa satnudaya hoti. S II 5.
  
the {{Wiki|training}}. bu^theMteann^e^ ^ ^ (he ^ 0 f the]
+
21 For example, the [[Bodhisatta]], in one of his [[previous lives]], is reported to
 +
have said: 'Our [[life]] as [[living beings]] is similar U) dew drops on the grass; having
 +
asked my mother and father, l ought to go forth in order to subjugate [[sickness]],
 +
[[old age]] and [[death]]’ (J IV 121). One of the [[elders]] of the Theragitha uttered a
 +
comparable verse: 'Having seen an aged [[person]], someone afflicted by [[sickness]]
 +
and someone whose [[life]] [[faculties]] have vanished, I became a wandering renun-
 +
date, [[abandoning]] all enticing [[pleasures]]' ([[Thag]], pjl). Many other passages from
 +
the [[Jataka]] {{Wiki|literature}} show that [[desire]] to {{Wiki|renounce}} [[worldly life]] arose from the  
  
SX it is minima, and — ^ £££&
 
technical difference between the owever> the ».
 
  
were assumed to have attaine in cu uivating the
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
  
factors of [[Right Knowledge]] and [[Deliverance]] possessed by the
 
[[arahant]].
 
  
 +
of the ITheragatha where an [[arahant]] is portrayed as [[contemplating]]
 +
a woman’s corpse in a [[charnel-ground]].
  
H.irod io seven days al the end of the Satipalthana
+
In this [[chapter]], although the [[objects of meditation]] are
4 Note the seven years re . uscd as a figure of {{Wiki|speech}} not to  
+
cadavers, the {{Wiki|concept}} of [[death itself]] is totally absent. The chief
 +
aim of this practice is to develop [[asubha]] towards our [[own]] [[body]]
 +
and that of others, in order to eradicate any kind of [[lust]] or
 +
[[passion]] that may arise 10 . The {{Wiki|purpose}} of this [[meditation]] was not
 +
to develop an [[awareness]] of [[death itself]], but rather to stimulate
 +
some [[sense]] of [[repulsion]]. [[Buddhaghosa]] further characterises these
 +
[[ten meditations]] as belonging to [[asubhabhavana]], and he [[perceives]]
 +
them as {{Wiki|distinct}} from the [[meditation]] on [[death]] ( marananussati ),
 +
« for he devotes a full [[chapter]] to this type of [[meditation]], to which
 +
we will soon return. [[Buddhaghosa]] explains that the [[meditation]] on
 +
[[asubha]] particularly fits the [[greedy]] {{Wiki|temperament}} ( ragacarita ), and
 +
he further elaborates by correlating each of the ten degrees of
 +
[[decay]] to a specific [[greed]]".
  
[[Sutta]]; the number seven is agai P clsewhere of being born a [[brahmin]]  
+
Although this correlation with the ten {{Wiki|expressions}} of [[greed]] is
 +
probably the construct of the commentator, the [[Sutta]] {{Wiki|literature}} —
  
be taken literally. However, e number, although again still an
 
  
back through seven generations means a large
+
10 'This filthy [[body]] slinks outright / Like ordure, like a privy's site / This
 +
[[body]] men that have [[insight]] / Condemn, is [[object]] of a fool's [[delight]] / A {{Wiki|tumour}}
 +
where nine holes abide / Wrapped in a coal of clammy hide / And trickling
 +
filth on every side / Polluting the [[air]] with stenches far and wide / If it per¬
 +
chance should come about / That what is inside came out / Surely a man
 +
would need a knout / With which to put the [[crows]] 'and [[dogs]] to rout'. (Vism VI
 +
93, translation taken from The [[Path of Purification]] , p.203). It is [[interesting]] to
 +
note that in the Vism, the meaning of the term [[asubha]] is very similar to that
 +
of [[patikkula]], i.e. rcpul&ivcncss.
  
indefinite and arbitrary figure.  
+
U Vism. p.193 ff: Abhidiiamma and {{Wiki|commentarial}} {{Wiki|literature}} classifies
 +
0 personalities into six types of {{Wiki|temperament}} ( [[carita]]): [[greedy]] (rega), hating {[[dosa]]\
 +
deluded (tnoha). [[faithful]] {[[saddha]]), {{Wiki|intelligent}} {[[buddhi]]) and speculative ([[vitakka]]).
 +
On these, see Vism. p.101 ff.  
  
THERIGATHA: ON FEMINISM, AESTHETICISM AND RELIGIOSITY IN AN EARLY [[BUDDHIST]] VERSE ANTHOLOGY (Part I)
 
  
The [[ancient]] [[Buddhist]] verse {{Wiki|anthology}} known as the [[Therigatha]]
+
Boisvert — [[Death]] as [[meditation]] [[subject]]  
([[Thig]]) attracted the [[attention]] of some of the earliest [[Western]]
 
[[Pali]] [[scholars]] 1 and actually became the focus of many admiring
 
comments from a very notable woman among them, Caroline
 
[[Wikipedia:Thomas William Rhys Davids|Rhys Davids]] (who also rendered the {{Wiki|anthology}} into metrical
 
English 2 ). Enquirere into the {{Wiki|status}} of women within the [[Thera]]-
 
  
  
1 [[Therigatha]], a [[gathering]] of 73 versified [[religious]] articulations in [[Wikipedia:canonical|canonical]]  
+
and especially the older [[sections]] — establishes an explicit link
[[Pali]], and attributed to women members of the [[Buddhist Order]] ([[theris]] or  
+
between the practice of [[asubha]] [[meditation]] and the [[greedy]]  
bhikkhunls) are [[traditionally]] juxtaposed to a much larger companion collection
+
{{Wiki|temperament}}. The [[Theragatha]], for example, depicts the story of
authored by their {{Wiki|male}} counterparts, the [[Theragatha]] ([[Thag]]). These jwo an¬
+
Singalapita who got rid of [[greed]] towards [[sensual desire]] through
thologies (which date back to the errliest period of [[Buddhist history]], though
+
the contemplation of a skeleton (or at least the [[idea]], sahha, of a  
committed to [[writing]] perhaps only around SO BCE), were first printed in the  
+
skeleton) 15 . However, the two most explicit passages correlating
[[West]] late in the 19th century in versions edited by R. Pischel and H.
+
the [[awareness]] of [[asubha]] with the diminution of [[lust]] are found in
[[Oldenberg]] respectively. Their conjoint edition revised with appendices by ICR.  
+
the [[Samyutta Nikaya]] and [[Anguttara Nikaya]] where it is clearly
Norman and L. Alsdorf (The [[Thera]] and Therl Gotha, PTS 1966) remains thd
+
stated that asul)ha should be developed in order to rid oneself of
standard, text, and as such will be the source of our. references hereafter.  
+
[[lust]] 13 . Moreover, the various classifications of the qualities neces¬
 +
sary for the eradication of [[lust]] always include [[asubha]] pr [[asubha]]-
 +
sahha'*. Other passages in the [[Sutta]] {{Wiki|literature}} indicate that these
 +
qualities do- not eradicate [[lust]], but load to the {{Wiki|deathless}}, a term
 +
often equated with [[Nibbana]] 15 . More precisely, the [[Samyutta Nikaya]] indicates that properly [[cultivating]] the {{Wiki|recognition}} (sanhS)  
 +
of any of five types of cadavers (the skeleton, the worm-eaten,  
 +
the discoloured, the fissured and the inflated corpse) 16 can induce
 +
.[[arahanthood]] or the [[state]] of non-return 17 . From what wc have
  
2 Mrs [[Wikipedia:Thomas William Rhys Davids|Rhys Davids]] published her translation of [[Thig]] as [[Psalms of the Sisters]] (1909) and that of [[Thag]] as Psalms of the Brothers (1913), incorporating
 
into each {{Wiki|commentarial}} elucidations taken from Dhammapala’s ParamgUadipanl
 
This particular order (which reverses the [[traditional]] one) is still retained in the
 
  
, single volume edition of the two translations now available as Psalms of the
+
12 [[Thag]]. p.4 (181
Early [[Buddhists]] (PTS 1980). Although English prose versions of the two
 
{{Wiki|anthologies}} have been brought out (cf. K.R. Norman, tr„ [[Elders]]* Verses (PTS
 
1969-71), this article will use the [[Wikipedia:Thomas William Rhys Davids|Rhys Davids]] translation. In citations hereafter
 
(both in the text and footnotes), [[Psalms of the Sisters]] is abbreviated to PsS;
 
[[Psalms of the Brethren]] as PsB. it should be noted that in her Introduction to
 
PsS Mrs [[Wikipedia:Thomas William Rhys Davids|Rhys Davids]] went to some lengths in highlighting the [[uniqueness]] and
 
  
‘FRAGILE PALM-LEAVES’
+
13 As ub hay a citlarn bhavchi. A \ UK. [[asubha]] bhavelabha rdgassa pahdndya. A
 +
IV 358.
  
AN APPEAL TO PRESERVE [[BUDDHIST]] LITERATURE
+
\4 a list of 10. see A V 309-10; in a list of 9, A IV 4(>5; in a list of 7. A
  
The Fragile Palm-Leaves Project seeks to preserve the [[ancient]] [[Buddhist literature]] of South-east {{Wiki|Asia}}. Rapid [[modernization]] and the aggressive expansion
+
IV 148; in a list of 5. A IV 276.  
of consumer economies have brought in their wake sweeping {{Wiki|social}} changes,
 
which threaten the [[traditional]] [[monastic]] {{Wiki|environment}} [[Sacred]] [[objects]] are now
 
commercial commodities, up for sale as "antiques" to satisfy the evergrowing
 
[[thirst]] of collectors around the [[world]]. At this stage the primary aim of the
 
project is to collect palm-leaf and paper [[manuscripts]] from antique markets in
 
[[Thailand]]^ in order to prevent the [[precious]] {{Wiki|literary}} heritage of [[Buddhism]] from
 
being dispersed to private or public collections around the* [[world]]. Materials
 
collected so far include palm-leaf and paper [[manuscripts]] in [[Pali]], [[Burmese]], Shan,
 
and other South-east {{Wiki|Asian}} [[languages]]. They include [[Wikipedia:canonical|canonical]] texts and
 
commentaries, as well as local {{Wiki|legends}} and historical materials. The [[manuscripts]]
 
will be kept together as a single collection, which will be catalogued and
 
reproduced, cither by microfilm or scanning. The materials will then be made
 
available internationally for research and publication.  
 
  
The project operates under the {{Wiki|auspices}} of the [[Pali Text Society]] (UK) and the
+
15 In a list of 9, at A IV 387; in a list of 7. A IV 4b.  
Chulachakrabongse Foundation ([[Bangkok]]). It has no [[permanent]] funding, and
 
depends entirely on {{Wiki|donations}} from concerned {{Wiki|individuals}} or {{Wiki|institutions}}. The
 
need for funds is urgent, and all {{Wiki|donations}}, small or large, are welcomed and
 
will be pul to good use. for the [[benefit]] of {{Wiki|future}} generations. {{Wiki|Donations}} may be
 
sent to the following UK account:
 
  
[[Pali Text Society]], Account number 9068 5887
+
16 Atthika, pulavaka , vinilaJuu vice hi dd aka. uddumiiluka. These 5 are members
Barclays Bank pic, [[Oxford]] [[East]] Branch
+
of [[Buddhaghosa]] s len-foid list of asubhakkatntnatihdna referred to previously.
105 [[London]] Road, Headington
 
[[Oxford]] 0X3 9AH
 
  
A [[letter]] or copy of the receipt should be sent to:
+
17 S V 129-3L The Vism exemplifies this statement by presenting the story of
 +
[[Mahatissa]] [[Thera]]: upon [[seeing]] the {{Wiki|teeth}} (dant atthika: the hones of the {{Wiki|teeth}}. The
 +
author stresses that is it the [[bones]] \atlhika\ that [[Mahatissa]] [[perceives]], for they are
 +
part of the skeleton and fall into the asubhakammatthdna) of a woman running
 +
away from her husband. [[Mahatissa]] acquired asubhasanfta and [[attained]] [[Nibbana]].
 +
When her husband, seeking his wife, asked him whether he had seen a woman
  
Fragile Palm Leaves
+
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
[[Pali Text Society]]  
 
73 Lime Walk
 
Headington
 
[[Oxford]] 0X3 7AD
 
  
 +
seen so far, the place ascribed to [[asubha]] within [[Wikipedia:canonical|canonical]] [[Pali literature]] is unequivocal: its [[cultivation]] can lead to N-ibbana, or at
 +
least to great benefits such as the eradication of [[passion]] 18 .
  
Si HAN ADA - THE LION’S ROAR
+
This type of [[meditation]] is dependent, to a certain extent, up¬
 +
on [[death]], for in many instances it uses [[death]] as an [[object]]. We use
 +
the term [[object]] in the [[sense]] that there is something [[visible]] or
 +
{{Wiki|tangible}} that can be observed. In these cases, the [[practitioner]] con¬
 +
templates cadavers. Although [[death]] as an [[object]] is not necessary
 +
to practise [[asubha]] [[meditation]], as with the contemplation of the
 +
thirty-one parts of the [[body]], it is often considered a crucial re¬
 +
quirement. It has already been noted that [[Buddhaghosa’s]] [[ten objects]] of [[meditation]] for the [[cultivation]] of [[asubha]] are [[corpses]] at
 +
different stages of [[decay]]. Although [[Buddhaghosa’s]] {{Wiki|emphasis}} on
 +
contemplation of [[corpses]] is not accentuated in the [[Sutta]] {{Wiki|literature}},
 +
1 have found passages referring to it. There is, however, another
 +
type of [[meditation]] on [[death]], known as maravasati, which is
  
OR WHAT THE [[BUDDHA]] WAS SUPPOSED TO BE WILLING TO DEFEND IN DEBATE*
 
  
[[Joy]] Manne
+
pass by. Mahutissa replied with "the verses which later became'famous*in the
 +
[[Theravada tradition]]: Whether it was a man or a woman / That went by 1
 +
noticed not / But only that on this high road / There goes a group of [[bones]].
 +
(Vism, p.21. Translation quoted from The [[Path of Purification]], p22).
  
In the [[DIgha]] (D), [[Majjhima]] (M), Scmyutia (S) and Ahguttara (A)
+
18 However, (his practice has to be undertaken with extreme [[care]]. A passage
[[Nikayas]] the [[Buddha]] is frequently compared to a [[lion]], and like a
+
of the [[Vinaya]] (Vin. Ill iSuttavibhahga), p.68 fO reports that [[monks]] who have
[[lion]] is said to roar. His roar takes place under [[conditions]] which
+
been instructed by the [[Buddha]] to cultivate [[asubha]] asked a [[samana]] named Miga-
the texts relate to the [[debate]] situation. His roar has content. His
+
landaka to deprive them of [[life]], for their [[bodies]] had become an inconvenience
[[monks]], although not compared to [[lions]], may also utter a [[lion’s roar]]. They are encouraged to roar on one particular [[subject]]  
+
to them. U is said that Migalandaka killed 60 [[monks]] in one day. The [[Buddha]],
specified by the [[Buddha]]. They may also roar on their [[own]]  
+
noticing that the number of [[monks]] had decreased, requested [[Ananda]] to assemble
initiative, although it is only of [[Sariputta’s]] [[lion’s roar]]’ that the  
+
all the [[monks]]. To counteract the effect of this practice of [[asubha]], the [[Buddha]]  
texts contain 3 record. [[Suttas]] may themselves have the term
+
[[taught]] [[anapanasati]] [[meditation]], the [[meditation]] on respiration. Although it is not
[[sihanada]], ‘liqn’s roar’, in their titles. An {{Wiki|examination}} of the  
+
explicit in (he text, it seems that [[anapanasati]] is used to counterbalance the  
notion of the ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ shows the imaginative and [[creative way]]  
+
negative effects that may arise from the practice of [[asubha]]. Thh incident is
Us reciters ([[bhanakas]]) treated the [[Buddha’s]] message within the
+
used in the [[Vinaya]] to explain the {{Wiki|rule}} ( [[parajika]] 111) that a [[monk]] should not
context of'their [[society]], relating it to its customs and [[traditions]].  
+
[[intention]] illy kill anyone or to the instrument in the {{Wiki|killing}} of anyone.  
  
1. The [[Buddha’s]] '[[lion’s roar]]’.
+
Boisvert — [[Death]] as [[meditation]] [[subject]]  
  
The simile in which the [[Buddha]] is compared to a [[lion]] occurs
 
frequently in the [[Sutta Pitaka]]. Occasionally the comparison is
 
simple — the [[Buddha]] simply is a [[lion]]:
 
  
  
akkharam ekamckam ca buddharupasamain siya I
+
radically different from [[asubha]] [[meditation]], for it does not use
tasma hi pandito poso rakkheyya pilakattayam I
+
[[death]] as an [[object]], but rather as a [[subject]]. [[Death]] becomes the
 +
theme of the [[meditation]], and the [[practitioner]] is not required to
 +
[[contemplate]] [[corpses]]. *
  
calurash 1 sahassani sambuddha parimanaka I
+
Very few {{Wiki|allusions}} to mara^asati are made in the [[Wikipedia:canonical|canonical]]
lima [[nama]] [[bhavissanti]] tiuhanic pitakattaye I
+
{{Wiki|literature}} 19 , yet this practice seems central to the [[tradition]]. Most
 +
[[Buddhist traditions]] share the [[myth]] that before [[Gotama]] decided to
 +
leave the householder’s [[life]] to become a [[recluse]], he came in con¬
 +
tact with [[four sights]]: [[sickness]], [[old age]], [[death]] and [[asceticism]]. It is
 +
these [[four sights]] that triggered [[Gotama’s]] [[desire]] to go forth. It is
 +
[[interesting]] to note that the middle two sights are [[elements]]
 +
belonging to the paficcasamuppada, a [[doctrine]] central to the
 +
[[tradition]]. [[Old age]] and [[death]] cannot be avoided and, on account of
 +
them, a whole {{Wiki|mass}} of [[suffering]] arises in the {{Wiki|future}} 80 . Facing the
 +
continuous presence of [[suffering]], as well as the inevitability of
 +
[[death]] which may be [[sensed]] through [[ageing]] and [[old age]], [[Gotama]]'
 +
sought [[release]] from this ongoing [[cycle of life and death]]. Quests
 +
triggered by a similar realisation were also undertaken by other
 +
characters in the [[Canon]], especially in the [[Jataka]] {{Wiki|literature}} 81 . All
  
Every single [[letter]] of ihe Dhatnma is {{Wiki|equal}} to an image of the [[Buddha]]:
 
Therefore a [[wise person]] should preserve the [[Tipitaka]].
 
  
In the [[Dhamma]] of ihe [[Buddha]] there are 84,000 teachings.
+
19 Actually, the term maranasali appears rarely in [[Wikipedia:canonical|canonical]] {{Wiki|literature}}. X<> tty
Therefore, where there is a [[Tipitaka]] there are 84,000 [[Buddhas]].  
+
[[knowledge]], only 4 [[discourses]] of the [[Anguttara Nikaya]] (A Ill 303-8; A IV
 +
316*22) arc centred around the them. I have not found occurrences elsewhere in,  
 +
the [[Sutta]] {{Wiki|literature}}.  
  
 +
20 E\>am ctassa dukUiakkhandhassa [[samudaya]] hoti, S II 5.
  
1 These investigations were supported by the Foundation for Research in the  
+
21 For example, the [[Bodhisatta]], in one of his [[previous lives]], is reported to
field of {{Wiki|Theology}} and the [[Science]] of [[Religions]] in the {{Wiki|Netherlands}}, which is
+
have said: ‘Our [[life]] as [[living beings]] is similar U> dew drops on the grass; having
subsidised by the {{Wiki|Netherlands}} [[Organization]] for the Advancement of [[Pure]]  
+
asked my mother and father, I ought to go forth in order to subjugate [[sickness]],
Research (Z.W.O.), and in part constitutes [[Chapter]] V of my doctoral {{Wiki|dissertation}},
+
[[old age]] and [[death]]* 0 IV 121). One of the [[elders]] of the [[Thera]] gal ha uttered a
* [[Debates]] and Case Histories in the [[Pali Canon]] (Utrecht 1991).
+
comparable verse: ‘Having seen an aged [[person]], someone afflicted by [[sickness]]
 +
and someone whose [[life]] [[faculties]] have vanished, I became a wandering renun-
 +
ciate, [[abandoning]] all enticing [[pleasures]]* ([[Thag]], p.11). Many other passages from
 +
the [[Jataka]] {{Wiki|literature}} show that [[desire]] to {{Wiki|renounce}} [[worldly life]] arose from the
  
  
Line 1,189: Line 1,422:
  
  
(1) ‘Like a [[lion]] lonely faring . . P.  
+
Boisvert — [[Death]] as [[meditation]] [[subject]]
 +
 
 +
these passages underscore the urgency ( [[samvega]] ) that is felt when •
 +
[[death]] approaches.
 +
 
 +
[[Buddhaghosa]], however, places considerable {{Wiki|emphasis}} on the
 +
practice of [[maranasati]] 22 . He first introduces the [[subject]] by [[cir]]¬
 +
cumscribing what is meant by [[marana]] in this particular context. ^
 +
 
 +
[[Death]] is simply the termination of one’s life.faculty, '.e. the en<j 1
 +
 
 +
of one’s life span. He then proceeds to define marananussati itself {
 +
and what is entailed in this practice:
 +
 
 +
So mindfulness of death is the remembering of death, in
 +
other words, of the interruption of the life faculty. One
 +
who wants to develop this should go into solitary retreat
 +
and exercise attention wisely in this way: ‘Death will take
 +
place; the life faculty will be interrupted’ or ‘Death, death' 23 .
 +
 
 +
According to the commentator, this exercise ought to generate
 +
mindfulness {sati\ the sense of urgency {samvega) and knowledge
 +
(nana¥\ If it is not successful, the practitioner should recollect
 +
death in eight different ways: 1) as a murderer (who appears sud-
 +
 
 +
 
 +
mere fact of realising that we are not immune to old age. King Makhadeva, for
 +
example, uttered the following verse upon noticing one single grey hair on his
 +
head: ‘These grey hairs that appear on my head are deaths own messengers that
 +
come to rob my life. Now ix the time that I renounce the worldly life* (J I 138.
 +
The Susima Jataka (J III 237J, Cullasutasoma Jataka [J V 91) and Nimi Jataka [J
 +
VI 53] are of the same character).
 +
 
 +
22 U is interesting to note that Buddhaghosa does not use the term marana¬
 +
sati but rather marananussati. Though one wouUJ lend to think that the com¬
 +
mentator used a different terminology than the one used in the Sutta in order
 +
to underline a nuance between two practices, Buddhaghosa himself wrote that
 +
sati itself \\ an anussaii and the main distinction is that the latter ‘occurs only
 +
in those instances where it should occur* {The Path of Purification , p.204).
 +
 
 +
23 The Path of Purification . p.248.
 +
 
 +
24 Ibid .
 +
 
 +
denly and takes away life), 2) as the ruin of success (for death is
 +
the ruining of life’s success), 3) by comparison ((i.e. by comparing
 +
onself to others who have died), 4) as to the sharing of the body
 +
with many (kinds of worms and creatures), 5) as to the fragility
 +
of life, 6) as signless (in the sense of unpredictable), 7) as to the
 +
limit of the extent, and 8) as to the brevity of the moment (in the
 +
sense that one is alive only for the duration of one’s conscious*
 +
ness). This last perspective on death contradicts the definition that
 +
the commentator himself had set at the beginning of the chapter.
 +
Death, in this context, ought to be seen as the termination of the
 +
life faculty and does not include the constant dissolution of the
 +
aggregates — what is technically termed momentary death
 +
( Ichanikamaranain ). Yet, having excluded momentary death at the
 +
outset, Buddhaghosa reintegrates it with the eighth perspective.
 +
 
 +
In modern Sri Lanka, whore Buddhaghosa lived some 1,500
 +
years ago, -charnel-grounds arc basically non-existent. Bodies are
 +
either- burned, when the finanical situation of a family allows it,
 +
or our ted. Monks wishing to practise asubhabhavana, as described
 +
... by Buddhaghosa, have to find alternatives. Since one of the ten
 +
stages of decomposition of corpses is known as ‘cut up’ ( [vicchid -
 +
dakam) a possible option for monks wishing to follow Buddha-
 +
ghosa’s prescription is to attend sessions where bodies are actually
 +
cut up: postmortem examinations are the ideal modern alternative.
 +
Although Buddhaghosa originally suggested locations such as
 +
• battlefields, forests infested with robbers or charnel-grounds where
 +
 
 +
« kings have theives cut up”, the autopsy room seems a viable
 +
 
 +
compromise.
 +
 
 +
25 Vicchiddakam yaddhamandalc vd cardtaviyam vd susdne vd , yaitha rdjano
 +
core chindapenti, arannd vd pana sthavyagghchi chinnapurisat thane labbhati.
 +
Vism 190.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)
 +
 
 +
iTMn’mii'iMMlarrri' - m -
 +
 
 +
Boisvert — Death as meditation subject
 +
 
 +
 
 +
During my research, I had the opportunity to observe one
 +
monk who attended an autopsy at the Colombo General Hospital 26 *
 +
 
 +
I interviewed a monk of British origin who mentioned that he
 +
was planning to attend an autopsy a few days later. He invited
 +
me to accompany him. On that day, 1 met him at the hospital
 +
temple around 9.30 am and proceeded directly to the room where
 +
postmortems were performed. When we entered, two cadavers
 +
were already being autopsied, with a third one laid on the ground
 +
waiting its turn. All were males. Since the monk had not enquired
 +
\ as to the sex of the bodies, it did not seem that Buddhaghosa’s
 +
 
 +
restriction carried much weight.
 +
 
 +
The smell was paradoxically vivid. The monk approached one
 +
j of the bodies. Two men were working on the abdomen, emptying
 +
 
 +
i it of its contents. The monk remained beside the body for ap-
 +
 
 +
) proximately five minutes, then walked around, keeping his eyes
 +
 
 +
on the object of his meditation. He asked me how 1 was coping
 +
with the situation three times. The two technicians were now
 +
working on the head, cutting it open with a saw. The monk
 +
£ approached to have a closer view of the process. Two minutes
 +
 
 +
later, he moved to the other body, whose autopsy was already
 +
 
 +
completed. He looked at all the internal organs (lungs, heart, liver,
 +
ly* n S on the table, took the hand of the dead man in his, and
 +
asked me: ‘you can feci death, do you want to touch?* 7 . I politely
 +
 
 +
 
 +
26 We were supposed to attend a second one at the Kandy General Hospital,
 +
with 2 other monks. The morning of the autopsy, we all went to the hospital as
 +
planned with the medical authorities, and wailed in vain for 2 hours for the
 +
judicial medical officer. At 11.00 am. we had to return to the monastery since
 +
monks have to eat before noon.
 +
 
 +
27 Buddhaghosa. when describing the practice of asubha in reference to the
 +
cut up. continue, by stressing that the yogi should never tctuch the body; the
 +
dismembc.ed P arls should be reassembled by a monastery attendant, someone
 +
 
 +
reminded him that my task was simply to observe him and his
 +
practice, nothing else. He then proceeded to the body of the
 +
elderly man lying on the floor, after which we left. We had spent
 +
approximately twenty minutes in the autopsy room before
 +
heading back to the hospital temple where 1 interviewed him.
 +
 
 +
Immediately following the autopsies, when asked how he felt,
 +
the monk answered that he still had a feeling of unease and that
 +
disgust was still pre-eminent in his mind. By witnessing an au¬
 +
topsy, he continued, one is able to investigate at a deeper level
 +
the nature of the body, that'is, the foulness inherent in the body
 +
we often perceive as attractive. It is also crucial, he stressed, to
 +
couple this particular practice with vipassana meditation. The
 +
emotions, sensations and images that arise when one witnesses an
 +
autopsy need to be dealt with. In order to transform this ex¬
 +
perience into a meditative process, one has to develop constant
 +
and objective awareness of these sensations and emotions. This
 +
enables the practitioner to cultivate an understanding of the
 +
reality as it is, without generating hatred or disgust towards
 +
individuals themselves.  
 +
 
 +
After reflecting on the extreme nature of this particular
 +
practice, I questioned the monk as to its relation to one of the
 +
central teachings of the Buddha — what is known as the middle-
 +
path 0 majjhimapatipada). He explained that what is meant by
 +
‘middle-path’ is not moderation, but rather the capacity to develop
 +
a stable state of mind, a sort of indifference — or rather equa¬
 +
nimity — regardless of the situation. The middle-path is avoiding
 +
 
 +
 
 +
studying to become an ascetic, or by the yogi himself with the help of a stick.
 +
The reason given is that**he would come to handle it without disgust as a
 +
corpse-burner would’ (Paramatthamanjusa 176; translation taken from The Path
 +
of Purification , p.197, n.ll).
 +
 
 +
 
 +
Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)
 +
 
 +
 
 +
Boisvert — Death as meditation subject
 +
 
 +
 
 +
these passages underscore the urgency ( samvega ) that is felt when
 +
death approaches.
 +
 
 +
" Buddhaghosa, however, places considerable emphasis on the
 +
practice of maranasati 22 . He first introduces the subject by cir¬
 +
cumscribing what is meant by marana in this particular context.
 +
Death is simply the termination of one’s life faculty, '.e. the en<j
 +
of one’s life span. He then proceeds to define marananussati itself
 +
and what is entailed in this practice:
 +
 
 +
So mindfulness of death is the remembering of death, in
 +
other words, of the interruption of the life faculty. One
 +
who wants to develop this should go into solitary retreat
 +
and exercise attention wisely in this way: ‘Death will take
 +
place; the life faculty will be interrupted’ or ‘Death, death’ 23 .
 +
 
 +
According to the commentator, this exercise ought to generate
 +
mindfulness (sati), the sense of urgency (samvega) and knowledge
 +
(nana) 2 \ If it is not successful, the practitioner should recollect
 +
death in eight different ways: 1) as a murderer (who appears sud-
 +
 
 +
 
 +
mere fact of realising that we are not immune to old age. King Makhadeva, for
 +
example, uttered the following verse upon noticing one single grey hair on his
 +
head: 'These grey hairs that appear on my head are death’s own messengers that
 +
come to rob my life. Now is the time that I renounce the worldly life* (J I 138.
 +
The Susirnu Jataka (J III 237), Cullasutasoma Jataka (J V 91) and Nimi Jataka [J
 +
VI 53) are of the same character).
 +
 
 +
22 It is interesting to note that Buddhaghosa does not use the term marana -
 +
sati but rather marananussati Though one wouhj lend to think that the com¬
 +
mentator used a different lenninology than the one used in the Sutta in order
 +
to underline a nuance between two practices, Buddhaghosa himself wrote that
 +
sati itself is an anussaii and the main distinction is that the latter 'occurs only
 +
in those instances where it should occur (The Path of Purification , p204).
 +
 
 +
23 The Path of Purification . p.248.
 +
 
 +
24 Ibid .
 +
 
 +
denly and takes away life), 2) as the ruin of success (for death is
 +
the ruining of life’s success), 3) by comparison ((i.e. by comparing
 +
onself to others who have died), 4) as to the sharing of the body
 +
with many (kinds of worms and creatures), 5) as to the fragility
 +
of life, 6) as signless (in the sense of unpredictable), 7) as to the
 +
I limit of the extent, and 8) as to the brevity of the moment (in the
  
‘Lo, what a [[lion]] is the worshipful [[recluse]] [[Gotama]]! Tis by
+
j sense that one is alive only for the duration of one’s conscious¬
his lion’s [[nature]] that he endures, [[mindful]] and discerning, the
 
[[pains]] that have arisen in his [[body]], keen and sharp, acute,
 
distressing and unwelcome, and that he is not cast down’ 2 3 4 5 6 .
 
  
'You are a [[lion]]
+
ness). This last perspective on death contradicts the definition that
 +
the commentator himself had set at the beginning of the chapter.
 +
Death, in this context, ought to be seen as the termination of the
 +
life faculty and does not include the constant dissolution of the
 +
aggregates — what is technically termed momentary death
 +
(khariikamaranam). Yet, having excluded momentary death at the
 +
outset, Buddhaghosa reintegrates it with the eighth perspective.
  
‘He is the [[Lord Buddha]] — he is an incomparable [[lion]] .. P.  
+
In modern Sri Lanka, where Buddhaghosa lived some 1,500
 +
years ago, -charnel-grounds arc basically non-existent. Bodies are
 +
either- burned, when the finanical situation of a family allows it,
 +
or ouried. Monks wishing to practise asubhabhavana, as described
 +
by Buddhaghosa, have to find alternatives. Since one of the ten
 +
stages of decomposition of corpses is known as ‘cut up’ (vicchid-
 +
dakam) a possible option for monks wishing to follow Buddha-
 +
ghosa’s prescription is to attend sessions where bodies arc actually
 +
cut up: postmortem examinations are the ideal modern alternative.  
 +
Although Buddhaghosa originally suggested locations such as
 +
battlefields, forests infested with robbers or charnel-grounds where
 +
kings have theives cut up 25 , the autopsy room seems a viable
 +
compromise.  
  
In these simple comparisons the [[Buddha]] is referred to by the
 
[[epithet]] ‘[[Buddha]]’ or ‘[[Samana Gotama]]’.
 
  
The comparison between the [[Buddha]] and a [[lion]], however, is
+
25 Vicchiddakam yaddhamandalc vd carat aviyam vd suscinc vd, yattha rajano
most usually expressed in the [[formula]]:
+
core chinddpenti, arafxhd vd pana sthavyaxghchi chinnapuri sal thane labbhati.
 +
Visin 190.
  
(2) ‘The [[lion]], [[monks]], the [[king]] of the {{Wiki|beasts}}, comes out of his lair
 
  
in the evening. After coming out of his lair, he yawns.
+
Uuddlilst Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)
After [[yawning]], he surveys the four quarters. After sur¬
 
veying the four quarters, he roars his [[lion’s roar]] three times.
 
After roaring his [[lion’s roar]] three times, he goes [[hunting]]*.
 
  
The simile is explained in this way,
 
  
(3) ‘"[[Lion]]", [[monks]], is a {{Wiki|metaphorical}} expression tor. the
+
During my research, 1 had the opportunity to observe one
Tatnagata, the [[Arahant]], the [[Fully Enlightened One]]. And it is
+
monk who attended an autopsy at the Colombo General Hospital 26 .  
in his [[lion’s roar]] that the [[Tathagata]] teaches [[Dhamma]] in the  
 
assembly’ 7 .  
 
  
In this simile the [[Buddha]] is invariably referred to by the [[epithet]]
+
I interviewed a monk of British origin who mentioned that he
‘[[Tathagata]]’, The {{Wiki|emphasis}} in this [[formula]] is on the utterance that  
+
was planning to attend an autopsy a few days later. He invited
 +
me to accompany him. On that day, I met him at the hospital
 +
temple around 9.30 am and proceeded directly to the room where
 +
postmortems were performed. When we entered, two cadavers
 +
were already being autopsied, with a third one laid on the ground
 +
waiting its turn. All were males. Since the monk had not enquired
 +
as to the sex of tne bodies, it did not seem that Buddhaghosa’s
 +
restriction carried much weight.
  
 +
The smell was paradoxically vivid. The monk approached one
 +
of the bodies. Two men were working on the abdomen, emptying
 +
it of its contents. The monk remained beside the body for ap¬
 +
proximately five minutes, then walked around, keeping his eyes
 +
on the object of his meditation. He asked me how I was coping
 +
with the situation three times. The two technicians were now
 +
working on the head, cutting it open with a saw. The monk
 +
approached to have a closer view of the process. Two minutes
 +
later, he moved to the other body, whose autopsy was already
 +
completed. He looked at all the internal organs (lungs, heart, liver,
 +
•..) lying on the table, took the hand of the dead man in his, and
 +
asked me: ‘you can feel death, do you want to touch?’ 27 .1 politely
  
2 S 1 16; tr. C.A.F. [[Wikipedia:Thomas William Rhys Davids|Rhys Davids]], [[Kindred Sayings]] (KS) I 25.
 
  
Manue [[The Lion’s Roar]]
+
26 We were supposed lo allend a second one al the Kandy General Hospiul,
 +
with 2 other monks. The morning of the autopsy, we all went to the hospital as
 +
planned with the medical authorities, and wailed in vain for 2 hours for the
 +
judicial medical officer. At 11.00 am. we had to return to the monastery since
 +
monks have to eat before noon.
 +
 
 +
27 Buddhaghosa, when describing the practice of asubha in reference to the
 +
cut up, continue* by stressing that the yogi should never much the body; the
 +
dismembe.ed parts should be reassembled by a monastery attendant, someone
 +
 
 +
 
 +
Boisvert Death as meditation subject
 +
 
 +
 
 +
reminded him that my task was simply to observe him and his
 +
practice, nothing else. He then proceeded to the body of the
 +
elderly man lying on the floor, after which we left. We had spent
 +
approximately twenty minutes in the autopsy room before
 +
heading back to the hospital temple where I interviewed him.
 +
 
 +
Immediately following the autopsies, when asked how he felt,
 +
the monk answered that he still had a feeling of unease and that
 +
disgust was still pre-eminent in his mind. By witnessing an au¬
 +
topsy, he continued, one is able to investigate at a deeper level
 +
the nature of the body, lhat'is, the foulness inherent in the body
 +
we often perceive as attractive. It is also crucial, he stressed, to
 +
couple this particular practice with vipassana meditation. The
 +
emotions, sensations and images that arise when one witnesses an
 +
autopsy need to be dealt with. In order to transform this ex-
 +
perience into a meditative process, one has to develop constant
 +
and objective awareness of these sensations and emotions. This
 +
enables the practitioner to cultivate an understanding of the
 +
reality as it is, without generating hatred or disgust towards
 +
individuals themselves.
 +
 
 +
After reflecting on the extreme nature of this particular
 +
practice, I questioned the monk as to its relation to one of the
 +
central teachings of the Buddha - what is known as the middle-
 +
path ( majjhimapatipada ). He explained that what is meant by
 +
‘middle-path’ is not moderation, but rather the capacity to develop
 +
a stable state of mind, a sort of indifference - or rather equa¬
 +
nimity — regardless of the situation. The middle-path is avoiding
 +
 
 +
 
 +
studying to become an ascetic, or by the yogi himself with the help of a stick.
 +
The reason given is ihal,*he would come lo handle it without disgust as a
 +
corpse-burner would’ (Paramatthamanjusa 176; translation taken from The Path
 +
of Purification , p.197, n.ll).
 +
 
 +
Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)
 +
 
 +
extremes in the sense that the mind remains aloof from pleasure
 +
and pain; the mind simply becomes a detached observer of the
 +
situations being experienced. However, he admitted that this was
 +
an extreme and occasional situation that he decided to place
 +
himself into in order to observe the reactions that would arise.
 +
During the seven years that he has been a monk, this was only
 +
the second time he witnessed an autopsy. His own specific
 +
practice is grounded in an interest in understanding how the mind
 +
manufactures emotions and how these are related to thoughts. To
 +
achieve this comprehension, he practises the more traditionally
 +
accepted form of meditation, i.e. vipassana.
 +
 
 +
I also interviewed ten other members of the Sangha 28 , most
 +
of whom had practised this postmortem-meditation at least once.
 +
When asked to explain how they understood maranasati, all
 +
agreed with Buddhaghosa’s interpretation that maranasati re¬
 +
quires the practitioners to remind themselves constantly of the
 +
proximity of death. From the subsequent analyses of the inter¬
 +
views, I noticed that two other practices had also been classified
 +
as maranasati. Without ever challenging Buddhaghosa’s definition,
 +
eight of the eleven interviewees suggested that maranasati was
 +
broader than this mere awareness of the potentiality of death.
 +
First, they considered meditation on asubha, as described by
 +
Buddhaghosa (i.e. the ten types of charnel-ground contemplations
 +
or their modern expression in the autopsy room) as belonging to
 +
maranasati as long as the yogis perceived and constantly con¬
 +
templated the fragility of life. This falls in-line with the Sati-
  
the lion/Tathagata makes. The simile ([[formula]] 3) continues:
 
  
(3A) ‘Just so, [[monks]], when a [[Tathagata]] arises in the [[world]], an
+
, 28 The of ihe dasa sil matavo is ihe object of a controversy among the
[[Arahant]], a [[Perfectly enlightened]] One, One. who has know¬
 
ledge and (right) conduct. One who has [[attained]] [[bliss]]. One
 
who [[knows]] the [[world]], the [[unsurpassed]] Trainer of men,
 
[[Teacher of devas]] and mankind, a [[Buddha]], an [[Exalted One]].
 
He teaches [[Dhamma]]:.. .*.
 
  
On one occasion it is the way that the [[Buddha]] teaches that is
+
Sinhalese monastic community. IFor more information on the subject, see Tessa
emphasised: the [[carefulness]] with which the [[Buddha]] teaches [[Dham]]¬
+
Barlholomcus/. Womdn under the Do Tree. Buddhist Nuns in Sri Lanka.
ma is compared to the [[carefulness]] with which the [[lion]] strikes his
+
Cambridge 1994]  
blow while [[hunting]]’. On a different occasion it is the effect of the
 
[[Buddha’s]] .[[Teaching]] tfiat is emphasised: the effect that the [[Buddha’s Teaching]] has on [[devas]] is compared with the effect that the [[sound]]
 
of the [[lion’s roar]] has on brute creatures: in both cases causing
 
{{Wiki|fear}}, [[agitation]] and trembling' 0 . Most usually, however, what is
 
emphasised is what the [[Buddha]], the [[Tathagata]], roars. The
 
[[Tathagata’s]] [[lion’s roar]] has content, and its content varies in the
 
different [[suttas]] that contain the simile
 
  
There arc two particular [[formulas]] that introduce the content.
 
.One of these is that of [[formula]] (3A) above where the [[Buddha]] is
 
simply said to teach [[Dhamma]]. The other is,
 
  
(4) There are these [ten] Tathagata-fpowers] that belong to the
 
[[Tathagata]]. Endowed with these [[[powers]]], the [[Tathagata]]
 
claims as his [[own]] 11 the bull’s place (the position of the
 
leader); he roars his [[lion’s roar]] in the assemblies; he sets in
 
  
 +
Boisvert — Death as meditation subject
  
8 A II 33, etc. This [[formula]] [[exists]] also {{Wiki|independently}} of the [[lion]] simile
 
([[formula]] 3).
 
  
: 9 Alll 121.  
+
i patthana’s suggestion that practitioners must reflect on the fact
 +
| that their body possesses the same nature. In fact, many monks in
 +
Sri Lanka have witnessed autopsies in order to cultivate
 +
! asubha and/or maranasati. Moreover, photographs of autopsies
 +
j are broadly available for the Thai monastic community and these
  
10 A II 33.  
+
. are widely circulated in Sri Lanka. Most of the hermitages where
  
11 {{Wiki|Monier-Williams}}, [[Sanskrit]] {{Wiki|Dictionary}} , s.v. [[prajna]].  
+
the interviews were conducted had at least a few of these photo-
 +
| graphs and/or partial or complete skeletons used for meditation
 +
purposes. All the monks using these tools, however, strongly
 +
emphasised that without reflecting on their own body, the
 +
charnel-ground contemplations (or the contemplation of the
 +
photographs or the skeletons) remain solely at the asubha level.  
  
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)  
+
These same eight monastics perceived maranasati as the
 +
natural result of their daily riieditatidn. As the abbot in charge of
 +
a major meditatibn centre in Colombo remarked, -death itself is
 +
merely a concept which is totally devoid of substance For this
 +
reason, it is impossible to focus on it’. He further explained that
 +
what we conventionally call death does not exist, for the simple
 +
reason that in order for something/someone to die, it needs to
 +
possess an independent existence which Buddhist doctrine denies
 +
with the theories of anicca, anatta and paticcasamuppada. A
 +
person docs not merely die at the end of one’s existence for, at
 +
the deepest level, this person never existed. What we normally
 +
term 'person’ is an amalgam of five aggregates which arc con¬
 +
stantly changing. Every moment, each of these aggregates arises
 +
and passes away ( upajjhitva , nirujjhanti). Therefore, maranasati,
 +
viewed from this angle, cannot be separated from the normal
 +
practice of vipassana meditation which aims, as the tradition
 +
claims, at seeing things as they really are. Practitioners of vi¬
 +
passana who simply observe their own mind and body soon
 +
notice the transitory character of existence. Eventually, they
 +
become aware that birth and death happen at every single mo-
  
{{Wiki|motion}} the wiieel of [[Dhamma]]’ 12 .
+
Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)
  
The words I have placed in square brackets change according to
 
the context 13 .
 
  
The {{Wiki|emphasis}} in the [[formula]], as in (3) above, is that the
+
Boisvert — Death as meditation subject
[[Tathagata’s]] [[lion’s roar]] is uttered in assemblies. When the »
 
[[Tathagata]] does this, he takes the position of leader, like a bull. By
 
uttering his [[lion’s roar]] in assemblies the [[Tathagata]] propagates his
 
[[Teaching]] and sets in {{Wiki|motion}} the [[wheel]] of [[Dhamma]].
 
  
Various groups of assemblies are referred to in this {{Wiki|literature}}.
 
  
The Maha-Sihanada [[Sutta]] (M 12) refers to eight assemblies: the  
+
ment. Material particles arise and vanish: death is present through¬
assembly of [[nobles]], of [[brahmins]], of householders, of recluses, the  
+
out the life-process. Such an awareness helps, on the one hand, to
{{Wiki|retinues}} of the four great regents, the [[gods]] of the [[Thirty-three]],  
+
cope with what we conventionally call death. By becoming
the [[Maras]] and the [[Brahmas]] 14 . As it is a slhanada [[sutta]] we may
+
increasingly aware of the presence of death, at the experiential
perhaps infer from it that these arc the assemblies intended in the  
+
level, practitioners are no more intimidated when the final mo¬
‘[[lion’s roar]]’ situation. In any case we may deduce from this that
+
ment comes. Death is nothing but the culmination of successive
the ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ is a particular type of utterance to be proclaimed
+
deaths which one had gradually learned to deal with. On the other
in public where particular prestigious groups [[gather]], and indeed i
+
hand, this same process helps them live a less egocentric,.more
 +
detached, cquanimous and compassionate life, for they have come
 +
to understand that nothing is worth clinging to, and that human
 +
suffering is directly related to the cultivation of the awareness of
 +
impermanence, the core of Theravada Buddhist meditation. In  
 +
fact, when one practises one of these two thoroughly, the other is  
 +
also automatically practised, whether consciously or not.
  
the Kassapa-SIhanada [[Sutta]] 15 confirms that this is the case. From ;  
+
The view that maranasati is intimately linked with vipas-
 +
sand is also corroborated by the fact that the former is one of
 +
the four protections ( caturarakklia ). Members of the Sangha as
 +
well as lay-meditators in intensive training are encouraged to
 +
recite daily the verses of protections. By recollecting the qualities
 +
of the Buddha, promoting loving-kindness, restraining sexual
 +
desires through asubha and promoting the awareness of death, the
 +
practitioners’ ability to deepen their meditation is supposed to in¬
 +
crease. It is also noteworthy that lay people going to the temple
 +
in order to pay respect to the Buddha often recite a standard
 +
verse similar to those found in the four protections: I pay respect
 +
to the Buddha; may I obtain some merit This body [of mine] will
 +
be destroyed just as these flowers will fade”. This indicates that
  
the {{Wiki|rules}} that this [[sutta]] provides for satisfying the assembly it is :
 
  
clear that a ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ is a challenge. In a sudden insert in this
+
29 Pujcmi buddham kusumena nena I Punncna me te fabhami mukham /
[[sutta]], which gives no indication why the [[Buddha]] felt called upon
+
Puppham milayati yatha idam me / Kayo tatha yali vinasa bhavam II A simitar
to vindicate himself at that particular [[moment]] and in that
+
verse stressing that all are subject to Uealh is also frequently used by lay follow¬
particular situation, the [[Buddha]] enumerates and refutes potential
 
{{Wiki|criticisms}} that he suggests might be made against him by recluses
 
  
12 A 111 9. V 33; [[Vibhasa]] (Vhb) 318.
 
  
13 The [[subjects]] of [[confidence]] ( vesarajjant) of [[formula]] (11) are introduced by  
+
the practice of maranasati as such is not only followed by medi¬
this [[formula]].  
+
tators but, to a certain extent, by most devout Buddhists as well.  
  
14 M 1 72
+
When asked how a monk should practise marariasati, the
 +
abbot suggested two methods, the second being much more effec¬
 +
tive than the first. One may start by the simple recital of the four
 +
protections discussed above. When meditators are more advanced
 +
in their practice of vipassana, they can embark on a radically
 +
different practice. They should lie like a corpse, preferably at
 +
night and, as suggested by Buddhaghosa, recall that Buddhas,
 +
kings, neighbours and parents have died. They then remind them¬
 +
selves that death is inevitable. It is at this stage that they must
 +
‘feel life go out from every part of the body, from the toes
 +
upwards. If this practice is accomplished properly, one actually
 +
dies’. The- abbot himself refused to answer when 1 asked if he
 +
practises this sort of meditation, for members of the Sangha are
 +
not supposed to brag about their accomplishments. Neither did he
 +
clarify whether he meant that the body technically dies and is
 +
r.eanimatcd, or that one symbolically dies by becoming aware of
 +
the ever presence of death throughout the body, a presence
 +
manifesting itself through the constant process of impermanence.
 +
This second interpretation would be in line with the traditional
 +
practice of vipassana.
  
15 D 8 (I 1751. [[Suttas]] with [[sihanada]] in their titles are discussed in section 3
+
It is clear from these eight interviews that the practice of
below.  
+
maranasati not only includes a. constant remembrance of the
Mannc — [[The Lion’s Roar]]
+
finitude of life, but also incorporates asubhabhavana and the
 +
awarness of anicca. This perception of maranasati differs radi¬
 +
cally from Buddhaghosa’s, for the latter only considered the aware-
  
of divers schools. These potential {{Wiki|criticisms}} are that, although he
 
utters his [[lions]]’ roar, i.e. issues his challenge 16 :
 
  
(5) 1. ‘he does this in [[empty]] places, and not in public 17 ;
+
ers: Namami buddham gunasdgaram lam l Sail ha saddha honiu sukhi avira /
 +
Kayo jigujjo sakalo dugandho / Gacchanti sabbe maranam aham ca ll
  
2. ‘he issues his challenge in assemblies, but he does it with¬
+
Boisvert — Death as meditation subject
out [[confidence]] 18 ;
 
  
3. ‘he challenges with [[confidence]] ... but [[people]] do not ask
 
  
him questions 19 ;
+
Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)
  
4. ‘[[people]] ask him questions, but he does not answer 20 ;
+
extremes in the sense that the mind remains aloof from pleasure
 +
and pain; the mind simply becomes a detached observer of the
 +
situations being experienced. However, he admitted that this was
 +
an extreme and occasional situation that he decided to place
 +
himself into in order to observe the reactions that would arise.  
 +
During the seven years that he has been a monk, this was only
 +
the second time he witnessed an autopsy. His own specific
 +
practice is grounded in an interest in understanding how the mind
 +
manufactures emotions and how these are related to thoughts. To
 +
achieve this comprehension, he practises the more traditionally
 +
accepted form of meditation, i.e. vipassana.
  
5. ‘he answers their question,... but he docs not win over
+
I also interviewed ten other members of the Sangha 28 , most
their [[minds]] with his [[exposition]] 21 ;
+
of whom had practised this postmortem-meditation at least once.
 +
When asked to explain how they understood maranasati, all
 +
agreed with Buddhaghosa’s interpretation that maranasati re¬
 +
quires the practitioners to remind themselves constantly of the
 +
proximity of death. From the subsequent analyses of the inter¬
 +
views, I noticed that two other practices had also been classified
 +
as maranasati. Without ever challenging Buddhaghosa’s definition,  
 +
eight of the eleven interviewees suggested that maranasati was
 +
broader than this mere awareness of the potentiality of death.  
 +
First, they considered meditation on asubha, as described by
 +
Buddhaghosa (i.e. the ten types of charnel-ground contemplations
 +
or their modern expression in the autopsy room) as belonging to
 +
maranasati as long as the yogis perceived and constantly con¬
 +
templated the fragility of life. This falls in-line with the Sati-
  
6. ‘he wins over their [[minds]] with his [[exposition]], . . .but
 
they do not find him worth hearing 22 ;
 
  
7. ‘they find him worth hearing but after they have heard
+
28 The stilus of ihe dasa sit malavo is the object of a controversy among the
' him they tu-e not convinced 23 ;
+
Sinhalese monastic community. [For more information on the subject, sec Tessa
 +
Barihoiomcusz. Women under the Do Tree. Buddhist Nuns in Sri Lanka.  
 +
Cambridge 1994]
  
8. ‘having heard him, they are convinced,... but the [[faithful]]
 
. make no sign of their [[belief]] 24 ;
 
  
 +
i patthana’s suggestion that practitioners must reflect on the fact
 +
that their body possesses the same nature. In fact, many monks in
 +
Sri Lanka have witnessed autopsies in order to cultivate
 +
asubha and/or maranasati. Moreover, photographs of autopsies
 +
j are broadly available for the Thai monastic community and these
  
16 siha-nadam nadati, ‘utters his [[lion's roar]]', 'makes his [[assertion]]*, 'issues his
+
i are widely circulated in Sri Lanka. Most of the hermitages where
challenge*. See [[Nathan Katz]], [[Buddhist]] Images of [[Human]] [[Perfection]]: The
 
[[Arahant]] of the [[Sutta Pitaka]] compared with the [[Bodhisattva]] and the Mahd-
 
[[siddha]] ([[Delhi]] 1982) 29ff, for further usages of this expression.
 
  
17 D l 175.
+
! the interviews were conducted had at least a few of these photo-
  
18 Ibid .
+
| graphs and/or partial or complete skeletons used for meditation
  
19 Ibid.  
+
purposes. All the monks using these tools, however, strongly
 +
emphasised that without reflecting on their own body, the
 +
charnel-ground contemplations (or the contemplation of the
 +
photographs or the skeletons) remain solely at the asubha level.  
  
20 Ibid.  
+
These same eight monastics perceived maranasati as the
 +
natural result of their daily riieditatidn. As the abbot in charge of
 +
a major meditatibn centre in Colombo remarked, -death itself is
 +
merely a concept which is totally devoid of substance. For this
 +
reason, it is impossible to focus on it’. He further explained that
 +
what we conventionally call death does not exist, for the simple
 +
reason that in order for something/someone to die, it needs to
 +
possess an independent existence which Buddhist doctrine denies
 +
with the theories of anicca , anatta and paticcasamuppada. A
 +
person docs not merely die at the end of one’s existence for, at
 +
the deepest level, this person never existed. What we normally
 +
term ‘person’ is an amalgam of five aggregates which arc con¬
 +
stantly changing. Every moment, each of these aggregates arises
 +
and passes away ( upajjhitva, nirujjhanti). Therefore, maranasati,
 +
viewed from this angle, cannot be separated from the normal
 +
practice of vipassana meditation which aims, as the tradition
 +
claims, at seeing things as they really are. Practitioners of vi¬
 +
passana who simply observe their own mind and body soon
 +
notice the transitory character of existence. Eventually, they
 +
become aware that birth and death happen at every single mo-
  
21 Ibid.
+
Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)
  
22 Ibid.
 
  
23 sotabbam c*assa mahhanti . . .na ca kho sulvd pasidanti . ibid. [[Pasidati]] 'a  
+
ment. Mater-al particles arise and vanish: death is present through¬
[[mental]] altitude which unites deep [[feeling]], [[intellectual]] [[appreciation]] and satisfied
+
out the life-process. Such an awareness helps, on the one hand, to
clarification of [[thought]] and [[attraction]] towards the [[teacher]]*. {{Wiki|K.N. Jayatilleke}},  
+
cope with what we conventionally call death. By becoming
Early [[Buddhist]] {{Wiki|Theory}} of [[Knowledge]] ([[London]] 1963, {{Wiki|New Delhi}} 1989) § 655.
+
increasingly aware of the presence of death, at the experiential
 +
level, practitioners are no more intimidated when the final mo¬
 +
ment comes. Death is nothing but the culmination of successive
 +
deaths which one had gradually learned to deal with. On the other
 +
hand, this same process helps them live a less egocentric,.more
 +
detached, cquanimous and compassionate life, for they have come
 +
to understand that nothing is worth clinging to, and that human
 +
suffering is directly related to the cultivation of the awareness of  
 +
impermanence, the core of Theravada Buddhist meditation. In
 +
fact, when one practises one of these two thoroughly, the other is
 +
also automatically practised, whether consciously or not
  
24 Ibid. Presumably this means that they utter no [[acceptance]] [[formula]], provide
+
The view that maranasati is intimately linked with vipas¬
no meals for the [[bhikkhus]], etc.  
+
sana is also corroborated by the fact that the former is one of
 +
the four protections ( caiurarakkha ). Members of the Sangha as
 +
well as lay-meditators in intensive training are encouraged to
 +
recite daily the verses of protections. By recollecting the qualities
 +
of the Buddha, promoting loving-kindness, restraining sexual
 +
desires through asubha and promoting the awareness of death, the
 +
practitioners’ ability to deepen their meditation is supposed to in¬
 +
crease. It is also noteworthy that lay people going to the temple
 +
in order to pay respect to the Buddha often recite a standard
 +
verse similar to those found in the four protections: I pay respect
 +
to the Buddha; may I obtain some merit This body [of mine] will
 +
be destroyed just as these flowers will fade”. This indicates that
  
Manne [[The Lion’s Roar]]
+
Boisvert Death as meditation subject
  
  
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
+
! the practice of maranasati as such is not only followed by medi-
  
9. ‘the [[faithful]] give the sign of their [[belief]], ... but they do
+
! tators but, to a certain extent, by most devout Buddhists as well.  
not follow the [[path]] to the [[Truth]] ([[Nibbana]]) 25 ;
 
  
10. ‘they follow the [[Path]],... but they do not succeed’ 26 .  
+
When asked how a monk should practise maranasati, the  
 +
I abbot suggested two methods, the second being much more effec- •
 +
j tive than the first. One may start by the simple recital of the four
 +
I protections discussed above. When meditators are more advanced
 +
in their practice of vipassana , they can embark on a radically
 +
different practice. They should lie like a corpse, preferably at
 +
' night and, as suggested by Buddhaghosa, recall that Buddhas,
  
These are clearly important accusations and the [[Buddha’s]] re¬
+
1 kings, neighbours and parents have died. They then remind them¬
futation of them is categorical. He asserts that in fact exactly the  
+
selves that death is inevitable. It is at this stage that they must
opposite is the case.  
+
‘feel life go out from every part of the body, from the toes
 +
upwards. If this practice is accomplished properly, one actually
 +
1 dies’. The- abbot himself refused to answer when 1 asked if he
 +
practises this sort of meditation, for members of the Sangha are  
 +
not supposed to brag about their accomplishments. Neither did he
 +
v clarify whether he meant that the body technically dies and is
 +
reanimated, or that one symbolically dies by becoming aware of
 +
the ever presence of death throughout the body, a presence
 +
manifesting itself through the constant process of impermanence.  
 +
This second interpretation would be in line with the traditional
 +
practice of vipassana.  
  
The [[Buddha]] refutes further potential accusations regarding
+
It is clear from these eight interviews that the practice of
his conduct when challenged in a different [[debate]] [[sutta]] (A 1187).
+
: maranasati not only includes a_ constant remembrance of the
Sarabha, a {{Wiki|wanderer}}, who had recently stopped being a follower
 
of the [[Buddha]] is claiming that he left the [[Buddha’s teaching]] for
 
the very [[reason]] that he understood it 27 . This controversial ut¬
 
terance is reported to the [[Buddha]] who seeks out Sarabha and
 
challenges him. The [[Buddha]] asks Sarabha whether the report is
 
true, and how Sarabha has understood the [[Dhamma]] 78 . Sarabha
 
remains [[silent]] throughout this inquisition ‘confused, dejected,
 
hanging his head, downcast, cowed down’ 29 . The [[Buddha]] then
 
makes three assertions about himself. He asserts that* anyone
 
challenging him with regard to the following: (1) his claim to be
 
fully [[enlightened]] 30 , (2) his claim to be free of [[intoxicants]] 31 , and (3)
 
  
28 The second question is put twice. The situation here is very similar to that
+
1 finitude of life, but also incorporates asubhabhavana and the  
described by M. Witzel in The case of the shattered head* (Sludieh zur Indo-
 
togie und Iranisitk 13-14, 1987), pp. 363-415. although it does not include this
 
threat. This may be because the challenge is directed against a paribbdjaka , U is
 
worth noting that in the [[Buddhist texts]] this threat is directed solely against
 
[[brahmins]].
 
  
29 A I 186.  
+
awarness of anicca. This perception of maranasati differs radi¬
 +
cally from Buddhaghosa’s, for the latter only considered the aware-
  
30 [[sammasambuddha]].
 
  
31 khJnasava.
+
29 Pujcmi buddham Lusumena nena / Puhncna me te tabhami mukham /
 +
Puppham mitayali yalha idam me / Kayo latha yali vinasa bhavam II A simitar
 +
verse stressing thal all are subject to death is also frequently used by lay follow-
  
his claim .hat his [[Teaching]] leads a [[practitioner]] to the complete
+
ers: Namami buddham gunasagaram lam f Salt ha saddhd hortiu sukhi avira /
destruction of [[suffering]] 32 , would end up in the same {{Wiki|pitiable}}
+
Kayo jigujjo sakalo dugandho / Gacchanti sabbe maranam aham ca //
[[condition]] as Sarabha. The [[sutta]] continues, Then the [[Exalted One]],
 
having thrice uttered his [[lion’s roar]]... departed . .• .’ 33 .
 
  
The situations discussed above shew that the context in
 
which the [[Tathagata]] utters his [[lion’s roar]] is a [[debate]] 34 . They also
 
show that it is as [[Tathagata]] that [[Gotama]] makes the claims upon
 
which he is willing to be challenged in public 33 . The [[Tathagata’s]]
 
[[lion’s roar]] is a particular type of challenge. It is an [[assertion]] [[thai]]
 
the [[Buddha]] is willing' to defend in public and this also accounts
 
for the fact that it is uttered three times 36 .
 
  
What are those points that the [[Buddha]] was willing to defend
+
Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)  
in public? Three of them are given above: (1) that he was fully
 
[[enlightened]], (2) that he was free from [[intoxicants]], and (3) that his
 
[[Teaching]] leads a [[practitioner]] to the complete destruction ol
 
[[suffering]] 37 .
 
  
32 A 1 187.  
+
ness of dcaih as the essence of this practice. I must stress, how- j
 +
ever, that three other monastics categorically stated that
 +
maranasati was solely the awareness of death, and that the nine
 +
charnel-ground meditations belonged exclusively to the realm of
 +
asubhabhavana.  
  
33 Ibid« lr. Woodward, [[Gradual Sayings]] (GS) 1 169f.
+
I would like to conclude by summarising the divergences of {
  
34 See [[Joy]] Manne, ‘Categories of Suita in the [[Pali]] [[Nikayas]] and their im¬
+
interpretation that have been alluded to in this paper — that is, |  
plications for our [[appreciation]] of Use [[Buddhist Teaching]] and {{Wiki|Literature}}*, Journo
 
of the [[Pali Text Society]] XV, 1990, 29-87. See also Witzel, op. cit.
 
  
35 Further, the study of [[debate]] [[techniques]] in [[Joy]] Manne, The [[Digha]] Nikay;
+
divergences between canonical literature, the Visuddhimagga and
[[Debates]]; [[debating]] practices at the time of the [[Buddha]]' ( [[Buddhist]] Studie .  
+
contemporary practice. The description of maranasati in canoni¬
Reviep 9, 2, 1992, pp. 117-36) shows [[thai]] the [[Buddha]] regularly used his Taihagat.
+
cal literature is sparse and limited to the awareness of ageing and
{{Wiki|status}} to support his arguments in [[debates]].  
+
the proximity of death. Two simple methods for developing this
 +
awareness are described in the Ahguttara 30 , while many passages
 +
of, the Jiitakas and Thera- Thcrigatha praise this awareness by
 +
offering numerous examples of persons who, having realised the  
 +
inexorability of their fate, cither decided to renounce worldly life
 +
or attained enlightenment. Buddhaghosa, however, built an eight¬
 +
fold method for developing this awareness, a systematised method
 +
that is absent in earlier Pali literature. Yet contemporary practice
 +
shows a much wider interpretation which, according to the ma¬
 +
jority of the monastics interviewed, includes asubhabhavana and
 +
the awareness of anicca.  
  
36 M. [[Hara]], in his article ‘Mittabi* [Three Times*! [[Bukkyo]] kyori no kenkyu
+
copyrighted © Mathieu Boisvert
Tamara [[Yoshida]] hakase kanreki kinen ronshu ([[Tokyo]] 1982, pp.527-43), shows tha
+
(Director of graduate studies
in [[Indian philosophy]] and {{Wiki|literature}} 'doing an [[action]] three times means that i
+
dep. des sciences religieuses
must be intentional and that one is therefore held responsible for the [[action]]*.
+
Universite du Quebec a Montreal)  
  
am extremely grateful to Dr Tom [[Tillemans]] for providing a translation of thi
 
  
1 article, from which this quotation is taken.  
+
30 The fir^i thing is constantly to remind oneself that death could happen at
 +
any moment: after one day, one night, a meal, a single bite [A 111 303 and also
 +
at A IV 3161. The other being the different reasons for dying such as being
 +
bitten by a centipede, a snake or a scorpion, or falling, choking ... [A HI 307,
 +
5nd also at A IV 3201
  
ltuddhisl Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)
 
  
We have already met the two [[formulas]] that introduce the
+
EKOTTARAGAMA (XX)  
contents of the [[Tathagata’s]] [[lion’s roar]], (3 and 3A) together, and
 
(4). Each of these [[formulas]] introduces a different type of content
 
The contents of (3 and 3A) comprise the [[Teaching]] that the-j
 
[[Tathagata]] roars; the contents of (4) comprise the [[Tathagata’s]] %
 
qualities. Of these two [[formulas]] (the combination of (3 and 3A) is 5
 
  
the least frequently used. i
+
Translated from the Chinese Version by
 +
Thich Huycn-Vi and Bhikkhu Piisadika
 +
in collaboration with Sara Boin-Webb
  
The aspects of the [[Teaching]] that are placed within (3 and 3A)
+
Ninth Fascicle
are." .
+
Part 18
  
(6) ‘This is the [[body]], this is the [[arising]] of the [[body]], this is the
+
(Shame and Remorse)  
  
ceasing of the [[body]] 3 *. This is [[feeling]] . . n [[perception]] . . .,  
+
6. ‘‘Thus have I heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in
creative acts 3 ’..., this is [[consciousness]], this is the [[arising]] of
+
SravastI, at the Jeta Grove, in Anathapipdada’s Park. Then
[[consciousness]], this is the ceasing of [[consciousness]]’ 40 ,
+
Venerable Nanda donned exquisite robes, and with eye-shadow he
and
+
brightened up his eye[lids],« wearing slippers ornamented with
 +
gold. Again, he rubbed 2 the cosmetic off his eye[lids] and, holding
 +
in his hands jiisutlms-bowl, he was about to enter the city of  
 +
SravastI.
  
(7) ‘This is [[individuality]]: this is the origin of [[individuality]], this is  
+
From afar many bhik$us saw Venerable Nanda [on the point
 +
of] entering the city to beg for alms-food, while he was wearing
 +
exquisite robes. New those bhiksus went to the whereabouts of  
 +
the Exalted One, bowing down their heads at his feet, and sat
 +
down at one side. Hardly had [they taken their seats) when they
 +
stood up [again], saying to the Exalted One: As far as Bhiksu
 +
Nanda is concerned, he has donned exquisite robes and brightened
 +
up his eyetlids] with eye-shadow and is [thus] entering the city of
  
the [[cessation]] of [[individuality]], this is the [[path]] leading to the
 
[[cessation]] of [[individuality]]’ 41 .
 
  
The ensuing remarks by the [[devas]], [[identical]] in each of these
+
1 See T 2, 591a8 ff; Hayashi. p.153 ff.  
[[suttas]], show that they understand this to be a [[Teaching]] about
 
[[impermanence]]: * . . . We know, indeed, sirs, that we are im¬
 
[[permanent]], changing, not to last, taken in by [[individuality]]’ 41 .  
 
  
 +
2 For & Hayashi reads & (to compare; to criticise; to oppose), which does not
 +
seem appropriate.
  
38 Sl-c Rune Johansson, The Dynamic {{Wiki|Psychology}} of [[Early Buddhism]] , [[London]]
 
and Mai mo 1979, pp.29-34.
 
  
39 Johansson’s translation of [[sankhara]], ibid„ pp. 125ff.
 
  
40 S 111 85.
+
NOTES
  
41 iii saUidyo iti sakkdyasamudayo ili sakkdyanirodho iti sakkayanirodhagamini
+
1 • ^ or details of these developments, see D. D. Kosambi, The Culture and
patipddd ti. A 11 33. sakkdya is defined to be the five ‘groups of gras¬
+
Civilization of Ancient India (London, 1905), pp. 103 ff.; a more recent devel-
ping partca upddanakkhandhd , which are [[rupa]], [[vedana]] , sanha, sahkhdra, vinndna.  
+
opment of this theme is offered by Jaimal Rai in his The Rural-Urban Economy
M I 299.  
+
and Social Changes in Ancient India (Delhi, 1974), pp. 165 ff.  
  
42 .S III 85; ir. Woodward. KS 111 71.  
+
2. On the chronology of these texts, sec M. Wintemitz, A History of tfj
  
imm
+
Indian Literature (New York 1971), 11, pp. 17 IT.; for the dates of the Buddha I
 +
and Asoka, sec B. G. Gokhalc, Asoka A laurya (New York, 1971), pp. 35, 63; y
 +
also sec B. G. Gokhalc, Buddhism in Maharashtra , (Bombay, 1976), pp. 23 ff.; :|
 +
on these “elite * groups, see B. G. Gokhalc, “The Early Buddhist Elite "Jour-
 +
nal of Indian History, XL1 ll/ll (August 1965), pp. 391-402. '
  
Manne — The [[Lion's Roar]]
+
3. J. Kashyap (cd.). The Cullavagga (Nalanda, 1956), pp. 406—409-
  
The qualities of the [[Tathagata]] that warrant a [[lion’s roar]] arc
+
4. See G. P. Malalasckera, Dictionary of Tali Proper Names (London,  
comprised either in a statement about the [[Tathagata’s]] [[powers]]
 
(, [[balani]] ) or in a statement about the [[subject]] concerning which he
 
has complete [[confidence]] in himself ( vesarajjani ) introduced as in
 
[[formula]] (4).
 
  
The [[powers]] the [[Tathagata]] is willing to claim for himself in
+
- I960), 11, pp. 1126—1127; hereafter referred to as DPPN .  
the assemblies are enumerated variously as ten, six or five. The
 
[[ten powers]] are;
 
  
(8) i. ‘that the [[Tathagata]] [[knows]], as it really is, causal occasion
+
5. DPPN , 11, pp. 1126-1127; B. N. Chaudhury, Buddhist Centres in >
(of a thing) as such, and what is not causal .occasion as
+
{{Wiki|Ancient India}} ([[Calcutta]], 1969), pp. 71-74 (hereafter abbreviated as BCAl)',
such’ 43 ,
+
Halram Srivastavii, Trade and Commerce in {{Wiki|Ancient India}} ([[Varanasi]], 1968), pp.  
 +
75-76.
  
ii. ‘the fruit of .[[actions]] {{Wiki|past}}, {{Wiki|future}} and {{Wiki|present}}, both in their
+
6. BCAL pp. 99-105; DPPN, 11. pp. 721-724.
causal occasion and the [[conditions]] 44 ,  
 
  
iii. ‘the [[directions]] whatsoever of each practice 45 ,  
+
7. BCAl , pp. 43-45; DPPN , l, pp. 516-520; B. G. Gokhalc, [[Asoka]]
 +
[[Maurya]] ([[New York]], I960), pp. 75, 164.
  
iv. .'the .[[world]] as it really is, in its divers shapes and [[forms]]’ 46 ,  
+
8. BCAL pp. 56-60; DPPN, II, p. 940-943; J. [[Kashyap]] (cd.). The [[Digha]]  
 +
Nikdya ([[Nalanda]], 1958), II, pp. 92-93.
  
v. ‘the divers characters of [[beings]]’ 47 ,  
+
9. BCAL pi). 85-87; DPPN, l, pp. 692-695; Gokhale, op. cit., p. 163.
  
vi. ‘the [[state]] of the [[faculties]] of other [[beings]]’ 48 ,  
+
10. BCAl, pp. 182-184; DPPN, I, pp. 344-345; also see B. C. Law,
 +
Ujjay ini in {{Wiki|Ancient India}} (Gwalior, 1944), pp. 2-4, 13-15, 32-33; J. [[Kashyap]] *
 +
(cd.). The Malta [[vagga]] ([[Nalanda]], 1956), pp. 214-217; [[T. W. Rhys Davids]] and
 +
H. [[Oldenberg]] (traus.), Vi nay a Texts ([[Delhi]], 1965), pp. 32-40.
  
vii. '*the [[defilement]], the [[purification]], and the [[emergence]] of
+
11. BCAL pp. 122-123: DPPN, I, pp. 855-856; J. [[Kashyap]] (cd.). The
[[attainments]] in [[meditation]] ( [[jhana]] ), [[liberation]] (vin.okha)
+
Mahdiwgga, pp. 327 ff.
and [[concentration]] ( [[samadhi]] )’ 49 ,  
 
  
viii. ‘The [[Tathagata]] can recall his many states of [[existence]],  
+
12. For the term [[nigama]], see Jaimal Rai, op. cit. , pp. 160-161.  
thus: One [[birth]], two [[births]], three [[births]] and so on .;. up
 
to an hundred thousand [[births]]; likewise many evolutions
 
  
43 A V 33; tr. Woodward, GS V 24. Explained at [[Dhammasangani]] (Dhs) 1337.  
+
13. For the Brdhmanagamas, sec B. G. Gokhale, “[[Brahmanas]] in Early
 +
[[Buddhist]] {{Wiki|Literature}}, M in Journal of [[Indian History]] , XLV11I/1, pp. 51-61.  
  
44 Ibid 4 ir. ibid. Cf. [[Middle Length Sayings]] (MLS) 1 93f.  
+
14. See C.S.J\ Misra, The Age of [[Vinaya]] ({{Wiki|New Delhi}}, 1972), pp.
 +
249-260; also see Balratn Srivastava, op. cit. f pp. 268-283.  
  
45 Ibid ; tr. ibid.  
+
15. For the rccmergcncc of “villagism” sec D. D. [[Kosambi]], op. cit., pp.  
  
46 anckadhalunadhatudokam yathdbhutam pajbnati, A V 33f; tr. ibid.  
+
103 ff. v
  
* 47 A V 34; tr. ibid.  
+
16. For the [[Buddha]] and the “[[caste]]** system of his times see B. G. Gok-
 +
b . [[Buddhism]] in {{Wiki|Maharashtra}}, pp. 26 ff.  
  
48 parasattdnam para pug galdnam indriyaparopariyattam yathdbhutam pa jd
+
17. DPPN. II, p. 27.  
[[nati]]. I bid:, tr. ibid.  
 
  
Marine — [[The Lion’s Roar]]
+
18. See I* »*.. Gokhale, op., cit.. ' 162; for inscripuoual {{Wiki|evidence}} of the
  
 +
Sunga-Kan *‘»d. see H. Ludc; \frpendix to Epigraphia [[Indica]] ([[Calcutta]],
 +
1912). X,N 248,299.867
  
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
 
  
of [[aeons]], many dissolutions of [[aeons]], many evolutions
+
[[Pilgrimage]] and the Structure
and dissolutions of [[aeons]], (remembering); At that time I
+
of [[Sinhalese]] [[Buddhism ]]*
had such a [[name]], was of such a [[family]], of such com¬
 
plexion, was thus supported, thus and thus [[experienced]]
 
[[pleasure]] and [[suffering]], had such and such a [[lifespan]]. Pass¬
 
ing away from that [[existence]], I arose in another [[state]] of
 
[[existence]]. And there, I had such a [[name]], was of such a
 
[[family]].. .Passing away from that [[existence]], I arose here’ 50 ,
 
  
ix. The [[Tathagata]] with [[divine]] [[vision]], [[purified]] and surpassing
+
by John C. Holt oa JbS]l
that of men, sees the deceasing and [[rising up]] again of
 
[[beings]], both low and [[exalted]], beautiful or ugly, gone to a
 
[[state of bliss]] or a bad [[state]] according to their [[deeds]]. He
 
[[knows]] [[beings]] thus; these [[beings]], sirs, who are given to
 
the practice of wrong conduct in [[body]], [[word]] and
 
[[thought]], who criticise the [[noble ones]], who are of [[wrong view]] and who acquire for themselves the {{Wiki|fruits}} of their
 
[[wrong view]], having passed away arise after [[death]] in a.
 
[[state]] of loss, a bad [[state]], a [[state]] of lower [[existence]], a
 
[[state]] of destruction, those [[beings]], sirs, who-a.re given to
 
the practice of [[right conduct]] in [[body]], [[word]] and [[thought]],
 
who do not criticise the [[noble ones]], who are of [[right view]] and who acquire for themselves the {{Wiki|fruits}} of their
 
[[right view]], having passed away arise after [[death]] in a
 
[[state of bliss]], in the [[heavenly]] [[world]]’ 51 ,
 
  
x. The [[Tathagata]], through destroying the [[intoxicants]],
+
Throughout the [[history of Buddhism]] in [[South]] and {{Wiki|Southeast Asia}}, [[Buddhists]] have undertaken [[religious]] [[pilgrimages]] to sa¬
having seen for himself in this very [[lifetime]], through his
+
cred place's where, according to [[tradition]], [[bodily relics]] of the  
[[own]] [[higher knowledge]], the [[release]] of the [[mind]] and the  
+
[[Buddha]] are enshrined. This ‘‘{{Wiki|cult}} of traces”’ has been so wide¬
[[release]] through [[wisdom]] that is free from [[intoxicants]].  
+
spread and powerful that at least one [[scholar]] has suggested that
 +
in the formative period of Thcravada [[Buddhism in Sri Lanka]],  
 +
it provided the primary focal point of [[spiritual]] orientation for
 +
jnuch of the lay [[tradition]].* As the [[monastic community]] focused
 +
its cultic '[[activities]] upon the study, {{Wiki|recitation}} and [[interpretation]]  
 +
of the [[Buddha’s teachings]] ( dhammukdyu ), the laity propitiated
 +
the [[Buddha]] through venerating the remains of his [[physical body]] ([[rupakaya]]). These two orientations represent the means by
 +
which the [[monastic]] and lay segments of the early [[Buddhist community]] sustained the legacy of the [[Buddha’s]] [[life]] and teach*
  
remains in that [[attainment]]’ 52 .  
+
; ings. The origins of this [[division]] of [[spiritual]] labor may be found
 +
in texts that are as [[ancient]] as the Mahaparinibbdna Sulla of the
 +
Dlgha Nikdya, articulated perhaps within one hundred years of
 +
the [[death of the Buddha]].  
  
This list of ten is supported in the Vibhahga where it occurs in •  
+
However, [[pilgrimage]] to [[sacred places]] where relies of the
[[identical]] [[form]] with the exception of the ninth [[bala]] which is
+
k [[Buddha]] are enshrined is more than a {{Wiki|matter}} of commemorat-
expressed simply:
+
l : ing the [[great master]]. The [[Buddha’s]] [[relics]] were popularly be-
 +
lieved to be latent [[manifestations]] of [[miraculous power]]. Pious
 +
[{{Wiki|political}} rulers assumed that possession of the [[Buddha’s]] [[relics]]  
 +
it legitimated and strengthened their {{Wiki|abilities}} to {{Wiki|rule}}.* From the  
 +
| time of the [[Indian]] [[emperor]] [[Asoka]] in the third century B.C.,
 +
| [[relics]] were closely associated with {{Wiki|temporal}} power.
  
> (9) ix. [The [[Tathagata]]! [[knows]] as it really is the rebecoming of  
+
. in {{Wiki|modern}} [[Sri Lanka]], [[kingship]] is now a {{Wiki|matter}} of {{Wiki|past}} his-
  
[[beings]]’ 53 .
+
f, tory. Yet [[pilgrimage]] to [[sacred places]] associated with the Bud-
  
In the {{Wiki|commentarial}} section that follows this list, however, the
 
[[exposition]] comprises thfc full text of the ninth [[bala]] as given in
 
the list of ten above 54 . When [[six powers]] are enumerated these are
 
Nos 1, 2, 7, 8, 9 and 10 of the list of ten 55 . The five- [[powers]] are
 
made up of a quite different list:
 
  
(10) The [[powers]] of [[faith]], modesty, {{Wiki|conscience}} (shrinking back
+
(Ilia’s [[relics]] continues to be a widespread [[religious practice]]. One-|
 +
of tiie holiest [[shrines]] in [[Sri Lanka]] is the Da|ada Maligawa-f
 +
(I emple of the Tooth) in [[Kandy]]. At all times during the yeaiy||
 +
especially during the annual Asa|a Perahara {{Wiki|festival}} in July-*!
 +
August, thousands of traditional-minded [[Buddhists]] make a
 +
grimage in order to [[honor]] the [[Buddha’s]] [[relic]]. This is a brief j
 +
study of [[pilgrimage]] to [[Kandy]] and its wider significance within *
 +
the {{Wiki|structure}} of [[Sinhalese]] [[Buddhism]]. i
  
from doing wrong), [[energy]] and [[wisdom]]’ 56 .
 
  
The [[four subjects]] of [[confidence]] (vesarajjani) that the [[Tatha]]¬
+
I he [[Symbolism]] uj the [[Relic]] and its [[Ritual]] Importance $jjH
[[gata]] is willing to proclaim in the assemblies are expressed in the
 
[[form]] of a {{Wiki|denial}}. The [[Buddha]] says, ‘I do not behold the ground
 
on which a [[recluse]] or a [[brahmin]] or a [[deva]] or a [[Mara]] or [[Brahma]]
 
or anyone in the [[world]] will legitimately reprove me’ 57 . These
 
potential charges are:
 
  
(11) i. ‘These [[dhammas]] are not [[enlightened]] in you, although you
+
Of the several [[reasons]] [[lor]] the da(add's (tooth-relic’s) contin- <1$
claim to be fully [[enlightened]]’ 5 *,
+
ous charismatic appeal for traditional Buddhists, one of the
 +
most important is its past association with the power of Sinha* 1 ^
 +
lese Buddhist kings.
  
 +
The Dalhavattisa —written by Dhammakitti in the twelfth^
 +
century A.D. and purportedly based upon an ancient Sinhalese:^
 +
poem, the Daladdvatiisa —contains a mythic account 1 of how the)|B
 +
relic remained in Dantapura r> under the {{Wiki|patronage}} of a longiffij
 +
line of righteous [[kings]]. According to this account, in the fouith|ra
 +
century A.D. an [[Indian]] [[king]], Guhaslva, converted to Bud^S
 +
dhism, thereby angering the brahmapical {{Wiki|priests}} of his cour^lB
 +
[[War]] followed when the {{Wiki|priests}} complained to the Papcju klngaJB
 +
[[Pataliputra]]. lo insure the continued safety of the'relic, Cu rfgj
 +
haslva gave it to his daughter and son-in-law and told them to|fi|
 +
take it to [[Ceylon]]. When they arrived with the [[relic]], the Sinha^fl
 +
lese [[king]] paid it great homage and placed it in a [[shrine]] known^S
 +
as the Dhammacakha . From that time, [[Buddhist]] [[kings]] protectedJK
 +
the tooth-relic as if its well-being constituted one of their pri^H
 +
mary responsibilities.
  
52 A V 36. The reference for ihe whole attestation is A V 32-6; cf. M 12 [1
+
The Da(havavisa's account contains a number of significant^B
69-711 Translation taken from Woodward, GS V 23ff as indicated. Otherwise 1
+
motifs familiar to the [[traditional]] chronicles of [[Sri Lanka]]. In dbugM
 +
first instance, off-spring of a converted [[Indian Buddhist]] mon ^M  
 +
arch are sent on a {{Wiki|royal}} [[mission]] to take [[relics]] to [[Sri Lanka]]. Th isa B
 +
parallels the Mahdvayisa's account of how the [[alms-bowl]] ReMcM
 +
and scion of the [[Bodhi Tree]] were brought to Sri Lankaj,b y|||
 +
[[Mahinda]] and Sahghamitta during Asoka’s [[kingship]]. 6 Second^B
 +
its placement by the [[Sinhalese]] [[king]] in the [[Dhamma-cakka]] [[shrine]] M
 +
explicitly identifies the [[relic]] with the king’s [[duty]] to “{{Wiki|rule}} by iS
  
have
 
  
used my [[own]].  
+
[[righteousness]].” 7 Third, the legend helps to sustain a national
 +
[[belief]] that the {{Wiki|future}} well-being of the [[Buddha’s]] [[religion]] is in
 +
the hands of the [[Sinhalese]] [[people]].”
  
Vbh 318.  
+
An earlier account of the relic’s importance is given by the
 +
{{Wiki|Chinese}} [[pilgrim]] [[Fa-Hien]], who traveled in [[Ceylon]] during the
 +
5lh century. By the time of Fa-Hien’s account, venerating the
 +
tooth-relic had become an [[auspicious]] means [[lor]] the [[king]] and
 +
the laity to “amass [[merit]] for themselves.” 11 Ten days bclore the
 +
[[king]] sponsored a grand procession of the [[relic]] from his palace
 +
to the Abhyagiri [[monastery]] in [[Anuradhapura]], a {{Wiki|royal}} an¬
 +
nouncement containing a description ot the [[Buddha’s]] career as
 +
a [[bodhisattva]] was issued. The description, reminiscent of the
 +
[[Vessantara]] Jdtaka , cmphasiy.es hOw the [[Buddha]] sacrificed his
 +
entire {{Wiki|kingdom}} out of [[compassion]] [[lor]] the well-being ol the
 +
[[world]] and implies that the [[bodhisattva]] career ot the [[Buddha]]
 +
had already become an {{Wiki|ideal}} model for [[Buddhist]] [[kings]] to emu-
 +
| late. Thus, by the fifth century, the [[tooth relic]] seems already to
 +
* have become the king's [[own]] personal talisman and “palladium
 +
| of the [[Sinhalese]] [[people]].” 10
  
 +
S ' Bardwell Smith writes that the [[tooth relic]] continued lo Ik*
 +
of immense [[symbolic]] importance to [[Buddhist]] [[kings]] during the
 +
| early {{Wiki|medieval}} Polonnaruva period: “The regalia needed by
 +
j monarchs to authenticate their {{Wiki|sovereignty}} included the [[Tooth Relic]] and the Alms-Bowl [[Relic]]. 'Flic [[suspicion]] or dubious lin-
 +
1 cage that their absence implied s|K*lled the promise of dire.
 +
| {{Wiki|consequences}}. When taken, they were to be retrieved at any
 +
r cost.” 11 The [[symbolic]] importance of the [[tooth relic]] for the le¬
 +
ft gitimacy of [[Buddhist]] [[kingship]] was not lost upon the [[people]] of
 +
ft the {{Wiki|kingdom}}. The king's close association with the [[relic]] under-
 +
| scored the popular [[belief]] that the [[king]] was actually a “[[Buddha]]-
 +
| ;in-the-making,” the most pious [[religious]] [[layman]] of the [[realm]]. 12
 +
| His possession of the [[relic]] gave him access to [[sacral]] power
 +
| which, ideally, he would use for the general well-being and
 +
{{Wiki|security}} of his [[people]]. In this way, “{{Wiki|royal}} power was regarded
 +
|-ias ap instrument of [[cosmic]] power.'* 15
  
54
+
'The king's relationship to this [[cosmic]] power was graphical-
 +
ily illustrated in the [[ritual]] [[life]] of the city, a [[ritual]] [[life]] in which the
 +
H [[tooth relic]] played an important role. The capital seems to have
 +
H functioned as a [[sacred]] center, an {{Wiki|axis mundi}} , from which righ-
 +
&| teous power through [[ritual]] performance was [[thought]] to be
  
Vbh 343.
 
A III 417ff.
 
  
[[saddha]] balam , [[hiri]]- % oilappaviriya -,
+
{{Wiki|magically}} radiated to the outlying provinces to insure stability
 +
and order. The [[king]], thus, occupied a mediating position be¬
 +
tween [[cosmic]] power and his [[people]]. [[Rituals]] and [[relics]] were
 +
[[magical]] conduits of power enabling the [[king]] to meet his pre¬
 +
scribed {{Wiki|royal}} duties.
  
pahnabalam. A 11 9.  
+
During the [[Kandyan]] period, the king’s relationships to cos¬
 +
mic power and to his [[people]] were brought into unparalleled
 +
high relief with the inauguration of the annual AVaja Pcrahara
 +
procession. In the middle of the eighteenth century, [[King]] Klrti
 +
Sri Rajasiipha [[initiated]] sweeping [[religious]] and {{Wiki|political}} reforms
 +
that he hoped would legitimate his [[South Indian]] Nayakkar
 +
{{Wiki|dynasty}} in the [[eyes]] of the [[Sinhalese]] [[people]]." Early in his reign,
 +
he reestablished [[orthodox]] lines of [[monastic ordination]] for the
 +
[[Asgiriya]] and Malwalta nikdyas ([[monastic]] chapters) in [[Kandy]].  
  
57
+
, Since the [[sahgha]] was also a [[traditional]] source of legitimation
 +
for [[Buddhist]] [[kings]], the importation of [[Siamese]] [[monks]] to con¬
 +
fer ufmumjHidd ([[ordination]]) upon aspiring [[Sinhalese]] aristo¬
 +
cratic [[monks]] constituted a calculated move to strengthen his
 +
{{Wiki|rule}}. But the move almost backfired. The [[Siamese]] became
 +
grievously offended when they witnessed the [[king]] promoting a
 +
pcrahara (procession) in which [[Hindu gods]] wre publically ven¬
 +
erated and dignified to the exclusion of the [[Buddha]]. 15 Klrti Sri
 +
reacted to the [[monks]]' condemnation with discretion: “A new
 +
daladd ([[tooth relic]]) pcrahara was introduced into the general
  
Ibid .  
+
• ritual'complex and was given primacy over all other perahdras.  
 +
The pcrahara in this [[form]] reestablished the primacy of Bud¬
 +
dhism within the [[Sinhalese]] [[religious]] system." 1 ®
  
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
+
In so doing, the [[king]] wittingly or unwittingly fused to-
  
 +
• gether two powerful and [[ancient]] [[ritual]] [[traditions]]. Before the
 +
inclusion of the [[tooth relic]] into the [[ritual]] proceedings of the
 +
Asa|a Pcrahara, the {{Wiki|ceremony}} consisted chiefly in the propitia¬
 +
tion of [[deities]] who were petitioned by [[Hindu]] {{Wiki|priests}} to insure
 +
the {{Wiki|fertility}} and [[prosperity]] of the tealin. Although the inclusion
 +
of the daladd in the [[ritual]] proceedings may have reestablished
 +
the primacy of [[Buddhism]], the [[gods]] were by no means banished
  
ii. These [[intoxicants]] are not destroyed in you, although you
+
* from the annual [[rites]]. Today, one of the major events of the
claim to be free from [[intoxicants]]’ 59 ,  
+
Asa|a {{Wiki|festival}} is a [[ritual]] circumambulation of four wooden kapa
 +
(poles), which [[symbolizes]] the king’s former petitions to the [[gods]]
 +
for the kingdom’s {{Wiki|fertility}} and [[prosperity]]. 17 This [[ritual]] tradi¬
 +
tion complements the second [[rite]] of circumambulation, which
  
iii. ‘There is no impediment for one who follows the [[dham]]-
 
mas that you have called the [[dhammas]] that [[cause]] im¬
 
pediment’ 60 ,
 
  
iv. The [[Dhamma]] that you teach purportedly for this [[reason]]
+
was introduced to accommodate the importance of the daladd.  
does not lead to the complete destruction of all [[suffering]]
 
for the [[practitioner]]’ 61 .  
 
  
Because the Tathaguta sees no legitimate ground upon which he
+
In that second circumambulation, the [[king]], with the daladd ca¬
may be reproved, he is [[peaceful]], [[fearless]], convinced 62 concerning
+
parisoned on a {{Wiki|royal}} [[elephant]],* led a procession around the—
potential charges that may be made against him.  
+
[[boundaries]] of [[Kandy]] in a [[symbolic]] “capture” or “righteous con¬
 +
quest.” Together, the two circumambulation [[rites]] represent a
 +
dramatic theatrical enactment of what numerous [[scholars]] refer
 +
to as “the [[doctrine]] of the exemplary center.’’"* More specilkal-
 +
ly, these [[rites]] represent an ontogeny of the king’s power, which
 +
was rooted in [[ritually]] currying favor with the [[gods]] aiul invok¬
 +
ing the power of the [[Buddha]]. The former insured [[prosperity]],  
 +
the [[latter]] righteous {{Wiki|political}} order.  
  
Two [[suttas]] in S (II 27 = Nos. 21, 28 = No.2.2) open with the  
+
When the [[British]] seized the [[relic]] during their takeover of
[[formula]] (4), adapting it so as to include both the [[ten powers]]  
+
[[Kandy]] in 1815, some [[Buddhists]] openly worried about the [[fu]]¬
{[[balani]]) and the four confidences (vesarajjani). Instead, however,  
+
ture of [[Buddhism]], while others ([[including]] tiie British)"'.be¬
of listing these as we have seen them above, these [[suttas]] follow
+
lieved that possession of the daladd would guarantee colonial
the opening [[formula]] with the [[Dependent Origination]] ( [[paticca]] -
+
hegemony. But since 1847 (when the [[British]], under severe
samuppacla). These [[suttas]] begin with (4) above 63 , and continue:  
+
pressure from [[Christian]] groups in [[Britain]] as well as in [[Ceylon]],
 +
turned over custody of the [[relic]] to the [[Asgiriya]] and Malwalta
 +
[[monasteries]]), th q^dalada has officially been regarded as a reli¬
 +
gious [[object]] only. Thus, [[Wilhelm Geiger]] has written:  
  
(12) Thus, "this" being, "that" becomes, from the [[arising]] of this,
+
*At the {{Wiki|present}} the Dajada is no longer a [[symbol]] of {{Wiki|political}}  
that arises; this not being; that becomes not; from the  
 
ceasing of this, that ceases. That is to say, [[conditioned]] by
 
[[ignorance]], [[activities]] come to pass, [[conditioned]] by [[activities]]
 
[[consciousness]] conies to pass, and so on: such is the uprising
 
of this entire {{Wiki|mass}} of Ill. But from the utter fading out and
 
[[cessation]] of [[ignorance]], [[activities]] cease, from the ceasing of
 
[[activities]] [[consciousness]] ceases, and so on: such is the ceasing
 
  
 +
E owcr, but is the revered centre of {{Wiki|worship}} for all pious
 +
>uddhists living in [[Ceylon]] and for many thousands of
 +
[[pilgrims]] who come from abroad'cach year to profess their
 +
veneration and [[devotion]] for that {{Wiki|holy}} [[relic]] of the [[Great Master]] of the [[World]]. 2 "
  
59 I hid.  
+
Although [[Geiger’s]] statement is formally correct, it cannot be
 +
denied that the relic’s continued [[popularity]] is due in part to a
 +
resurgence in “civil [[religion]]” among [[Sinhalese]] [[Buddhists]] in the
 +
19th and 20th centuries. 21 That is, the [[relic]] continues *o sym¬
 +
bolize the [[traditional]] {{Wiki|cultural}} and {{Wiki|social}} values of [[Sinhalese]]
 +
{{Wiki|culture}}. Government tourism officials actively promote the
 +
Asaja Pcrahara at home and abroad as a national holiday cele¬
 +
brating indigenous customs and {{Wiki|cultural}} ideality. The relic’s
 +
continued {{Wiki|political}} [[symbolism]] is [[recognized]] by modern-day
 +
[[Sinhalese]] politicians, who find it expedient to participate in the
 +
da(add 's [[ritual]] procession or conspicuously to visit the Dajada
 +
Maligava. 22 It is also evident that the Asaja Pcrahara procession
 +
continues to depict [[symbolically]] the {{Wiki|social}} {{Wiki|structure}} ol [[Kandyan]]
  
60 Ibid.
 
  
61 Ibid. (A II Sf = M 1 710.  
+
[[society]].*' What these {{Wiki|social}} and {{Wiki|political}} facts reF.ect is that|
 +
du[ada is a public [[symbol]] which expresses the continuing d
 +
association between [[religion]] and {{Wiki|politics}} in this ccntempoi
 +
{{Wiki|Asian}} [[society]].-' -4
  
62 A It 8f = M-1 71f.  
+
Therefore, [[pilgrimage]] to [[Kandy]] constitutes both a religi
 +
and {{Wiki|political}} act, especially in these times when [[Tamil]] sepajjii
 +
ism appears to be regaining some momentum in Sri Lanl
 +
While it is clear that many [[traditional]] [[Buddhists]] undertake.^
 +
[[pilgrimage]] to [[Kandy]] for purely [[religious]] [[reasons]], and thattb
 +
[[religious]] {{Wiki|behavior}} exhibits a personal [[devotion]] to the Bud<
 +
resembling that of Hindu bhakti, the entire pilgrimage coq9
 +
plex retains something of its medieval ethos. From its partici^g
 +
pants, it commands a reverential “civitas.” Even the three dad;
 +
prayers offered by officiating bhikkhus at the Dalada M&lig§\;
 +
repcsent petitions to the Buddha for the continued moral qi^
 +
der and prosperity of the realm.* 5 H. L. Seneviratne, wfo ’
 +
studies of ritual life in Kandy are especially definitive, has i^
 +
ferred to the public Asala l’erahiira performances and ritua^
 +
life in the temple as part of a “creative and selective process”^
 +
which a traditional culture is asserting its indigenous systems pf
 +
value and power in response to changes brought abotU
 +
modernity.* 1 That is, while significant numbers of traditiot
 +
Sinhalese have remained separated from new forms of cultut^j
 +
and social, economic and political power, pilgrimage td^Kahd
 +
remains a means to assert and maintain beliefs in iridigenou|
 +
concepts of power aiid cultural legitimation. Or, pilgrimage
 +
Kandy is a religious act affirming traditional modes of powajj
 +
used to maintain order and prosperity.  
  
63 In full in No.21, indicated in brief in No.22.
 
  
Manne — The [[Lion's Roar]]
+
II. Pilgrimage to Kandy and the Structure of Sinhalese Buddhism
  
of this entire {{Wiki|mass}} of 111’ 64 .  
+
The comparative study of pilgrimage has much in con
 +
with the comparative study of religion in general. Pilgrimage!
 +
patterns arc cross-cultural, historically archaic, and persistently
 +
popular. Within these patterns both cognitive and affective fop
 +
mutations of spiritual piety may be significant for both the per?
 +
sonal and social orientations of existence. Also, while pilgrii
 +
age, like religion, can be defined in relatively simplistic termsS
 +
there is no single body of critical theory that can serve as aj
  
It is difficult to sec how the phrases quoted in these [[suttas]] com¬
+
wholly adequate framework for its definitive interpretation.-
prised of (4) and (12) above contain [[ten powers]] ( [[balani]] ) and four
 
confidences ( vesarajjani ). This indicates some [[confusion]] in the
 
handing down of the [[tradition]].  
 
  
The above suggests that there were a number of points that  
+
ike religion in general, pilgrimage seems to resist facile reduc¬
the [[Buddha]] was willing to defend in public. (There was also a list
+
tions. It is no doubt true that the pilgrimage process ill general,
of questions he refused to defend either in public or in private,  
+
pecially from an existential perspective, manifests a uniform
the well-known unexplained ([[avyakata]]) questions.) The question is  
+
ructure. Turner is largely correct in identifying that process
whether these points have some particular importance in the
+
in terms of separation, liminality and re-aggregation.* 7 More¬
[[Buddha’s Teaching]] and should be regarded as its most important
+
over, it is equally clear that, pilgrimage, as a devotional act, can
features, or alternatively, whether these points are more relevant
+
Result in a transformation or regenertion of social and religious
to the [[debate]] procedures, topics and requirements of the time,  
+
identities. However, differing types of religious behavior ob¬
being permissable or required [[subjects]] in the context of the dis¬
+
servable at various sacred places of pilgrimage also indicate that  
cussion between contemporary [[religious]] movements 65 . With
+
pilgrimage may not necessarily climax in “exterior mysticism,
regard to their importance as aspects of the [[Teaching]], the pro¬
+
pr in an anti-structural, convivial,' egalitarian “communitas.” 28
blem is that records remaining to us in this {{Wiki|literature}} of topics
+
Rather, a comparative study of religious behavior at various
that conic within the category of ‘[[lion’s roar]]’ [[subjects]] are so
+
pilgrimage sites indicates that certain sacred places are settings
meagre that it is difficult to have any [[confidence]] in them, com¬
+
for specific types of religious behaviors, not all of which con¬
prising as they do only the [[arising]] and ceasing of the [[five khandhas]], [[formula]] (6) and the [[arising]] and ceasing of ‘in¬
+
form to Turner’s notion. In the case of Kandy, 1 have charac¬
dividuality’ ([[sakkaya]]), [[formula]] (7). With regard to the qualities of  
+
terized this behavior as reverential “civitas.” 1 will now deter¬
the [[Tathagata]], on the other hand, there are relatively many
+
mine the significance of pilgrimage to Kandy first within the  
examples of lists of these, even though they are not always
+
context of Sinhalese Buddhist religion and then within a cross*
mutually consistent. This {{Wiki|evidence}} suggests that it was primarily
+
^cultural comparative context.
those qualities and capacities that the [[Buddha]] claimed for himself
 
personally as [[Tathagata]], and that he would defend in public, that
 
comprised the content of the [[Buddha’s]] [[lion’s roar]], and that the
 
  
 +
While pilgrimage to Kandy sustains the ethos of the public
 +
d.’il religion formerly administered and symbolized by the
 +
presence of the king, other sacred places in Sri Lanka and India
 +
express other dominant spiritual orientations of great impor¬
 +
tance to the Sinhalese. Bodh Gaya in India, the seal of Golama’s
 +
|enlightenment, and Sarnath, the place of the Buddha's first
 +
sermon, have been for centuries the destinations of pious Bud¬
 +
dhist pilgrims, especially Thcravada bhikkhus. Gunawardana
 +
has pointed out that pilgrimage to sacred places in India associ¬
 +
ated with the most important events in the life of Gotama con¬
 +
tinuously resulted in the cross-fertilization of Thcravada Bud¬
 +
dhist traditions during the medieval periods of Sinhalese
 +
history . 2U Then, as now, Sarnath and, especially, Bodh Gaya,
 +
are centers of Buddhist cultural integration,
 +
t More importantly, howpver, observable religious behavior
 +
at Bodh'Gaya and Sarnath has very little in common with the
 +
ritual life carried out in Kandy. At Bodh Gaya, except for the
 +
T. remnants of an Asokan gateway, signs of kingship and civil
 +
^religion arc totally absent. There are no public pageants or
 +
^processions celebrating ethnicity or nationalism. Here, the fo-
  
64 S II 27f.
 
  
65 See Witzcl, op. cit.  
+
cus is upon the mythic events surrounding the enlightenment
 +
of the Buddha. Buddhist pilgrims, escorted either by Tibetan,
 +
Japanese, Burmese, Thai or Sinhalese monks, visit seven holy
 +
sites within the boundaries of the Mahiibodhi shrine that com¬
 +
memorate the Buddha’s activities before, during and after his
 +
enlightenment. The emphasis, in all forms of ritual behavior at
 +
Bodh Gaya, is upon the paradigmatic spirituality of the Bud¬
 +
dha, a spirituality which can be and has been emulated for
 +
centuries by Buddhist religious virtuosos. In each of the na¬
 +
tional temples representing the various strands of Buddhist
 +
tradition, the lile of the Buddha is depicted cither in mural
 +
paintings or in a series of framed pictures. Thus, at Bodh Gaya,
 +
what is venerated is not the “this-worldly” power of the Buddha
 +
and the means by which that power can be utilized to sustain
 +
the moral order and prosperity of a nation, realm of kingdom.
 +
Rather, what is quietly celebrated, in meditation and com¬
 +
memoration, is the path to nibbana through enlightenment, of
 +
which the lile'of the Buddha is a model. Therefore, in refer¬
 +
ence to a frequently employed metaphor for describing the
 +
structure ol Thcravada Buddhism (the “two wheels of
 +
Dhamma" M> ), [[pilgrimage]] to [[Bodh Gaya]] constitutes a cultic affir¬
 +
mation of the [[religious]] quest for an “other-worldly” [[nibbana]].
 +
That is, in contrast to [[Kandy]], where “this-worldly” Buddhaic
 +
power is [[symbolized]] by the tooth-relic and its association with
 +
. [[Sinhalese]] [[Buddhist]] ethnicity or nationhood, [[Bodh Gaya]] is a
 +
place of [[pilgrimage]] celebrating [[spiritual]] {{Wiki|transcendence}} of the
 +
{{Wiki|social}} and {{Wiki|temporal}} [[world]], the [[path]] which leads beyond condi¬
 +
tioned, saipsaric [[existence]]. To pul it another way, [[Kandy]] is an
 +
axis muiuti for the establishment of orderly power in this [[world]]
 +
while [[Bodh Gaya]] [[symbolizes]] the [[Buddhist]] quest for [[liberation]]
 +
beyond all [[forms]] of order. Unlike [[pilgrims]] to [[Kandy]], most
 +
[[pilgrims]] to [[Bodh Gaya]], at least until {{Wiki|modern}} times, have been
 +
[[bhikkhus]]. In the [[life of the Buddha]] and in the [[Bodhi Tree]] that
 +
[[symbolizes]] the [[Buddha's enlightenment]], [[bhikkhus]] envisaged
 +
the possibility of their [[own]] [[spiritual]] emancipations. In the Bud¬
 +
dha’s lile they find a personal model which inspires emulation.
 +
Here, the [[pilgrimage]] [[experience]] is one of commemorating the
 +
[[spiritual]] [[paradigm]] of the [[master]].  
  
flajuanaMil
+
But the {{Wiki|social}} “this-worldly" and personal “other-worldly”
 +
orientations represented by [[pilgrimage]] to [[Kandy]] on the one
  
[[Buddhist Studies]] Review 13, 1 (1996)
+
hand and [[pilgrimage]] to [[Bodh Gaya]] on the other do not exhaust
 +
all {{Wiki|dimensions}} of [[Sinhalese]] [[Buddhist]] [[spirituality]]. Neither the
 +
[[Buddha]] nor the power [[symbolized]] by his [[relics]] can come to the .
 +
direct aid of those [[faithful]] experiencing an immediate personal
 +
crisis. In times of [[physical]] [[affliction]] or [[mental]] [[anxiety]], many
 +
[[Buddhist]] laity undertake [[pilgrimages]] to the [[shrines]] of [[deities]]
 +
who, although occupying subordinate positions in [[relation]] to
 +
the [[Buddha]], within the [[Sinhalese]] hierarchical [[pantheon]], arc
 +
believed to have the power and disposition to respond to the
 +
fervent pleas of their [[faithful]]. In modern-day [[Sri Lanka]], in¬
 +
creasing numbers of [[Sinhalese]] [[Buddhists]] make [[pilgrimages]] to
 +
the [[shrine]] of [[Skanda]], the son of [[Siva]], also known as [[Murugan]],
 +
or more popularly, as [[Kataragama]]. Although [[Kataragama]] is
 +
the [[god]] par [[excellence]] of the [[Ceylon]] [[Tamils]] ol the Jallnn pen¬
 +
[[insula]], many [[Sinhalese]] [[Buddhists]] participate in Kataragama’s
 +
annual, peralidra {{Wiki|festival}}, which recalls the [[god’s]] [[mythic]] [[love]]
 +
affair with a Vedda maiden and his establishment of a [[shrine]]
 +
where he responds'to the needs of his {{Wiki|devotees}}. Here, [[religious experience]] and [[religious]] {{Wiki|behavior}} cannot be characterized in.
 +
terms of reverential “civitas” or commemoration of the Bud¬
 +
dha’S 1 paradigmatic [[spirituality]]. Ralhef, the {{Wiki|cult}} ol [[Kataragama]]
 +
involves an astonishing array of [[ascetic]] and exotic [[forms]] of
 +
[[ritual]] {{Wiki|behavior}}, all engaged in out of either intense [[emotional]]
 +
[[gratitude]] to [[Kataragama]] for [[healing]] various [[afflictions]], or as a
 +
means of persuading him to intervene on the devotee’s behalf.
 +
The cultic ambience at [[Kataragama]] is utterly [[bhakti]]. That is, it
 +
is decidedly [[emotional]] and devotional in tone and Ircquently
 +
culminates in states of intense [[ecstasy]]. :u Furthermore, {{Wiki|worship}}
 +
here is highly personal, {{Wiki|emphasizing}} the intimacy between the
 +
[[devotee]] and his [[god]].
  
inclusion of ihc [[elements]] of the [[Teaching]] as material for a [[lion’s roar]] is spurious.  
+
While [[Bodh Gaya]] represents the [[nibbanic]] orientation or
 +
model of [[spiritual]] quest ideally emulated by the Thcravada
 +
[[bhikkhu]], and while [[Kandy]] represents the public civil [[religion]]  
 +
legitimated by the presence of the tooth-relic and its {{Wiki|past}} associ¬
 +
ation with [[traditional]] power, [[Kataragama]] is a [[sacred place]]  
 +
where {{Wiki|individuals}} can appeal to [[perceived]] active [[divine power]]
 +
to intercede on their behalf. [[Kataragama]] is not a [[Buddha]] who
 +
has transcended saipsara, nor is he a [[protector]] ol the {{Wiki|nation}}¬
 +
[[state]]. He represents a [[form]] of [[sacral]] power that is immediately
 +
accessible to the common [[person]] in times of great personal
  
2. The [[monks]]' '[[lion's roar]]".
 
  
The [[debate]] [[suttas]], {{Wiki|reflecting}} the [[debate]] [[tradition]], show how
+
need. Ecstatic and petitionary devotionalism at [[Kataragama]] is
important the requirement was to assert and defend one's re¬
+
thus quite different from the [[spirituality]] of the [[bhikkhus]], ■
ligious [[knowledge]]. Two [[suttas]] suggest that it was so important
+
whose [[religious]] quests are based upon rigorous self-ellort or <
that the [[Buddha]] instructed his [[monks]] regarding which aspects of  
+
[[spiritual]] [[discipline]]. [[Kataragama]] represents “[[other-power]]
his [[Teaching]] they were rightly ( sammd ) allowed to proclaim in
+
[[manifest]] in “this-world.” Although the power of the tooth-relic
the [[form]] of a [[lion’s roar]], and also how to defend them* In the  
+
in [[Kandy]] might also be described in this way, its power was (and
Cujaslhanada [[Sutta]] 66 and in A II 238, § 239, the [[Buddha]] spe¬
+
is) [[traditionally]] appropriated for the general well-being of the
cifically permits the [[monks]] to make a certain claim in the [[form]]  
+
[[king]] and thus the {{Wiki|nation}}, while the power of the [[god]] Katara¬
of a [[lion’s roar]]:
+
[[gama]] is enlisted for the [[benefit]] of any {{Wiki|individual}} [[devotee]] who is
 +
willing to undertake austerities of [[self-mortification]] to express
 +
deep [[faith]].
  
(13) In this [[teaching]], [[monks]], the [[recluse]] is to be found, also the  
+
By comparing [[pilgrimage]] to Bodh {{Wiki|Gay}}& and [[Kataragama]]
second, third and fourth (class) of [[recluse]]. [[Void]] of such
+
with [[pilgrimage]] to [[Kandy]], we see beginning to emerge a struc¬
recluses are the systems of those who teach contrary [[views]].
+
ture reflective of [[Sinhalese]] [[Buddhist religion]] in general, a reli¬
Thus, [[monks]], do ye rightly roar the [[lion’s roar]].. .* 67 . *
+
gion replete with varying modalities of [[religious experience]]
 +
and [[religious]] expression. That is, none of the [[pilgrimages]] can
 +
be singled out as [[embodying]] a [[root]] {{Wiki|metaphor}} [[characteristic]] of
 +
the general [[spiritual]] quest of all [[Sinhalese]] [[Buddhists]]. Rather,  
 +
what this comparison suggests is that there are at least three
 +
major orientations within [[Sinhalese]] [[religion]]: 1) [[Bodh Gaya]], a
 +
[[pilgrimage]] site commemorating the [[enlightenment experience]]
 +
of the paradigmatic [[Gotama]], represents the [[spiritual]] orienta¬
 +
tion of the [[Theravada]] [[bhikkhu]] quest for nibb&na through- en-
 +
lightenmem; 2) [[Kataragama]], a [[pilgrimage]] site where-access to
 +
transformative “this-worldly" [[sacral]] power is sought, represents
 +
the orientation of the [[faithful]] [[lay devotee]] for whom the enlight¬
 +
enment quest of the [[bhikkhu]] is but a distant {{Wiki|future}} possibility;
 +
and 3) [[Kandy]], a [[pilgrimage]] site where [[religion]] legitimates a
 +
people’s [[religious]], {{Wiki|cultural}} and {{Wiki|political}} {{Wiki|past}} and {{Wiki|present}}
 +
through civil {{Wiki|ceremony}}, represents an orientation shared by
 +
[[bhikkhu]] and [[layman]] alike: a national quest to preserve and
 +
promote the [[religion]] of the [[Buddha]] and consequently to main¬
 +
tain [[prosperity]] and [[moral]] order in [[society]] as a whole.  
  
In M 11 he teaches them the argument for its defence.  
+
These three [[religious]] orientations, which are evident from
 +
this [[consideration]] of types of [[pilgrimage]] within [[Sinhalese]] reli¬
 +
gion, arc not, however, entirely unrelated. What all three pil¬
 +
grimages have in common is functional in [[nature]]: the need to
 +
cope with various [[manifestations]] of [[dukkha]] ([[suffering]], unsatis-
 +
factoriness), the basic problem of [[human existence]] as [[perceived]]
 +
from within the [[Buddhist]] {{Wiki|world view}}. 3 * Thus, [[Sinhalese]] rcli-
  
Although these two [[suttas]] have this [[assertion]] itveommon
+
gious [[beliefs]] and practices, as they can be ascertained through a
•hey differ completely with regard to content. The A [[sutta]] defines
+
study of [[pilgrimages]], represent complementary modes of re¬
the four samai.ias in its subsequent verses as the ‘Sbeam-Enterer’.
+
sponse to specific aspects of the [[human]] [[condition]]. While [[dukkha]]  
C [[sotapanna]] ), the ‘Oncc-Returner’ ( [[sakadagamin]] ), the ‘Non-
+
is specified in particular fashion by {{Wiki|individuals}} on the basis of
Returner’ ( [[opapatika]] , lit. ‘born by [[spontaneous generation]]’), and
+
their [[own]] personal [[experiences]], types of response are in part
‘one who, having destroyed the [[intoxicants]], [[lives]] in the [[attainment]]  
+
determined by [[religious]] role (lay or [[monastic]]). From this per¬
of having [[experienced]] for himself through his [[own]] higher know¬
+
spective, [[pilgrimage]] to [[Kandy]] is [[ritual]] participation in public
ledge in this very [[life]] the [[release]] of the [[mind]], the [[release]] through
+
{{Wiki|ceremonies}} [[traditionally]] designed to avert civil, {{Wiki|ethnic}}, or na¬
[[wisdom]] that is free from [[intoxicants]]’ 68 . The M [[sutta]], which may
+
tional {{Wiki|disintegration}}. That is, within the total field ol [[Sinhalese]]  
 +
[[religion]], {{Wiki|mass}} [[pilgrimage]] to [[Kandy]] represents continued affir¬
 +
mation of the sacralizing power of the [[Buddha]] to meet the
 +
collective material and social'needs of the [[people]]. The “emo¬
 +
tional response” 33 of thousands of peasants to the tooth-relic’s
 +
annual procession attests to its continuing [[perceived]] efficacy as
 +
[[sacral]] power. Or finally, to [[phrase]] this another way, [[pilgrimage]]  
 +
to [[Kandy]] is [[ari]] act of collective allegiance to the [[traditional]]  
 +
[[religious]] way of [[life]] upon which the indigenous order of {{Wiki|social}}
 +
and economic [[existence]] has been based.
  
  
66 M 11. Sec below, soeiion 3. for a [[discussion]] of suutas called [[sihanada]].
+
III. Cross-cultural Comparisons to the [[Kandyan]] [[Pilgrimage]]  
  
67 A 11 238. $ 238 = M 11, I 63; tr. Woodward. GS 11 242.  
+
In his recent [[book]] on [[pilgrimage]] and [[Christian]] {{Wiki|culture}}, Victor
 +
Turner has identified [[Kandy]] as a “prototypical" [[pilgrimage]]. By
 +
“prototypical," he means “those [[pilgrimages]] which, on the au¬
 +
thority of documentary or widespread [[traditional]] {{Wiki|evidence}},
 +
were established by the founder of a historical [[religion]], by his
 +
first [[disciples]], or by important national evangelists....’’ He
 +
continues: “Such [[pilgrimages]], though sometimes founded on
 +
[[ancient]] sites, dramatically manifest—in their [[symbolism]],
 +
charter [[Wikipedia:narrative|narratives]], {{Wiki|ecclesiastical}} {{Wiki|structure}}, and general interna¬
 +
tional repute—the {{Wiki|orthodoxy}} of the [[faith]] from which they have
 +
sprung, and remain consistent with [[root]] [[paradigms]].” He goes,  
 +
on to cite as examples [[Jerusalem]] and {{Wiki|Rome}} for [[Christianity]],
 +
Me£ca for {{Wiki|Islam}}, [[Benares]] and Ml. [[Kailas]] for [[Hinduism]] and
 +
[[Kandy]] for [[Buddhism]]. {{Wiki|Syncretic}} or arcliaic [[pilgrimages]], which
 +
constitute his second type, are {{Wiki|distinguished}} from “prototypi¬
 +
cal” [[pilgrimages]] in that they [[manifest]] “quite evident traces of
 +
[[syncretism]] with older [[religious]] [[beliefs]] and [[symbols]].” Finally,
 +
limiting the third and fourth types of [[pilgrimages]] to examples
  
68 The text omits pahrumvi/nutli/n which belongs in this [[formula]].  
+
taken only from the [[Christian]] [[tradition]], he distinguishes be--|8|
 +
tween “{{Wiki|medieval}}” [[pilgrimages]] “which take their tone from the.
 +
{{Wiki|theological}} and [[philosophical]] {{Wiki|emphasis}} of that epoch,” and 's|jj
 +
“{{Wiki|modern}}” [[pilgrimages]] which “are characterized by a highlyfjgK
 +
devotional tone and the fervent personal piety of their adher- ? ^J
 +
ents.” With further regard to {{Wiki|modern}} [[pilgrimages]], he stales 9
 +
that they “[[form]] an important part of the system df apologetics Jp|
 +
deployed against the advancing secularization of the post-Dar-SaS
 +
winian [[world]].”-' 1 -
  
 +
'the great strength of Turner’s interpretive model and htsiH
 +
typological {{Wiki|schema}} is that it attempts to ascertain the intimate'|B
 +
[[nature]] of relations which might [[exist]] between {{Wiki|metaphor}} andJra
 +
[[ritual]], [[belief]] and practice, or [[spiritual]] and {{Wiki|social}} [[experiences]].^^
 +
By appealing to [[Wikipedia:cognition|cognitive]] structures ([[myth]], [[beliefs]] and their)3g
 +
{{Wiki|metaphorical}} {{Wiki|expressions}}) on the one hand, and their idiomatici^
 +
[[ritual]] expression within historical and {{Wiki|social}} contexts on thecal
 +
other, Turner has advanced a {{Wiki|theoretical}} tour de force that is||j
 +
especially relevant to diachronic frames of-reference. r|j|
  
L - 1 '1 Manne-The [[Lion’s Roar]]  
+
Yet, it does not necessarily follow that his classification3p
 +
{{Wiki|schema}}, developed to interpret the significance of [[pilgrimage]]^
 +
in [[Christian]] {{Wiki|culture}}, is easily portable. .
  
be categorised as a {{Wiki|sermon}}, teaches the [[monks]] how to refute, in
+
In attempting to confirm Turncr*s*classification of Kandy,j8
[[debate]], practitioners who hold various contrary [[views]]?’. The
+
as a “prototypical" [[pilgrimage]], I have encountered a variety ofaB
points made in this [[sutta]] have no [[relation]] to the definitions with
+
problems. For instance, [[Kandy]] [[scents]] to meet all of the criteria'll
which it starts out and which it has in common with the A [[sutta]].
+
Turner cites as indicative of his last three types of [[pilgrimage]]: it9
The points on which others making the same claim may be re¬
+
is highly {{Wiki|syncretic}} (veneration of [[Hindu gods]] [[forms]] an impor-ii
futed are divided into two: one concerns aspects of the [[Teaching]],  
+
tant part of the [[ritual]] proceedings), it is late {{Wiki|medieval}} (havingJ|
the other concerns lines of attack against the position of the  
+
been established by Klrti Sri in the middle of the eighteenth]?
opponents. The first point is that the [[Buddhist monks]] make this
+
century), and, as Scncviratne argues, it is an indigenous cul^l
claim naving seen for themselves four things: that they have (i)
+
tural response to modernity. With reference to its being “{{Wiki|protons}}
[[confidence]] in their [[Teacher]] and (ii) in their [[Dhamma]], (iii) that
+
typical,” while it is true that [[Kandy]] is regarded, especially with-1
they fulfil the [[moral]] requirements ( [[sila]] ), and (iv) that they have
+
in [[Sri Lanka]], as a center of {{Wiki|orthodoxy}} (given the presence ofl
good relations with their fellow [[monks]] and their lay supporters.  
+
two prestigious [[monastic]] chapters), one wonders about lhe|
The second, a line of attack to be used in case the opponents
+
{{Wiki|orthodoxy}} of the [[root]] [[paradigm]]" to which it is “[[faithful]].” Whai|
should make exactly the same claims about their relationship with
+
[[ritual]] [[life]] at [[Kandy]] does depict is the intimate relationship estab-y
their leader and co-practitioners, comprises various challenges
+
lished in [[Sri Lanka]] between [[spiritual]] and {{Wiki|temporal}} power, or#
regarding the [[nature]] of their goal. After these first two para¬
+
between [[religion]] and {{Wiki|politics}} and the {{Wiki|structure}} of [[society]]. Pci-*§
graphs the [[sutta]] becomes a [[debate]] with potential opponents’®
+
haps this may be regarded as a “[[root]] [[paradigm]]” for a tradi||
against the [[views]] of becoming and {{Wiki|annihilation}} 71 , and the four
+
lional public {{Wiki|structure}}, but it does not really reflect a [[spiritual]]^
' kinds of [[grasping]] 0 [[upadana]] ) 7J . The [[Buddha]] sums up by saying
+
[[paradigm]] to be emulated personally by {{Wiki|individual}} [[Buddhist]]^
that the holders of [[wrong views]] cannot fulfil the first group of
 
[[conditions]] above, because they are wrongly [[taught]] by a [[teacher]]
 
who is not [[completely enlightened]]. The [[sutta]] contains various
 
[[expositions]] of the [[Teaching]] rather than instructions in refutation.
 
  
It is difficult to see how these points support the challenge,
 
the [[sihanada]], at the beginnng of this [[sutta]]. In fact the common
 
beginning and separate [[development]] of this pair of [[suttas]] suggests
 
  
 +
[[Bodh Gaya]] bn the other hand, does, and [[Kataragama]] and oth¬
 +
er [[shrines]] provide a complementary personal orientation for
 +
the laity. I do not mean to ignore the private orientation of
 +
[[pilgrimage]] to [[Kandy]]; but even when one takes into account
 +
that {{Wiki|individual}} [[pilgrims]] petition the power of the [[relic]] for their
 +
[[own]] personal [[reasons]], one is still left with the problem of recon¬
 +
ciling this kind of [[religious]] {{Wiki|behavior}} to the "[[root]] [[paradigm]]” of
 +
the [[Buddha's]] quest of [[enlightenment]] through self-effort.
 +
These considerations lead me to call into question the compari¬
 +
son of [[Kandy]] to other such “prototypiad” [[pilgrimages]].
  
. See Manne (1990); 23.  
+
[[Kandy]] is not a “[[Mecca]]” of the [[Buddhist]] [[world]]. While An-
 +
garika Dharmnpala once referred to [[Bodh Gaya]] as “the Bud¬
 +
dhist Jersusalem”* 5 during his fight to return [[Buddhist]] [[sacred places]] in [[India]] to [[Buddhist]] hands, nowhere docs one find re¬
 +
ferences within the [[tradition]] that make such grandiose claims
 +
about [[Kandy]]. More accurately, [[Kandy]] represents simulta¬
 +
neously a [[sacred]] palce of [[pilgrimage]] anil the traditional-center
 +
of [[Sinhalese]] highland ethnicity. [[Kandy]] is not a “center out
 +
'r there,” in the peripheral [[sense]] in which Turner coined the
 +
[[phrase]]. Rather, it has more in common with regional {{Wiki|cultural}}
 +
r ccntefS in [[India]] that are also accorded sacralily due the promi-
 +
[ nent presence of a [[ritual]] [[symbol]] that evokes recurrent send-
 +
I ments of religio-cthnic heritage and autonomy legitimated by
 +
I- [[sacral]] power. In considering comparable sacrcu places, [[Kandy]]
 +
| has more in common with the [[Sikh]] center of Amritsar in the
 +
'/ [[Punjab]] with its [[Golden Temple]], within which is housed the
 +
[[Guru]] Granlh Sahib, a [[symbol]] of [[God’s]] continuing providence.
 +
| Or again, [[Kandy]] is somewhat similar to Santa Fe, [[New Mexico]],
 +
s; and the associated [[symbol]] of Our Lacly of Conquest.™ In both
 +
f of these examples, [[ritual]] proceedings, cither in the [[form]] of
 +
jf annual processions or in {{Wiki|individual}} acts of [[devotion]] which take
 +
l place at specific [[shrines]] within the precincts of a [[sacred]] center,
 +
f celebrate the special {{Wiki|past}} relationship enjoyed between a [[people]]
 +
i and the [[divine]], however the [[divine]] is [[perceived]]. That is, [[sacred]]
  
70 See ibid; 23.  
+
( places like [[Kandy]] arc sustained in [[popularity]] because they af¬
 +
firm the unique religio-cultural [[Wikipedia:Identity (social science)|identity]] of a given [[people]].  
 +
Thus, the attnictive power of [[Kandy]] as a [[sacred place]] of pil-
 +
• grimage is due less to pan-Buddhist associations than to a par-
 +
. ticular people’s [[understanding]] of its special, historical [[relation]]-
 +
: ship to [[sacral]] power, which in the {{Wiki|past}} insured their continued
  
71 M I 64.
 
  
72 M I 66.
+
collective legitimated [[existence]] in the face of the ambiguities of
 +
[[life]], understood [[traditionally]] by them as [[dukkha]].

Revision as of 17:41, 30 November 2020

Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)

that in the M sutta the Buddha’s original defence of his position either never existed or has been lost. There is no evidence that a monk ever defended this aspect of the Teaching in a debate, but then the suttas are primarily about the Buddha and only oc¬ casionally about individual monks.

The right to utter a lion’s roar is not limited to the Tatha- gata, or to those situations where the Buddha permits his monks to proclaim certain subjects in this way. A monk may also utter a lions roar’ on his own initiative. In the Nikayas this monk is always Sariputta.

In an upsurge of faith, Sariputta proclaims to the Buddha,

that (I know) there has not been, will not be and is not found today any samana or brahmana who is better than the Exalted One, or has more higher knowledge with respect to the Highest Enlightenment’ 73 . The Buddha acknowledges Sariputta’s remark, “This speech you have uttered, Sariputta, is noble, bull-like. A lion’s roar, seized with certainty, is uttered’ 74 . Thus the Buddha himself categorises this utterance as a ‘lion’s roar’. The Buddha immediately challenges Sariputta on his capacity to make such a remark, forcing hint to admit that he has not known all past Buddhas, does not know all future Buddhas, and does not even know the present Buddha to the required extent to be able to

  • support his claim. Sariputta, however, is not daunted. He asserts

that he can support his claim, which he has made because he has


73 D ^S. Ill 99. Cf. D II 82f = S V 159. both of which only include (14) below. S V 159 includes the Buddha's final injunction (see below) that this text should regularly be recited to converts (monks, nuns and lay-followers).

74 D iii 95; tr. T.W. and C/VF. Rhys Davids, Dialogues of the Buddha (DB) 111 95


Manne — The Lion’s Koar

seen in accordance with Dhamma 75 , arguing through the use of a simile that he has seen what is important.

The content of Sariputta’s defence of his lion’s roar is a lengthy itemisation of what all the Buddhas, past, present and future, have achieved. The details, in as brief a form as possible, are:

(14) i. ‘That all Buddhas, "after they have abandoned the five hin¬ drances and after they have weakened corruptions of the mind by means of wisdom, being possessed (then) of hearts well established in the four exercises for setting up mindfulness and having thoroughly developed the seven constituents of knowledge, have wholly awakened (or will wholly awaken) to tne uttermost awakening" 76 .

ii. ‘That on one occasion when he came to the Buddha to hear Dhamma, the Buddha taught it in such a way that Sariputta attained perfection in one particular dhamma,

namely, faith in the Teacher 77 .

iii. ‘That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to the skilful dhammas is unsurpassable by any samana or brahmana, these skilful dhammas being the Four Foundations of Mindfulness, the Four Right Exertions, the Four Bases of Psychic Power, the Five Controlling Principles, the Five Powers, the Seven Constituents of Knowledge, and the Noble Eightfold Path. In this connection, a bhikkhu, having destroyed the intoxicants, lives in the attainment of having experienced for himself through his own higher Knowledge in this very life the release of the mind, the


75 dhammanvayo vidiio. D III 100.

Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


Manne — The Lion’s Roar


release through wisdom that is free from intoxicants 78 .

iv. 'That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to the description of the sphere of perception 79 is unsurpassable.

v. ‘That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to conception 80 (gestation and birth) is unsurpassable. (The text here shows that conception, gestation and the quality of the birth of the foetus arc meant.)

vi. ‘That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to the ability of mind-reading 81 is unsurpassable.

vii. That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to the attainment of seeing 82 is unsurpassable. (The text here describes four le¬ vels of attainment with regard to meditation on the body.)

viii. ‘That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to the typology of people 82 is unsurpassable. (The text here describes seven characteristic ways of attaining release, vimutti).

ix. ‘That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to the (qualities of) concentration of the mind 84 is unsurpassable. (The text here describes the seven constituents of knowledge, satta bojjhanga).

x. ‘That the Buddha’s teaching with’regard to modes of progress 82 is unsurpassable.

xi. ‘That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to conduct in conversation 86 is unsurpassable.

xii. That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to the ethical conduct of man 87 is unsurpassable.

xiii. - That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to the .variety (of

the results) of instruction 88 is unsurpassable. (The text here describes the Buddha’s knowledge with regard to the stage an individual will reach on receiving a particular (form of) instruction.)

xiv. That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to knowledge concerning the tstage of) release of other people 89 is unsurpassable.

xv. That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to eternalism 90 is unsurpassable

xvi. That the.Buddha’s teaching with regard to the knowledge

that enables {he remembrance of former life-times’* is unsurpassable

xvii. That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to the knowledge

regarding the decease and rebirth of beings 92 is unsur¬ passable

xviii. That the Buddha’s teaching with regard to varieties of supernormal power 93 (i.e. the noble and the ignoble) is unsurpassable.

xix. That with regard to the varieties of supernormal power 94


78 Ibid.

79 cyatana-pa/'inaui. D HI 102.

80 gabbavakkanti. ibid.

81 udesana vidha. L) 111 103.

82 Jassana-samapalli. D III 104.

83 puggala-pahhalti. D III 105.

84 padhana. D III *106.

85 patipadu. ibid.


86 bhassa-samacara. ibid,

87 purisa-sila-samacara, ibid.

88 anusasana-vidha. D 111 107.

89 para-pug gal ;a-vunutti-hdna. D 111 108.

90 sassaia-vddesu. ibid.

91 , pubbe-nivasanussati-nanp. D HI 110.

92 ; sattanam cutupapala-hdna. D 111 111.

93 iddhi-vidha. D III 112.

94 iddhi-vidha. D III 1!3.


Manne — The Lion's Roar

Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)

ihe Buddha is unsurpassable. There is nothing hie does not know”, and no other samana or brahmana knows it better, xx. That the Buddha has achieved whatever can be achieved by a faithful clansman who is steadfast and has aroused . his energies, by a man’s capacity to hear burdens, (his) ' endeavour, energy and steadfastness’ 96 — The text here specifies that the Buddha is not attached to what is low nor to asceticism, and that he can attain the four jhanas at will.

Sariputta concludes his argument by saying that he has, heard from the Buddha himself that there have been equal Buddhas in former times and that there will again be Buddhas equal to him¬ self, but that is is impossible for two equal Buddhas to exist at the same time.

The qualities attributed to the Buddha as Dliagava in Sari- putta’s lion’s roar bear remarkably little resemblance to the points claimed by the Buddha, in the name of Tathagata, to be his powers and confidences. Only in points (xiv), (xvi) and (xvii) of quote (14) is there any correspondance and this is with the list of quote (8) above, regarding points (vii), (viii) and (ix) respectively.

I have argued 97 that the collection of suttas now known as Dlgha Nikaya was originally a collection of suttas grouped together through their effectiveness in gaining converts and lay support (and that for that reason it is entertaining). The ending of this sutta shows clearly its propaganda purposes. After Sariputta has finished, a monk, Udayin, remarks that the Tathagata will not proclaim himself, although any other ascetic who had even one of those qualities would boast about it. The Buddha, also speaking


95 asesatn abhijiiniili. ibid.

96 Ibid.

97 Mar.nc (1990): 4.


about himself as Tathagata, agrees with this rather emphatically, and then instructs Sariputta to give this discourse frequently to those among the followers, monks, nuns, lay-men and -women, who feel doubt and hesitation concerning the Tathagata 98 . In this way the Buddha specifically approved this as a list of his qualities which may be taught to followers. I think it is significant that he imposes this limit, i.e. that he docs not acknowledge this as a list which is to be defended before a general public 99 .

There is another occasion when Sariputta roars his lion’s roar 100 , Here a monk goes to the Buddha and accuses Sariputta of an offence. The Buddha sends for Sariputta. Ananda and Maha Moggalana immediately call all the monks, telling them to come because ‘Sariputta is about to roar his lion’s roar in the presence of the Buddha’ 101 . Clearly they expect a theatrical occasion. Sariputta defends himself against the accusation. He agrees that someone who is not mindful of the body’s action 107 might have done such a thing, but as for himself, ‘his heart is like the earth, abundant, .extensive, boundless, without hatred, doing no harm’ 101 and, moreover, he is ‘filled with horror, loathing and disgust at his foul body 106 , and he carries it around like a dripping bowl of fat 105 . The accusing monk immediately begs Sariputta’s pardon. The Buddha reprimands him, and then says to Sariputta, ‘Forgive this IV 377; U. Woodward, GS IV 251.

Duddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


foolish man, before his head splits into seven pieces’ 106 .

A further lion’s roar is attributed to Sariputta in the Sarp- yutta Nikaya 107 . Here a monk reports to the Buddha.that Sari¬ putta has claimed arahantship. The Buddha summons Sariputta and challenges him. Sariputta is able to answer all the Buddha’s questions satisfactorily and the Buddha leaves the scene. Sariputta then proclaims to the bhikkhu that, although it took him a while to find his answer to the Buddha’s first challenge, once he had found his wits, he could have gone on answering for several nigh:s loS . Tins proclamation is reported to the Buddha by one of the monks, Kajarakkhartiya, who as his name" shows is a noble ( khaitiya ), and who may therefore have had some knowledge of debate conventions. It is this monk who gives the utterance the designation ‘Sariputta’s lion’s roar’ 109 although the expression ‘lion’s roar’ itself docs not appear in Sariputta’s utterance. The Buddha supports Sariputta’r claim, using the same terms as Sariputta did in his proclamation: ‘If I were to question Sariputta on this matter differently, with different words (or) differently according to a different method, Sariputta would explain this matter to me, differently, with different words (or) differently according to a different method’ 110 . . .

This so-called ‘lion’s roar' is qualitively different from Sari- •


106 U.ama Siiripulla imassa inoghapurisassa. purassa tatth' eva sattadhd muddhd phulissali'ti. A IV 378. Sec Witte), op. tit* regarding this threat. The threat ib surprising here as the accusing monk was neither questioning nor being questioned by Sariputta although he may be taken to have challenged him, albeit behind his back.

107 S II 50-5.

108 S II 54.

109 S Ji 55. 5 46.

no s i: so.

Manne — The Lion’s Roar

putta’s previous one in .several important ways. In the. first place it is not a proclamation of the Buddha’s qualities: it is Siiriputta’s demonstration of his own understanding of the Teaching. Second¬ ly, and most importantly, this utterance is not termed a ‘lion’s roar’ by the Buddha, but only by a monk. The monk uses this terminology in his report to the Buddha and the latter uses different terminology in his answer. On the previous occasion it was the Buddha who gave the namelion’s roar’ to Sariputta’s utterance. Here the text specifically attributes different termino¬ logy to him. In this literature prone to repetition, the absence of repetition where it could be expected must be regarded as significant. Instead of the repetition, the Buddha describes Sarifiutta as someone* who has ‘well-mastered the sphere of religion’ 111 .

Sariputta is attributed with three different types of lions’ roar. Two of these can be regarded as genuine, the criterion for genuineness being that the texts have the Buddha himself so designate the utterance. These are (i) when the ‘lion’s roar* took place in debate circumstances in praise of the Buddha (D 28X and ' (ii) when the ‘lion’s roar’ took place in defence of, and asserting the quality of his own mental state (A IV 238). The third, Le. the final example in this section cannot be accepted as a true ‘lion’s roar’ as, according to the text, the Buddha did not give it this title. In none of these is the location a public assembly, but rather these are private lion’s roars made only before the Sangha of monks.

There js one occasion in each of the Thera- and Theri-gatha when a monk utters his ‘lion’s roar’,


Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


(15) 175. 'Come, Nandaka, let us go into the presence of the

preceptor. We shall roar the lion’s roar face to face with the best of the Buddhas.

176. We have now attained that goal for which, with compassion for us, the sage made us go forth — the annihilation of all fetters’ 112 . •

(16) 331. *... The Buddha’s teaching has been done.

332. Allow me, noble lady, 1 wish to go to Savatthi: I shall roar a lion’s roar in the presence of the excellent Buddha’" 1 .

The reason for these ‘lion’s roars’, as the texts she./, is that the disciple has attained the final goal and wishes to announce this to, and perhaps have it confirmed by, the Buddha. This may be evidence of a custom or a tendency to proclaim this degree of personal attainment publicly in the presence of the Buddha. As, however, only two examples arc attested, one in Theragatha, one in Thcrigatha, it is impossible to be certain of this. These instances could be also be cases of poetic licence

A monk might also be described as a ‘lion’s roarer’. In a list that gives the highest qualities of various monks, the monk Plndola Bharadvaja is called chief of the disciples who are lion’s roarers' u . There is no sutta passage which tells us what he roared" 5 .

Whereas the Buddha’slion’s roar is a public event governed by what we may imagine were the debate rules of the time, the monk's lion’s roars, insofar as we can tell from the small number


112 Tr. K.R. Norman. Elders Verses (EV) \X

113 Tr. Norman; F.V U.34.

114 A l 23.

115 C.P. Malalusekcra. Dictionary of Pali Proper Names t x.v. Pindola-Bharadvaja.

Manne — The Lion’s Roar

that remain to us in this literature, were private events, assertions in front of the Teacher and the Sangha and not open to public challenge.

3. Suttas with sihanada in their titles.

There are three suttas with sihanada in their title, i.e. sihanada suttas, in D; Kassapa-sihaniida Sutta (No.8), Udum- barika-sihanada Sutta (No.25), and Cakkavatti-sihanada Sutta (No.26); two in M: Cuja-slhanada Sutta (No.ll) and Maha-sihanida Sutta (No.12), which gives this name to the vagga" 6 , and a Siha¬ nada Vagga in A IV 373-96.

The M sihanada suttas arc both suttas with debate elements. The Cula-sihanada Sutta is a sermon in which the Buddha teaches his monks debate techniques; in the Mahi-slhanada Sutta he re¬ futes a challenge Sunakkhatta is reported to have made against him. The D'sihunida suttas are more diverse. Two concern challenges-^ - .n the Kassapa-sihaniida Sutta, Kassapa challenges the Buddha on the theme of asceticism, and the Buddha refutes this challenge, while the Udumbarikarslhanada Sutta concerns a challenge made against the Buddha by Nigrodha in Queen Udumbarika’s Park. It is, however, hard to see what the common element is in the shared name regarding the third, the Cakka¬ vatti-sihanada Sutta, which is a tale about good rulership. The Sihanada Vagga of the A gets its name'from its first sutta, which is the lion’s roar by Sariputta in which he proclaims his own attainments.

In their diversity the relationship between the names of slhan&da suttas and their content reflects that ol the contents of the various sihunadas. Both challenges and proclamations of


116 See l.B. Horner. Middle Length Sayings (MLS) 1 xiv.

Mannc — The Lion’s Roar

own understanding of his Teaching, telling what one had seen,

Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)

attainments arc found. Probably the Cakkavatti-slhanada Sutta should be regarded as falling into the latter category. It is the proclamation of the attainments and qualities of the best ruler.

4. The ‘lion's roar' and ihe debate tradition

In the Pali Nikayas the. term sihanada — ‘the lion’s roar’ — is used for various types of expressions. When the Tathagata’s lion’s roar is referred to we are close to the Vedic religious speech contest or Debate which Witzel has described in his article. When the 'lion’s roar’ is attributed to a disciple, we find that it is his own claim to attainments. Both the Tathagata’slion’s roar’ and that of a disciple are utterances which the speaker is willing to defend in public, the former in front of a large public of the world, the latter in front of the smaller public of the monks. It seems then that the Buddhists have adapted the Vedic tradition of challenges in debate to their own purposes, using their own terminology — sihandda — and generalising it to include a monk’s public assertion of his achievements. Suttas wit^ sihanada in their title generally confirm this usage. As we*do not usually know how and when a sutta got its title, only limited weight can be attached to this last point %

5. Conclusions.

I said in the introduction that a study of the notion of the ‘lion’s roar’ showed the inventive and creative way the reciters conveyed the Buddha’s message, relating its content to the cus¬ toms and traditions of their society. In fact it provides a variety of examples of their way of going about their task.

First a word about the reciters.

Recounting those aspects of daily life one had shared with the Buddha to one’s fellow practitioners, passing on to them the content of the discourses one had heard — that is to say, one’s

certainly began as early as Buddhism itself did. The first converts and earliest monks would obviously talk to each other about the Buddha and the Teaching, and keep each other informed about what had happened during, for example, an absence due to an almsround or a meditation retreat. What had happened would include what had been taught, who the Buddha had talked to in particular, who came to see him, what advice he gave, and so forth. As the community grew and spread this was essentially its way to keep in touch and up to date. Some people love to re¬ count, to narrate stories, to share their experiences, to tell. Probably those who tpld about the Buddha and the Teaching especially well were invited to do so again and again and became known as good reciters. Telling skilfully requires invention and the texts are indeed full of literary inventions created by very skilful raconteurs.

The early reciters told about true events, events in which they had participated as observers and witnesses. Although we cannot know whether the accounts of the debates in D contain any actual words that the Buddha spoke, the style of debating they attribute to him is consistent and differentiated from that attributed to other debaters, and they are true to the Vedic debate tradition 157 . The early reciters also passed on the experiences of others that had been told to them. In telling a tale there are always modifications depending on the character and interests of the teller.

The early reciters created similes. A simile that compares the Buddha to a lion is hardly surprising. The comparison between a

117 See Manne (1990) and (1992).

Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (19 96)


(15) 175. 'Come, Nandaka, let us go into the presence of the

preceptor. We shall roar the lion’s roar face to face with the best of the Buddhas.

176. We have now attained that goal for which, with compassion for us, the sage made us go forth — the annihilation of all fetters’ 11J . •

(16) 331. '... The Buddha’s teaching has been done.

332. Allow me, noble lady; 1 wish to go to Savatthi: I shall roar a lion’s roar in the presence of the excellent Buddha’ 113 .

The reason for these ‘lion’s roars’, as the texts she./, is that the disciple has attained the final goal and wishes to announce this to, and perhaps have it confirmed by, the Buddha. This may be evidence of a custom or a tendency to proclaim this degree of personal attainment publicly in the presence of the Buddha. As, however, only two examples arc attested, one in Theragatha, one in Thcrigatha, it is impossible to be certain of this. These instances could be also be cases of poetic licence

A monk might also be described as a ‘lion’s roarer’. In a list that gives the highest qualities of various monks, the monk Plndola Bharadvftja is called chief of the disciples who are lion’s roarers 114 . There is no sutta passage which tells us what he roared 113 .

Whereas the Buddha’slion’s roar is a public event governed by what we may imagine were the debate rules of the time, the monk's lion’s roars, insofar as we can tell from the small number


112 Tr. K.R. Norman. Elders Verses (EV) 1 2.

113 Tr. Norman; EV 11,34.

114 A 1 23.

115 C.P. Malalasckcra, Dictionary of Pali Proper Names , x.v. Pindola-Dharadvaja.

Manne — The Lion’s Roar

that remain to us in this literature, were private events, assertions in front of the Teacher and the Sangha and not open to public challenge.

3. Suttas with sihanada in their titles.

There are three suttas with sihanada in their title, i.e. sihanada suttas, in D; Kassapa-slhanada Sutta (No.8), Udum* barika-slhanada Sutta (No.25), and Cakkavatti-sihanada Sutta (No.26); two in M: Cuta-sihanada Sutta (Noll) and Maha-slhan5da Sutta (No.12), which gives this name to the vagga 116 , and a Siha¬ nada Vagga in A IV 373-96.

The M sihanada suttas are both suttas with debate elements. The Cuja-sihanada Sutta is a sermon in which the Buddha teaches his monks debate techniques; in the Maha-slhanada Sutta he re¬ futes a challenge Sunakkhatta is reported to have made against him. The D'sihan&da suttas arc more diverse. Two concern challenges:"in the Kassapa-slhanada Sutta, Kassapa challenges the Buddha on the theme of asceticism, and the Buddha refutes this challenge, while the Udumbariktl-sihanada Sutta concerns a challenge made against the Buddha by Nigrodha in Queen Udumbarikii’s Park. It is, however, hard to see what the common element is in the shared name regarding the third, the Cakka¬ vatti-sihanada Sutta, which is a tale about good rulership. The Sihanida Vagga of the A gets its name'from its first sutta, which is the lion’s roar by Sariputta in which he proclaims his own attainments.

In their diversity the relationship between the names of sihanada suttas and their content reflects that of the contents of the various sihanadas. Both challenges and proclamations of


116 See l.B. Horner, Middle Length Sayings (MLS) l xiv.

Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


attainments arc found. Probably the Cakkavatti-sJhanada Sutta should be regarded as falling into the latter category. It is the proclamation of the attainments and qualities of the best ruler.

4. The ‘lion's roar' and the debate tradition

In the Pali Nikayas the term sihanada — ‘the lion’s roar’ — is used for various types of expressions. When the Tathagata’s lion’s roar is referred to we are close to the Vedic religious speech contest or Debate which Witzel has described in his article. When the ‘lion’s roar’ is attributed to a disciple, we find that it is his own claim to attainments. Both the Tathagata’slion’s roar’ and that of a disciple are utterances which the speaker is willing to defend in public, the former in front of a large public of the world, the latter in front of the smaller public of the monks. It seems then that the Buddhists have adapted the Vedic tradition of challenges in debate to their own purposes, using their own terminologysihanada — and generalising it to include a monk’s public assertion of his achievements. Suttas witjt sihanada in their title generally confirm this usage. As we*do not usually know how and when a sutta got its title, only limited weight can be attached to this last point.

5. Conclusions.

I said in the introduction that a study of the notion of the ‘lion’s roar’ showed the inventive and creative way the reciters conveyed the Buddha’s message, relating its content to the cus¬ toms and traditions of their society. In fact it provides a variety of examples of their way of going about their task.

First a word about the reciters.

Recounting those aspects of daily life one had shared with the Buddha to one’s fellow practitioners, passing on to them the content of the discourses one had heard — that is to say, one’s

The Lion’s Roar


own understanding of his Teaching, telling what one had seen, heard and experienced while one was with the Teacher, all that certainly began as early as Buddhism itself did. The first converts and earliest monks would obviously talk to each other about the Buddha and the Teaching, and keep each other informed about what had happened during, for example, an absence due to an almsround or a meditation retreat. What had happened would include what had been taught, who the Buddha had talked to in particular, who came to see him, what advice he gave, and so forth. As the community grew and spread this was essentially its way to keep in touch and up to date. Some people love to re¬ count, to narrate stories, to share their experiences, to tell. Probably those who tpld about the Buddha and the Teaching especially well were invited to do so again and again and became

known as good reciters. Telling skilfully requires invention and

the texts are indeed full of literary inventions created by very skilful raconteurs.

The early reciters told about true events, events in which they had participated as observers and witnesses. Although we cannot know whether the accounts of the debates in D contain any actual words that the Buddha spoke, the style of debating they attribute to him is consistent and differentiated from that attributed to other debaters, and they are true to the Vedic debate tradition 117 . The early reciters also passed on the experiences of others that had been told to them. In telling a tale there are always modifications depending on the character and interests of the teller.

The early reciters created similes. A simile that compares the Buddha to a lion is hardly surprising. The comparison between a


117 See Manne (1990) and (1992),


Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


great man and a lion exists in other Indian texts" 8 . It exists too in our language" 9 , and doubtless in many other languages which have inherited the idea that the lion is the king of the beasts. Lions roar, so the Buddha roars too. The early reciters attributed the epithetlion’ to the Buddha, expanded the comparison to describe the likenesses and included the detail of \he (lion’s) ‘roar’. The evidence (to be considered in detail below) suggests that it was the existence of this simile which inspired the reciters to attribute a content to, or to invent a content for the Buddha’s lion’s roar.

Having set the scene, so to speak, with regard to the early reciters, we can now show how our investigation of the texts about the lion’s roar supports these ideas.

First of all there is the invention of situating the Buddha’s lion’s roar within a tradition of debate. The term ‘lion’s roar’ is not connected with the Vedic debate tradition. It occurs neither in the Upanisads nor in the Brahmanas. As the Buddhist texts can be so faithful and so accurate in their representation of the Vedic tradition 120 , we can conclude from this that the term ‘lion’s roar’ for a challenge is an invention of the Buddhist reciters. We can further conclude that it was part, of this invention fictitiously to situate the lion’s roar challenge within the debate tradition. Some details placed within the Buddha’s lion’s roar probably authen¬ tically belong to the Vedic debate tradition: the Buddha’s re¬ futation of a potential challenge to his capacities as a debater may be among these 121 , though 1 specify that I mean that these


118 Sec Monier-WiUiams, s.v. si/nfui for many examples.

119 We have ihc expressions ‘a lion among men, ‘the strength of a lion', etc.

120 See Witxel. op. citz Manne (1990). (1992).

121 Formula (4). Sec also Manne (1992).

Manne — The Lion’s Roar


represent the demands of the tradition on a debater and not that the Buddha himself uttered these very phrases. There is no way we can establish as a fact which phrases the Buddha ever uttered. Other details have to be accounted for differently.

I have argued that the early reciters spontaneously created similes, and with them, in this example of the lion’s roar, frameworks within which they could present their accounts. With regard to the aspects of the Teaching that come within the ‘lion’s roar’ and the powers and confidences of the Tathiigata, l think that here we see redactors usihg such a framework inventively. The framework is that of the simile that compares the Buddha to a lion and attributes content to his roar. The existence of this framework, and the illogicality (why these particular aspects?) of the examples that remain to us of the Teachings placed within it, suggest the likelihood that many other aspects of the Teaching were also placed within it but those cited here aje the only ones that have' come down to us in these texts. With regard to the qualities of the Tathagata that are placed within this framework, these are not particularly coherent, those in quote (8) comprising adaptations of other formulas, especially that of paras. 40-94 of the Samannaphala Sutta, those in quote (11) perhaps based upon a challenge that was once made against the Buddha and of which no record remains in these texts.

Having invented the attribution of a lions roar to the Buddha, the redactors generalised this invention to include trunks as well. With regard to the monk’s lion’s roars, the permission to the monks to make a ‘lion’s roar’ about the four types of samairu is an example of textual muddle 122 . Probably Sariputta’s great irn-


122 See Manne (1990): 4.1


Buddhist Studies Review 13, .1 (1996)


poriance attracted to him a ho the attribution of various lion’s roars. One of Sari putta’s lion’s roars is a piece of pure propaganda, while the other two form part of dramatic stories' The anomaly between these lion’s roars, two being designated as such by the Buddha while the third docs nut possess such purported authori¬ sation may reflect the different tendencies on the part of the reciters regarding what they would or would not put into a lion’s roar. The examples in the Thera- and Therl-gatha are clearly poetry, as is the attribution of the epithet ‘lion’s roarer’ to a monk.

A simile is invented, a lion’s roar is created for the Buddha, and then for the monks. The next step is to impose this invention on suuus (the inclusion of the term slhan&da in their titles may reflect late ideas in which suttas were particularly important). Thus is tradition created!


ABHIDHAMMA STUDIES

At the British Buddhist Association, London, we shall, be reading again from September Dhammasahgani, Vibhanga, Patthana and Commentaries in English translation. We welcome those wishing to study along with us. They should contact:

A Haviland-Nye 11 Biddulph Road London W9 1JA Tel/Fax: 0171 286 5575.

DEATH AS MEDITATION SUBJECT IN THE THERAVADA TRADITION


In 1986, headlines such as ‘U.S. Buddhist monk meditates on decaying corpses’ 1 and ‘Corpses remind me of nature of Samsara’ 1 were on the front page of Sinhalese newspapers. The articles were describing the peculiar meditation practice of an American monk named Alokadhamma. I’hree years after his ordination, Bhikkhu Alokadhamma had become famous throughout the island of Sri Lanka because he resided in a cave in the company of two decomposing bodies placed in a glass cage, with four other bodies laid outside. These reports became the impetus for the attempt to answer the question that this paper is revolving around: what is the place and the role of the meditation on death within the contemporary Theravada Buddhist tradition?

Alokadhamma’s practice was most probably derived from the Satipatthana Sutta, where the Buddha describes the nine types of charnel-ground meditation. In order to clarify this unusual prac¬ tice, however, the position as put forth in Theravada literature first needs to be investigated. This will clarify the boundaries of the two major meditation practices centred on death, it. asubha- bhavaiia and maranasati. Secondly, in an attempt to conceptualise the contemporary practice, 1 will allude to eleven qualitative interviews that I conducted with Buddhist monks and with a dasa sil matavo in Sri Lanka during May 1993; it is important to em-


' 1 Dharmasiri Gamage, VS. Buddhist monks meditates on decaying corpses*. The

Sunday Observer , Colombo, 2 November 1986.

2 Id., ‘Corpses remind me of nature of Samsara’, op. cit „ 9 November 1986.

Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


Manue — The Lion’s Roar


grcai man and a lion exists in other Indian texts 118 . It exists too in our language 119 , and doubtless in many other languages which have inherited the idea that the lion is the king of the beasts. Lions roar, so the Buddha roars too. The early reciters attributed the epithetlion’ to the Buddha, expanded the comparison to describe the likenesses and included the detail of \he (lion’s) ‘roar’. ' The evidence (to be considered in detail below) suggests that it was the existence of this simile which inspired the reciters to attribute a content to, or to invent a content for the Buddha’s lion’s roar.

Having set the scene, so to speak, with regard to the early . reciters, we can now show how our investigation of the texts about the lion’s roar supports these ideas.

First of all there is the invention of situating the Buddha’s lion’s roar within a tradition of debate. The term ‘lion’s roar’ is not connected with the Vedic debate tradition. It occurs neither in the Upanisads nor in the Brahmanas. As the Buddhist texts can be so faithful and so accurate in their representation of the Vedic tradition 120 , we can conclude from this that the term ‘lion’s roar’ for a challenge is an invention of the Buddhist reciters. We can further conclude that it was part, of this invention fictitiously to situate the lion’s roar challenge within the debate tradition. Some details placed within the Buddha’s lion’s roar probably authen¬ tically belong to the Vedic debate tradition: the Buddha’s re¬ futation of a potential challenge to his capacities as a debater may be among these 121 , though 1 specify that I mean that these


118 See Monicr-Williams. s.v, sirnhu for many examples.

119 We have ihc expressions ‘a lion among men, ‘the strength of a lion’, etc.

120 See Witzcl, op. ci/; Manne (1990). (1992).

121 Formula (4). See also Manne (1992).


represent the demands of the tradition on a debater and not that the Buddha himself uttered these very phrases. There is no way we can establish as a fact which phrases the Buddha ever uttered. Other details have to be accounted for differently.

I have argued that the early reciters spontaneously created similes, and with them, in this example of the lion’s roar, frameworks within which they could present their accounts. With regard to the aspects of the Teaching that come within the lions roar’ and the powers and confidences of the Tathagata, 1 think that here we see redactors usihg such a framework inventively. The framework is that of the simile that compares the Buddha to a lion and attributes content to his roar. The existence of this framework, and the illogicality (why these particular aspects?) of the examples that remain to us of the Teachings placed within it, suggest the likelihood that many other aspects of the Teaching were also placed within it but those cited here are the only ones that have' come down to us in these texts. With regard to the qualities of the Tathagata that are placed within this framework, these are not particularly coherent, those in quote (8) comprising adaptations of other formulas, especially that of paras. 40-94 of the Samaiinaphala Sutta, those in quote (11) perhaps based upon a challenge that was once made against the Buddha and of which no record remains in these texts.

Having invented the attribution of a lion’s roar to the Buddha, the redactors generalised this invention to include ironks as well. With regard to the monk’s lion’s roars, the permission to the monks to make a ‘lion’s roar’ about the four types of sarnana is an example of textual muddle 122 . Probably Sariputta’s great inv


122 See Manne (1990>. 4.1

Buddhist Studies Review 13, .1 (1996)


portancc attracted to him al'o the attribution of various lion’s roars. One of oariputta’s lion's roars is a piece of pure propaganda, while the other two form part of dramatic stories. The anomaly between these lion’s roars, two being designated as such by the Buddha while the third docs not possess such purported authori¬ sation may reflect the different tendencies on the part of the reciters regarding what they would or would not put into a lion’s roar. The examples in the Thera- and Therl-gatha are clearly poetry, as is the attribution of the epithet ‘lion’s roarer’ to a monk.

A simile is invented, a lion’s roar is created for the Buddha, and then for the monks. The next step is to impose this invention on suttas (the inclusion of the term slliandda in their titles may reflect late ideas in which suttas were particularly important). Thus is tradition created!


ABHIDHAMMA STUDIES

At the British Buddhist Association, London, we shall..be reading again from September DhammasaAgani, Vibhanga, Patthana and Commentaries in English translation. We welcome those wishing to study along with us. They should contact:

A Haviland-Nye 11 Biddulph Road London W9 1JA Tel/Fax: 0171 286 5575.

DEATH AS MEDITATION SUBJECT IN THE THERAVADA TRADITION


In 1986, headlines such as ‘U.S. Buddhist monk meditates on decaying corpses’ 1 and ‘Corpses remind me of nature of Samsara’ 1 were on the front page of Sinhalese newspapers. The articles were describing the peculiar meditation practice of an American monk named Alokadhamma. three years after his ordination, Bhikkhu Alokadhamma had become famous throughout the island of Sri Lanka because he resided in a cave in the company of two decomposing bodies placed in a glass cage, with four other bodies laid outside. These reports became the impetus for the attempt to answer the question that this paper is revolving around: what is the place and the role of the meditation on death within the contemporary Theravada Buddhist tradition?

Alokadhamma’s practice was most probably derived from the Satipatfhana Sutta, where the Buddha describes the nine types of charnel-ground meditation. In order to clarify this unusual prac¬ tice, however, the position as put forth in Theravada literature first needs to be investigated. This will clarify the boundaries-of the two major meditation practices centred on death, i a. asubha- bhavana and rnaranasati. Secondly, in an attempt to conceptualise the contemporary practice, 1 will allude to eleven qualitative interviews that I conducted with Buddhist monks and with a dasa sil matavo in Sri Lanka during May 1993; it is important to em-


Sunday Observer , Colombo. 2 November 1986.

2 Id^ ‘Corpses remind me of nature of Samsara’, op, cil^ 9 November 1986.

phasise that all the interviewees belonged to hermitages (arah- haka) where meditation is given priority. The two-fold procedure of textual and contemporary analyses will allow us further to understand the theoretical and modern expressions of these practices.

Bhikkhu Alokadhamma’s meditation on death seems to stem from the description of the nine charnel-ground meditations men¬ tioned in the Satipatthana Sutta. This discourse, traditionally considered the theoretical base for meditation practice, is divided into four main sections: meditation on the body ( kayanupassana ,), on the sensations ( vedananupassana ), on the mind {cittanu pas Sa¬ na) and on the mental contents ( dhammanupassana ). The section concerned with the body is often regarded as the most eclectic of the four since it adumbrates different types of meditation. It discusses successively l) anapanasati, mindfulness of the breath, 2) mindfulness of the four postures (walking, standing, sitting and lying down), 3) mindfulness of whatever activities one is involved in, 4) mindfulness of the repulsivcness by reviewing the thirty-one 3


3 These 31 pans of the body, along with the brain, are the 32 subjects of meditation (katnmauhdna) that Buddhughosa includes in kayagatasati. ( ,..dvat • limsakamkammauhanam: — idam idha kayagaia sail ti adhippetam. Vism 240). We must point to the fact, however, that kayagaiasati is not restricted to those 32 parts of the body in the Suita literature, for it includes all the practices des¬ cribed in the kayanupassana of the Satipatthana Sutta (see Kayagaiasati Sutta, M 111 89). We must also remark that although this portion of the Satipatthana is commonly known as the meditation on asubha (the ‘not-beautiful’), the term asubha is neither employed within the Satipatthana Sutta itself nor in commen- tarial literature referring to this passage; in the Sumangalavilasini, Buddhaghosa uses the term patikula (or patikkula ), meaning 'disgust*. Yet. the two practices seem to be analogous, for the Girimananda Sutta (A V 108) defines asubha - sahha as the awareness of these 31 parts of the body. Although a slight nuance may be introduced between asubha and asubhasahha we will, for the sake of

Boisvert — Death as meditation subject

parts’of the body, 5) mindfulness of the four .elements and finally, the practice that interests us, 6) the nine charnel-ground medi¬ tations (nava slvathikapabbanlY. For each of these nine types of contemplation, a standard formula is used throughout. The only nuance lies in the degree of decomposition of the body (or what is left of it) from the body that died the same day, to the rotten bones that have started transforming into dust. The formula runs like this: ‘as if'a monk were to see a corpse thrown aside in the charnel-ground [either dead since only one day, or since many months depending on the type of charnel-ground meditation one is involved in], he focuses on this [meaning his) body thus: "this body has the same nature, it will become the same as that body;


simplicity, adopt the common interpretation and refer to this practice as one belonging to asubha meditation.

4 However, these six different typos of meditation within the section on the body (kayanupassana) may not be as eclectic as it seems- if considered from a particular perspective. Since this portion of the Satipatthana deals with the body, it might be possible that the Buddha classified the six meditations related to the body temporarily, i.e in the same order as the evolution of the body. The first bodily activity to take place after birth is breathing (anapiina) and the baby re¬ mains in the position he was laid (more or less); later the child learns to sit, stand and walk (the four postures); subsequently, the child becomes aware of his own person, his separate existence and activities on which he can reflect (mind¬ fulness of whatever activities one is involved in); when the child reaches his teens, passion emerges and therefore mindfulness of the repulsiveness by review¬ ing the 31 parts of the body becomes appropriate; when the individual’s intellec¬ tual capacity is at its peak, the more introspective practice of the four elements might be more appropriate; at the very end of life, when the body returns to ashes, we find the nine charnel-ground meditations (nava sivathikapabbani). This hypothetical scheme demands further investigation and does not imply that a specific practice ought to be undertaken exclusively during a particular period of life.


Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


it cannot escape it'" 5 6 . The recurring aspect of this formula stresses that the monk must establish a parallel with his own‘body by reflecting on the fact that it possesses the same nature ( evarfi - dhammo) and that it will eventually reach the same state as that decaying body (evam- bliavi). V;

We may raise the question of whether this particular passage prescribes the actual contemplation of corpses, for the only expli¬ cit prescription is to reflect on the fact that one’s own body will eventually be similar to those lying in charnel-grounds. The text does not necessarily require that the practitioner observe a corpse*. According to this passage, therefore, it does not seem imperative for someone practising the nine charnel-ground contemplations actually to observe corpses at that moment; it is only said that this person must reflect on the fact that his own body is possessed of the same nature as that of the bodies at different stages of decay.

HowSver, in the sixth chapter of the Visuddhimagga ( Asubha - kamrncitthananiddesa), Buddhaghosa elaborates on the method of pursuing such a practice and describes the observation of corpses at one of the ten different stages of decomposition. In this chapter ten stages are enumerated as asubhakammaffliaha (object of meditation for the practice of the non-beautiful); the bloated, the livid, the festering, the cut up, the gnawed, the scattered, the hacked and scattered, the bleeding, the worm-infested and the skeleton. These are basically the same as those nine described in


5 puna ca param bhikkhavc bhikkhu seyyatha pi passeyya sari ram sivathikaya chadditam ckiimatam va dvihamalam va lihamatam vit uddhumatakam vinilakam vipubbakdjdiam. so imam eva kayam upasamharanli: ‘Ayam pi kho kayo evam- dhammo evam-bhitvi clam li'. D 11 295.

6 The verb of ihc subordinate clause (passeyya) is in the optative tense

(sailami) and is preceded by an adverb (seyyatha) meaning ‘just as'.

Boisvert — Death as meditation subject


the SatipaUhana Sutta, the primary difference being that in the latter, the classification is arranged according to the period of decay, while in the former it is according to the qualitative state of the corpses. Elaborate training and preparation are prescribed prior to the culmination of practice — the actual contemplation of decaying bodies 7 . The commentator also explains the different approaches one ought to take during the actual contemplation* and also warns the reader that one should not use the body pf tbe opposite sex for this practice. As Kevin Truinor has remarked*, Buddhaghosa does not seem to take into consideration the section


7 A monk must intensively prepare himself before selling forth lo the char¬ nel-ground (or a similar place). According to Buddhaghosa (Vism 180X the prac¬ titioner must first find a teacher to supervise him; one cannot undertake this discipline without guidance. Only after having learned everything from him, should the disciple find a proper dwelling (this ‘proper dwelling* is described ii* C1UV of Vism, §§1-20) and abide meditating (investigating; pariyesantena) on the subject that was given to him. Later, if he hears that a corpse is lying at the root of a tree, a village gate, a charnel-ground, etc., he must first inform his superior before setting forth and undertaking his contemplation, the reason being that if he does not return due lo lions, tigers, robbers, or others t . X the su¬ perior could send some younger monk to rescue him. Then only, the text says, can he proceed ‘as happy as a warrior longing to witness an inauguration', Bud¬ dhaghosa also says that the yogi ought to go alone (eko adutiyo gacchali ) and should not approach the charncl-ground against the wind {pativata ), for his own body might react to the smell and he might repent havmg undertaken this project.

8 The yogi ought to apprehend the sign ( nimitla ) (of the bloated. . . .) by 1) its colour, 2) its mark (the three phases of life), 3) its shape, 4) its direction, 5) its location, 6) its limitations, (Vism 184), 7) its joints, 8) its openings, 9) its concavities, 10) its convexities, and 11) all round (Vism 185). The last five 4 approaches are only recommended if the practitioner has not grasped the sign. i 9 Trainor, Kevin. ‘In the Eye of the Beholder; NonaUachment and the Body in Subha‘s Verse (Therigatha 71)*, JAAR LXJ/l, note 35. pp.68-9. The verses referred to are Theragalha 393-8.


Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)



of the rheragithi where an arahant is portrayed as contemplating a woman’s corpse in a charnel-ground.

In this chapter, although the objects of meditation are cadavers, the concept of death itself is totally absent. The chief aim of this practice is to develop asubha towards our own body , and that of others, in order to eradicate any kind of lust or passion that may arise 10 . The purpose of this meditation was not to develop an awareness of death itself, but rather to stimulate some sense of repulsion. Buddhaghosa further characterises these ten meditations as belonging to asubhabhdvand, and he perceives them as distinct from the meditation on death ( marandnussaii ),

wc will soon return. Buddhaghosa explains that the meditation on asubha particularly fits the greedy temperament ( ragacarita ), and he further elaborates by correlating each of the ten degrees of decay to a specific greed".

Although this correlation with the ten expressions of greed is probably the construct of the commentator, the Sutta literature


10 ’This filthy body stinks outright / Like ordure, like a privy’s site / This body men that have insight / Condemn, is object of a fools delight / A tumour where nine holes abide / Wrapped in a coat of clammy hide / And trickling filth on every side / Polluting the air with stenches far and wide / If it per¬ chance should come about / That what is inside came out / Surely a man wo’ild need u knout / With which to put the crows 'tend dogs to rout*. (Vism VI 93, translation taken from The Path of Purification , p.203). It is interesting to note that in the Vism, the meaning of the term asubha is very similar to that of patikkula , i.e. rcpulsivcncss.

11 Vism, p.193 ff; Abhidiiamma and commeniarial literature classifies personalities into six types of temperament (carita): greedy ( rega ), hating ( dosa), deluded (moha), faithful {s add hi i), intelligent ( bud d hi ) and speculative (vitakka). On these, see Vism, p.101 ff.

Boisvert — Death os meditation subject


and especially the older sections — establishes an explicit link between the practice of asubha meditation and the greedy temperament. The Theragathii, for example, depicts the story of Singalapita who got rid of greed towards sensual desire through the contemplation of a skeleton (or at least the idea, sahhd, of a skeleton) 12 . However, the two most explicit passages correlating the awareness of asubha with the diminution of lust arc found in the Samyutta Nikaya and Anguttara Nikaya where it is clearly stated that asubha should be developed in order to rid oneself of lust 13 . Moreover, the various classifications of the qualities neces¬ sary for the eradication of lust always include asubha .or asubha- sahhd 1 *. Other passages in the Sutta literature indicate that these qualities do not eradicate lust, but lead to the deathless, a term often equated with Nibbana 15 . More precisely, the Samyutta Nikaya indicates that properly cultivating the recognition (sahhd) of any of five types of cadavers (the skeleton, the worm-eaten, the discoloured, the fissured and the inflated corpse) 14 can induce .arahanthood or the state of non-return 11 . From what wc have


12 Thag. p.4 (18).

13 Asubhaya cittam bhavehi. A 1 11K; asubha bhaveiabbii ragassa puhimaya. A IV 358.

14 In a list of 10. see A V 309-10; in a list of 9, A IV 465; in a list of 7. A

IV 148; in a list of 5. A IV 276.

15 In a list of 9, at A IV 3B7; in a list of 7, A IV 46.

16 Aff/iiJtd, pulavaka, vinilaka . vicehiddaka. uddumutuka. These 5 are members

of Budtlhaghosa’s ten-fold list of axubhakkatnmauhana referred to previously.

17 S V 129-31. The Vism exemplifies this statement by presenting the story of Mahatissa Thera: upon seeing the teeth (danUttlfuktc the lames of the teeth. The author stresses that is it the bones \atthika\ that Mahatissa perceives, for they are part of the skeleton and fall into the asubhakammaithana) of a woman running uway from her husband, Mahatissa acquired asubhasahha and attained Nibbana. When her husband, seeking his wife, asked him whether lie had seen a woman C*yBD*>UOraLi^- :V17*54 VsIMKjn: V> i"W* f. • . "9WWiM*^f ~ * V-*~.- V


Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)

seen so far, the place ascribed to asubha within canonical Pali literature is unequivocal: its cultivation car. lead to Nibbana, or at least to great benefits such as the eradication of passion 18 .

This type of meditation is dependent, to a certain extent, up¬ on death, for in many instances it uses death as an object. We use the term object in the sense that there is something visible or tangible that can be observed. In these cases, the practitioner con¬ templates cadavers. Although death as an object is not necessary to practise asubha meditation, as with the contemplation of the thirty-one parts of the body, it is often considered a crucial re¬ quirement. It has already been noted that Buddhaghosa’s ten objects of meditation for the cultivation of asubha arc corpses at different stages of decay. Although Buddhaghosa’s emphasis on contemplation of corpses is not accentuated in the Sutta literature, 1 have found passages referring to it. There is, however, another type of meditation on death, known as maratyasati , which is


pass by, Mahiiiissa replied wilh \hc verses which later became famotis*in the Thcravada tradition: Whether it was a man or a woman / That went by \ noticed not / But only that on this high road / There goes a group of bones. (Vism, p.2L Translation quoted from The Path of Purification, p22\

18 However, this practice has to be undertaken with extreme care. A passage of the Vinaya (Vin. Ill iSultavibhahga), p.68 fO reports that monks who have been instructed by the Buddha to cultivate asubha asked a samana named Miga- landaka to deprive them of life, for their bodies had become an inconvenience to them. U is said that Migalandaka killed 60 monks in one day. The Buddha, noticing that the number of monks had decreased, requested Ananda to assemble all the monks. To counteract ihe effect of this practice of asubha, the Buddha taught anapanasati meditation, the meditation on respiration. Although it is not explicit in the text, it seems that anapanasati is used to counterbalance the negative effects that may arise from the practice of asubha, Thh incident is used in the Vinaya to explain the rule ( parajika III) that a monk should not intention illy kill anyone or be the instrument in the killing of anyone.

Boisvert — Death as meditation subject


radically different from asubha meditation, for it docs not use death as an object, but rather as a subject. Death becomes the theme of the meditation, and the practitioner is not required to contemplate corpses. *

Very few allusions to maranasati are made in the canonical literature 19 , yet this practice seems central to the tradition. Most Buddhist traditions share the myth that before Gotama decided to leave the householder’s life to become a reduse, he came in con¬ tact with four sights: sickness, old age, death and asceticism. It is these four sights that triggered Gotama’s desire to go forth. It is interesting to note that the middle two sights are elements | belonging to the paficcasamuppada, a doctrine central to the

j tradition. Old age and death cannot be avoided and, on account of

j them, a whole mass of suffering arises in the future 20 . Facing the

continuous presence of suffering, as well as the inevitability of I death which may be sensed through ageing and old age, Gotama

sought release from this ongoing cycle of life and death. Quests j triggered by a similar realisation were also undertaken by other

I . characters in the Canon, especially in the Jataka literature 21 . All


19 Actually, the term maranasati appears rarely in canonical literature. Jp my knowledge, only 4 discourses of the Angultara Nikaya (A III 303-8; A IV 316-22) arc centred around the them. 1 have not found occurrences elsewhere in . the Sutta literature.

20 E\>am ctassa dukJJtakkhandhassa satnudaya hoti. S II 5.

21 For example, the Bodhisatta, in one of his previous lives, is reported to have said: 'Our life as living beings is similar U) dew drops on the grass; having asked my mother and father, l ought to go forth in order to subjugate sickness, old age and death’ (J IV 121). One of the elders of the Theragitha uttered a comparable verse: 'Having seen an aged person, someone afflicted by sickness and someone whose life faculties have vanished, I became a wandering renun- date, abandoning all enticing pleasures' (Thag, pjl). Many other passages from the Jataka literature show that desire to renounce worldly life arose from the


Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


of the ITheragatha where an arahant is portrayed as contemplating a woman’s corpse in a charnel-ground.

In this chapter, although the objects of meditation are cadavers, the concept of death itself is totally absent. The chief aim of this practice is to develop asubha towards our own body and that of others, in order to eradicate any kind of lust or passion that may arise 10 . The purpose of this meditation was not to develop an awareness of death itself, but rather to stimulate some sense of repulsion. Buddhaghosa further characterises these ten meditations as belonging to asubhabhavana, and he perceives them as distinct from the meditation on death ( marananussati ), « for he devotes a full chapter to this type of meditation, to which we will soon return. Buddhaghosa explains that the meditation on asubha particularly fits the greedy temperament ( ragacarita ), and he further elaborates by correlating each of the ten degrees of decay to a specific greed".

Although this correlation with the ten expressions of greed is probably the construct of the commentator, the Sutta literature


10 'This filthy body slinks outright / Like ordure, like a privy's site / This body men that have insight / Condemn, is object of a fool's delight / A tumour where nine holes abide / Wrapped in a coal of clammy hide / And trickling filth on every side / Polluting the air with stenches far and wide / If it per¬ chance should come about / That what is inside came out / Surely a man would need a knout / With which to put the crows 'and dogs to rout'. (Vism VI 93, translation taken from The Path of Purification , p.203). It is interesting to note that in the Vism, the meaning of the term asubha is very similar to that of patikkula, i.e. rcpul&ivcncss.

U Vism. p.193 ff: Abhidiiamma and commentarial literature classifies 0 personalities into six types of temperament ( carita): greedy (rega), hating {dosa\ deluded (tnoha). faithful {saddha), intelligent {buddhi) and speculative (vitakka). On these, see Vism. p.101 ff.


Boisvert — Death as meditation subject


and especially the older sections — establishes an explicit link between the practice of asubha meditation and the greedy temperament. The Theragatha, for example, depicts the story of Singalapita who got rid of greed towards sensual desire through the contemplation of a skeleton (or at least the idea, sahha, of a skeleton) 15 . However, the two most explicit passages correlating the awareness of asubha with the diminution of lust are found in the Samyutta Nikaya and Anguttara Nikaya where it is clearly stated that asul)ha should be developed in order to rid oneself of lust 13 . Moreover, the various classifications of the qualities neces¬ sary for the eradication of lust always include asubha pr asubha- sahha'*. Other passages in the Sutta literature indicate that these qualities do- not eradicate lust, but load to the deathless, a term often equated with Nibbana 15 . More precisely, the Samyutta Nikaya indicates that properly cultivating the recognition (sanhS) of any of five types of cadavers (the skeleton, the worm-eaten, the discoloured, the fissured and the inflated corpse) 16 can induce .arahanthood or the state of non-return 17 . From what wc have


12 Thag. p.4 (181

13 As ub hay a citlarn bhavchi. A \ UK. asubha bhavelabha rdgassa pahdndya. A IV 358.

\4 a list of 10. see A V 309-10; in a list of 9, A IV 4(>5; in a list of 7. A

IV 148; in a list of 5. A IV 276.

15 In a list of 9, at A IV 387; in a list of 7. A IV 4b.

16 Atthika, pulavaka , vinilaJuu vice hi dd aka. uddumiiluka. These 5 are members of Buddhaghosa s len-foid list of asubhakkatntnatihdna referred to previously.

17 S V 129-3L The Vism exemplifies this statement by presenting the story of Mahatissa Thera: upon seeing the teeth (dant atthika: the hones of the teeth. The author stresses that is it the bones \atlhika\ that Mahatissa perceives, for they are part of the skeleton and fall into the asubhakammatthdna) of a woman running away from her husband. Mahatissa acquired asubhasanfta and attained Nibbana. When her husband, seeking his wife, asked him whether he had seen a woman

Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)

seen so far, the place ascribed to asubha within canonical Pali literature is unequivocal: its cultivation can lead to N-ibbana, or at least to great benefits such as the eradication of passion 18 .

This type of meditation is dependent, to a certain extent, up¬ on death, for in many instances it uses death as an object. We use the term object in the sense that there is something visible or tangible that can be observed. In these cases, the practitioner con¬ templates cadavers. Although death as an object is not necessary to practise asubha meditation, as with the contemplation of the thirty-one parts of the body, it is often considered a crucial re¬ quirement. It has already been noted that Buddhaghosa’s ten objects of meditation for the cultivation of asubha are corpses at different stages of decay. Although Buddhaghosa’s emphasis on contemplation of corpses is not accentuated in the Sutta literature, 1 have found passages referring to it. There is, however, another type of meditation on death, known as maravasati, which is


pass by. Mahutissa replied with "the verses which later became'famous*in the Theravada tradition: Whether it was a man or a woman / That went by 1 noticed not / But only that on this high road / There goes a group of bones. (Vism, p.21. Translation quoted from The Path of Purification, p22).

18 However, (his practice has to be undertaken with extreme care. A passage of the Vinaya (Vin. Ill iSuttavibhahga), p.68 fO reports that monks who have been instructed by the Buddha to cultivate asubha asked a samana named Miga- landaka to deprive them of life, for their bodies had become an inconvenience to them. U is said that Migalandaka killed 60 monks in one day. The Buddha, noticing that the number of monks had decreased, requested Ananda to assemble all the monks. To counteract the effect of this practice of asubha, the Buddha taught anapanasati meditation, the meditation on respiration. Although it is not explicit in (he text, it seems that anapanasati is used to counterbalance the negative effects that may arise from the practice of asubha. Thh incident is used in the Vinaya to explain the rule ( parajika 111) that a monk should not intention illy kill anyone or to the instrument in the killing of anyone.

Boisvert — Death as meditation subject


radically different from asubha meditation, for it does not use death as an object, but rather as a subject. Death becomes the theme of the meditation, and the practitioner is not required to contemplate corpses. *

Very few allusions to mara^asati are made in the canonical literature 19 , yet this practice seems central to the tradition. Most Buddhist traditions share the myth that before Gotama decided to leave the householder’s life to become a recluse, he came in con¬ tact with four sights: sickness, old age, death and asceticism. It is these four sights that triggered Gotama’s desire to go forth. It is interesting to note that the middle two sights are elements belonging to the paficcasamuppada, a doctrine central to the tradition. Old age and death cannot be avoided and, on account of them, a whole mass of suffering arises in the future 80 . Facing the continuous presence of suffering, as well as the inevitability of death which may be sensed through ageing and old age, Gotama' sought release from this ongoing cycle of life and death. Quests triggered by a similar realisation were also undertaken by other characters in the Canon, especially in the Jataka literature 81 . All


19 Actually, the term maranasali appears rarely in canonical literature. X<> tty knowledge, only 4 discourses of the Anguttara Nikaya (A Ill 303-8; A IV 316*22) arc centred around the them. I have not found occurrences elsewhere in, the Sutta literature.

20 E\>am ctassa dukUiakkhandhassa samudaya hoti, S II 5.

21 For example, the Bodhisatta, in one of his previous lives, is reported to have said: ‘Our life as living beings is similar U> dew drops on the grass; having asked my mother and father, I ought to go forth in order to subjugate sickness, old age and death* 0 IV 121). One of the elders of the Thera gal ha uttered a comparable verse: ‘Having seen an aged person, someone afflicted by sickness and someone whose life faculties have vanished, I became a wandering renun- ciate, abandoning all enticing pleasures* (Thag, p.11). Many other passages from the Jataka literature show that desire to renounce worldly life arose from the


Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


Boisvert — Death as meditation subject

these passages underscore the urgency ( samvega ) that is felt when • death approaches.

Buddhaghosa, however, places considerable emphasis on the practice of maranasati 22 . He first introduces the subject by cir¬ cumscribing what is meant by marana in this particular context. ^

Death is simply the termination of one’s life.faculty, '.e. the en<j 1

of one’s life span. He then proceeds to define marananussati itself { and what is entailed in this practice:

So mindfulness of death is the remembering of death, in other words, of the interruption of the life faculty. One who wants to develop this should go into solitary retreat and exercise attention wisely in this way: ‘Death will take place; the life faculty will be interrupted’ or ‘Death, death' 23 .

According to the commentator, this exercise ought to generate mindfulness {sati\ the sense of urgency {samvega) and knowledge (nana¥\ If it is not successful, the practitioner should recollect death in eight different ways: 1) as a murderer (who appears sud-


mere fact of realising that we are not immune to old age. King Makhadeva, for example, uttered the following verse upon noticing one single grey hair on his head: ‘These grey hairs that appear on my head are deaths own messengers that come to rob my life. Now ix the time that I renounce the worldly life* (J I 138. The Susima Jataka (J III 237J, Cullasutasoma Jataka [J V 91) and Nimi Jataka [J VI 53] are of the same character).

22 U is interesting to note that Buddhaghosa does not use the term marana¬ sati but rather marananussati. Though one wouUJ lend to think that the com¬ mentator used a different terminology than the one used in the Sutta in order to underline a nuance between two practices, Buddhaghosa himself wrote that sati itself \\ an anussaii and the main distinction is that the latter ‘occurs only in those instances where it should occur* {The Path of Purification , p.204).

23 The Path of Purification . p.248.

24 Ibid .

denly and takes away life), 2) as the ruin of success (for death is the ruining of life’s success), 3) by comparison ((i.e. by comparing onself to others who have died), 4) as to the sharing of the body with many (kinds of worms and creatures), 5) as to the fragility of life, 6) as signless (in the sense of unpredictable), 7) as to the limit of the extent, and 8) as to the brevity of the moment (in the sense that one is alive only for the duration of one’s conscious* ness). This last perspective on death contradicts the definition that the commentator himself had set at the beginning of the chapter. Death, in this context, ought to be seen as the termination of the life faculty and does not include the constant dissolution of the aggregates — what is technically termed momentary death ( Ichanikamaranain ). Yet, having excluded momentary death at the outset, Buddhaghosa reintegrates it with the eighth perspective.

In modern Sri Lanka, whore Buddhaghosa lived some 1,500 years ago, -charnel-grounds arc basically non-existent. Bodies are either- burned, when the finanical situation of a family allows it, or our ted. Monks wishing to practise asubhabhavana, as described ... by Buddhaghosa, have to find alternatives. Since one of the ten stages of decomposition of corpses is known as ‘cut up’ ( [vicchid - dakam) a possible option for monks wishing to follow Buddha- ghosa’s prescription is to attend sessions where bodies are actually cut up: postmortem examinations are the ideal modern alternative. Although Buddhaghosa originally suggested locations such as • battlefields, forests infested with robbers or charnel-grounds where

« kings have theives cut up”, the autopsy room seems a viable

compromise.

25 Vicchiddakam yaddhamandalc vd cardtaviyam vd susdne vd , yaitha rdjano core chindapenti, arannd vd pana sthavyagghchi chinnapurisat thane labbhati. Vism 190.


Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)

iTMn’mii'iMMlarrri' - m -

Boisvert — Death as meditation subject


During my research, I had the opportunity to observe one monk who attended an autopsy at the Colombo General Hospital 26 *

I interviewed a monk of British origin who mentioned that he was planning to attend an autopsy a few days later. He invited me to accompany him. On that day, 1 met him at the hospital temple around 9.30 am and proceeded directly to the room where postmortems were performed. When we entered, two cadavers were already being autopsied, with a third one laid on the ground waiting its turn. All were males. Since the monk had not enquired \ as to the sex of the bodies, it did not seem that Buddhaghosa’s

restriction carried much weight.

The smell was paradoxically vivid. The monk approached one j of the bodies. Two men were working on the abdomen, emptying

i it of its contents. The monk remained beside the body for ap-

) proximately five minutes, then walked around, keeping his eyes

on the object of his meditation. He asked me how 1 was coping with the situation three times. The two technicians were now working on the head, cutting it open with a saw. The monk £ approached to have a closer view of the process. Two minutes

later, he moved to the other body, whose autopsy was already

completed. He looked at all the internal organs (lungs, heart, liver, ly* n S on the table, took the hand of the dead man in his, and asked me: ‘you can feci death, do you want to touch?* 7 . I politely


26 We were supposed to attend a second one at the Kandy General Hospital, with 2 other monks. The morning of the autopsy, we all went to the hospital as planned with the medical authorities, and wailed in vain for 2 hours for the judicial medical officer. At 11.00 am. we had to return to the monastery since monks have to eat before noon.

27 Buddhaghosa. when describing the practice of asubha in reference to the cut up. continue, by stressing that the yogi should never tctuch the body; the dismembc.ed P arls should be reassembled by a monastery attendant, someone

reminded him that my task was simply to observe him and his practice, nothing else. He then proceeded to the body of the elderly man lying on the floor, after which we left. We had spent approximately twenty minutes in the autopsy room before heading back to the hospital temple where 1 interviewed him.

Immediately following the autopsies, when asked how he felt, the monk answered that he still had a feeling of unease and that disgust was still pre-eminent in his mind. By witnessing an au¬ topsy, he continued, one is able to investigate at a deeper level the nature of the body, that'is, the foulness inherent in the body we often perceive as attractive. It is also crucial, he stressed, to couple this particular practice with vipassana meditation. The emotions, sensations and images that arise when one witnesses an autopsy need to be dealt with. In order to transform this ex¬ perience into a meditative process, one has to develop constant and objective awareness of these sensations and emotions. This enables the practitioner to cultivate an understanding of the reality as it is, without generating hatred or disgust towards individuals themselves.

After reflecting on the extreme nature of this particular practice, I questioned the monk as to its relation to one of the central teachings of the Buddha — what is known as the middle- path 0 majjhimapatipada). He explained that what is meant by ‘middle-path’ is not moderation, but rather the capacity to develop a stable state of mind, a sort of indifference — or rather equa¬ nimity — regardless of the situation. The middle-path is avoiding


studying to become an ascetic, or by the yogi himself with the help of a stick. The reason given is that**he would come to handle it without disgust as a corpse-burner would’ (Paramatthamanjusa 176; translation taken from The Path of Purification , p.197, n.ll).


Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


Boisvert — Death as meditation subject


these passages underscore the urgency ( samvega ) that is felt when death approaches.

" Buddhaghosa, however, places considerable emphasis on the practice of maranasati 22 . He first introduces the subject by cir¬ cumscribing what is meant by marana in this particular context. Death is simply the termination of one’s life faculty, '.e. the en<j of one’s life span. He then proceeds to define marananussati itself and what is entailed in this practice:

So mindfulness of death is the remembering of death, in other words, of the interruption of the life faculty. One who wants to develop this should go into solitary retreat and exercise attention wisely in this way: ‘Death will take place; the life faculty will be interrupted’ or ‘Death, death’ 23 .

According to the commentator, this exercise ought to generate mindfulness (sati), the sense of urgency (samvega) and knowledge (nana) 2 \ If it is not successful, the practitioner should recollect death in eight different ways: 1) as a murderer (who appears sud-


mere fact of realising that we are not immune to old age. King Makhadeva, for example, uttered the following verse upon noticing one single grey hair on his head: 'These grey hairs that appear on my head are death’s own messengers that come to rob my life. Now is the time that I renounce the worldly life* (J I 138. The Susirnu Jataka (J III 237), Cullasutasoma Jataka (J V 91) and Nimi Jataka [J VI 53) are of the same character).

22 It is interesting to note that Buddhaghosa does not use the term marana - sati but rather marananussati Though one wouhj lend to think that the com¬ mentator used a different lenninology than the one used in the Sutta in order to underline a nuance between two practices, Buddhaghosa himself wrote that sati itself is an anussaii and the main distinction is that the latter 'occurs only in those instances where it should occur (The Path of Purification , p204).

23 The Path of Purification . p.248.

24 Ibid .

denly and takes away life), 2) as the ruin of success (for death is the ruining of life’s success), 3) by comparison ((i.e. by comparing onself to others who have died), 4) as to the sharing of the body with many (kinds of worms and creatures), 5) as to the fragility of life, 6) as signless (in the sense of unpredictable), 7) as to the I limit of the extent, and 8) as to the brevity of the moment (in the

j sense that one is alive only for the duration of one’s conscious¬

ness). This last perspective on death contradicts the definition that the commentator himself had set at the beginning of the chapter. Death, in this context, ought to be seen as the termination of the life faculty and does not include the constant dissolution of the aggregates — what is technically termed momentary death (khariikamaranam). Yet, having excluded momentary death at the outset, Buddhaghosa reintegrates it with the eighth perspective.

In modern Sri Lanka, where Buddhaghosa lived some 1,500 years ago, -charnel-grounds arc basically non-existent. Bodies are either- burned, when the finanical situation of a family allows it, or ouried. Monks wishing to practise asubhabhavana, as described by Buddhaghosa, have to find alternatives. Since one of the ten stages of decomposition of corpses is known as ‘cut up’ (vicchid- dakam) a possible option for monks wishing to follow Buddha- ghosa’s prescription is to attend sessions where bodies arc actually cut up: postmortem examinations are the ideal modern alternative. Although Buddhaghosa originally suggested locations such as battlefields, forests infested with robbers or charnel-grounds where kings have theives cut up 25 , the autopsy room seems a viable compromise.


25 Vicchiddakam yaddhamandalc vd carat aviyam vd suscinc vd, yattha rajano core chinddpenti, arafxhd vd pana sthavyaxghchi chinnapuri sal thane labbhati. Visin 190.


Uuddlilst Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


During my research, 1 had the opportunity to observe one monk who attended an autopsy at the Colombo General Hospital 26 .

I interviewed a monk of British origin who mentioned that he was planning to attend an autopsy a few days later. He invited me to accompany him. On that day, I met him at the hospital temple around 9.30 am and proceeded directly to the room where postmortems were performed. When we entered, two cadavers were already being autopsied, with a third one laid on the ground waiting its turn. All were males. Since the monk had not enquired as to the sex of tne bodies, it did not seem that Buddhaghosa’s restriction carried much weight.

The smell was paradoxically vivid. The monk approached one of the bodies. Two men were working on the abdomen, emptying it of its contents. The monk remained beside the body for ap¬ proximately five minutes, then walked around, keeping his eyes on the object of his meditation. He asked me how I was coping with the situation three times. The two technicians were now working on the head, cutting it open with a saw. The monk approached to have a closer view of the process. Two minutes later, he moved to the other body, whose autopsy was already completed. He looked at all the internal organs (lungs, heart, liver, •..) lying on the table, took the hand of the dead man in his, and asked me: ‘you can feel death, do you want to touch?’ 27 .1 politely


26 We were supposed lo allend a second one al the Kandy General Hospiul, with 2 other monks. The morning of the autopsy, we all went to the hospital as planned with the medical authorities, and wailed in vain for 2 hours for the judicial medical officer. At 11.00 am. we had to return to the monastery since monks have to eat before noon.

27 Buddhaghosa, when describing the practice of asubha in reference to the cut up, continue* by stressing that the yogi should never much the body; the dismembe.ed parts should be reassembled by a monastery attendant, someone


Boisvert — Death as meditation subject


reminded him that my task was simply to observe him and his practice, nothing else. He then proceeded to the body of the elderly man lying on the floor, after which we left. We had spent approximately twenty minutes in the autopsy room before heading back to the hospital temple where I interviewed him.

Immediately following the autopsies, when asked how he felt, the monk answered that he still had a feeling of unease and that disgust was still pre-eminent in his mind. By witnessing an au¬ topsy, he continued, one is able to investigate at a deeper level the nature of the body, lhat'is, the foulness inherent in the body we often perceive as attractive. It is also crucial, he stressed, to couple this particular practice with vipassana meditation. The emotions, sensations and images that arise when one witnesses an autopsy need to be dealt with. In order to transform this ex- perience into a meditative process, one has to develop constant and objective awareness of these sensations and emotions. This enables the practitioner to cultivate an understanding of the reality as it is, without generating hatred or disgust towards individuals themselves.

After reflecting on the extreme nature of this particular practice, I questioned the monk as to its relation to one of the central teachings of the Buddha - what is known as the middle- path ( majjhimapatipada ). He explained that what is meant by ‘middle-path’ is not moderation, but rather the capacity to develop a stable state of mind, a sort of indifference - or rather equa¬ nimity — regardless of the situation. The middle-path is avoiding


studying to become an ascetic, or by the yogi himself with the help of a stick. The reason given is ihal,*he would come lo handle it without disgust as a corpse-burner would’ (Paramatthamanjusa 176; translation taken from The Path of Purification , p.197, n.ll).

Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)

extremes in the sense that the mind remains aloof from pleasure and pain; the mind simply becomes a detached observer of the situations being experienced. However, he admitted that this was an extreme and occasional situation that he decided to place himself into in order to observe the reactions that would arise. During the seven years that he has been a monk, this was only the second time he witnessed an autopsy. His own specific practice is grounded in an interest in understanding how the mind manufactures emotions and how these are related to thoughts. To achieve this comprehension, he practises the more traditionally accepted form of meditation, i.e. vipassana.

I also interviewed ten other members of the Sangha 28 , most of whom had practised this postmortem-meditation at least once. When asked to explain how they understood maranasati, all agreed with Buddhaghosa’s interpretation that maranasati re¬ quires the practitioners to remind themselves constantly of the proximity of death. From the subsequent analyses of the inter¬ views, I noticed that two other practices had also been classified as maranasati. Without ever challenging Buddhaghosa’s definition, eight of the eleven interviewees suggested that maranasati was broader than this mere awareness of the potentiality of death. First, they considered meditation on asubha, as described by Buddhaghosa (i.e. the ten types of charnel-ground contemplations or their modern expression in the autopsy room) as belonging to maranasati as long as the yogis perceived and constantly con¬ templated the fragility of life. This falls in-line with the Sati-


, 28 The of ihe dasa sil matavo is ihe object of a controversy among the

Sinhalese monastic community. IFor more information on the subject, see Tessa Barlholomcus/. Womdn under the Do Tree. Buddhist Nuns in Sri Lanka. Cambridge 1994]


Boisvert — Death as meditation subject


i patthana’s suggestion that practitioners must reflect on the fact | that their body possesses the same nature. In fact, many monks in Sri Lanka have witnessed autopsies in order to cultivate ! asubha and/or maranasati. Moreover, photographs of autopsies j are broadly available for the Thai monastic community and these

. are widely circulated in Sri Lanka. Most of the hermitages where

the interviews were conducted had at least a few of these photo- | graphs and/or partial or complete skeletons used for meditation purposes. All the monks using these tools, however, strongly emphasised that without reflecting on their own body, the charnel-ground contemplations (or the contemplation of the photographs or the skeletons) remain solely at the asubha level.

These same eight monastics perceived maranasati as the natural result of their daily riieditatidn. As the abbot in charge of a major meditatibn centre in Colombo remarked, -death itself is merely a concept which is totally devoid of substance For this reason, it is impossible to focus on it’. He further explained that what we conventionally call death does not exist, for the simple reason that in order for something/someone to die, it needs to possess an independent existence which Buddhist doctrine denies with the theories of anicca, anatta and paticcasamuppada. A person docs not merely die at the end of one’s existence for, at the deepest level, this person never existed. What we normally term 'person’ is an amalgam of five aggregates which arc con¬ stantly changing. Every moment, each of these aggregates arises and passes away ( upajjhitva , nirujjhanti). Therefore, maranasati, viewed from this angle, cannot be separated from the normal practice of vipassana meditation which aims, as the tradition claims, at seeing things as they really are. Practitioners of vi¬ passana who simply observe their own mind and body soon notice the transitory character of existence. Eventually, they become aware that birth and death happen at every single mo-

Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


Boisvert — Death as meditation subject


ment. Material particles arise and vanish: death is present through¬ out the life-process. Such an awareness helps, on the one hand, to cope with what we conventionally call death. By becoming increasingly aware of the presence of death, at the experiential level, practitioners are no more intimidated when the final mo¬ ment comes. Death is nothing but the culmination of successive deaths which one had gradually learned to deal with. On the other hand, this same process helps them live a less egocentric,.more detached, cquanimous and compassionate life, for they have come to understand that nothing is worth clinging to, and that human suffering is directly related to the cultivation of the awareness of impermanence, the core of Theravada Buddhist meditation. In fact, when one practises one of these two thoroughly, the other is also automatically practised, whether consciously or not.

The view that maranasati is intimately linked with vipas- sand is also corroborated by the fact that the former is one of the four protections ( caturarakklia ). Members of the Sangha as well as lay-meditators in intensive training are encouraged to recite daily the verses of protections. By recollecting the qualities of the Buddha, promoting loving-kindness, restraining sexual desires through asubha and promoting the awareness of death, the practitioners’ ability to deepen their meditation is supposed to in¬ crease. It is also noteworthy that lay people going to the temple in order to pay respect to the Buddha often recite a standard verse similar to those found in the four protections: I pay respect to the Buddha; may I obtain some merit This body [of mine] will be destroyed just as these flowers will fade”. This indicates that


29 Pujcmi buddham kusumena nena I Punncna me te fabhami mukham / Puppham milayati yatha idam me / Kayo tatha yali vinasa bhavam II A simitar verse stressing that all are subject to Uealh is also frequently used by lay follow¬


the practice of maranasati as such is not only followed by medi¬ tators but, to a certain extent, by most devout Buddhists as well.

When asked how a monk should practise marariasati, the abbot suggested two methods, the second being much more effec¬ tive than the first. One may start by the simple recital of the four protections discussed above. When meditators are more advanced in their practice of vipassana, they can embark on a radically different practice. They should lie like a corpse, preferably at night and, as suggested by Buddhaghosa, recall that Buddhas, kings, neighbours and parents have died. They then remind them¬ selves that death is inevitable. It is at this stage that they must ‘feel life go out from every part of the body, from the toes upwards. If this practice is accomplished properly, one actually dies’. The- abbot himself refused to answer when 1 asked if he practises this sort of meditation, for members of the Sangha are not supposed to brag about their accomplishments. Neither did he clarify whether he meant that the body technically dies and is r.eanimatcd, or that one symbolically dies by becoming aware of the ever presence of death throughout the body, a presence manifesting itself through the constant process of impermanence. This second interpretation would be in line with the traditional practice of vipassana.

It is clear from these eight interviews that the practice of maranasati not only includes a. constant remembrance of the finitude of life, but also incorporates asubhabhavana and the awarness of anicca. This perception of maranasati differs radi¬ cally from Buddhaghosa’s, for the latter only considered the aware-


ers: Namami buddham gunasdgaram lam l Sail ha saddha honiu sukhi avira / Kayo jigujjo sakalo dugandho / Gacchanti sabbe maranam aham ca ll

Boisvert — Death as meditation subject


Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)

extremes in the sense that the mind remains aloof from pleasure and pain; the mind simply becomes a detached observer of the situations being experienced. However, he admitted that this was an extreme and occasional situation that he decided to place himself into in order to observe the reactions that would arise. During the seven years that he has been a monk, this was only the second time he witnessed an autopsy. His own specific practice is grounded in an interest in understanding how the mind manufactures emotions and how these are related to thoughts. To achieve this comprehension, he practises the more traditionally accepted form of meditation, i.e. vipassana.

I also interviewed ten other members of the Sangha 28 , most of whom had practised this postmortem-meditation at least once. When asked to explain how they understood maranasati, all agreed with Buddhaghosa’s interpretation that maranasati re¬ quires the practitioners to remind themselves constantly of the proximity of death. From the subsequent analyses of the inter¬ views, I noticed that two other practices had also been classified as maranasati. Without ever challenging Buddhaghosa’s definition, eight of the eleven interviewees suggested that maranasati was broader than this mere awareness of the potentiality of death. First, they considered meditation on asubha, as described by Buddhaghosa (i.e. the ten types of charnel-ground contemplations or their modern expression in the autopsy room) as belonging to maranasati as long as the yogis perceived and constantly con¬ templated the fragility of life. This falls in-line with the Sati-


28 The stilus of ihe dasa sit malavo is the object of a controversy among the Sinhalese monastic community. [For more information on the subject, sec Tessa Barihoiomcusz. Women under the Do Tree. Buddhist Nuns in Sri Lanka. Cambridge 1994]


i patthana’s suggestion that practitioners must reflect on the fact that their body possesses the same nature. In fact, many monks in Sri Lanka have witnessed autopsies in order to cultivate asubha and/or maranasati. Moreover, photographs of autopsies j are broadly available for the Thai monastic community and these

i are widely circulated in Sri Lanka. Most of the hermitages where

! the interviews were conducted had at least a few of these photo-

| graphs and/or partial or complete skeletons used for meditation

purposes. All the monks using these tools, however, strongly emphasised that without reflecting on their own body, the charnel-ground contemplations (or the contemplation of the photographs or the skeletons) remain solely at the asubha level.

These same eight monastics perceived maranasati as the natural result of their daily riieditatidn. As the abbot in charge of a major meditatibn centre in Colombo remarked, -death itself is merely a concept which is totally devoid of substance. For this reason, it is impossible to focus on it’. He further explained that what we conventionally call death does not exist, for the simple reason that in order for something/someone to die, it needs to possess an independent existence which Buddhist doctrine denies with the theories of anicca , anatta and paticcasamuppada. A person docs not merely die at the end of one’s existence for, at the deepest level, this person never existed. What we normally term ‘person’ is an amalgam of five aggregates which arc con¬ stantly changing. Every moment, each of these aggregates arises and passes away ( upajjhitva, nirujjhanti). Therefore, maranasati, viewed from this angle, cannot be separated from the normal practice of vipassana meditation which aims, as the tradition claims, at seeing things as they really are. Practitioners of vi¬ passana who simply observe their own mind and body soon notice the transitory character of existence. Eventually, they become aware that birth and death happen at every single mo-

Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)


ment. Mater-al particles arise and vanish: death is present through¬ out the life-process. Such an awareness helps, on the one hand, to cope with what we conventionally call death. By becoming increasingly aware of the presence of death, at the experiential level, practitioners are no more intimidated when the final mo¬ ment comes. Death is nothing but the culmination of successive deaths which one had gradually learned to deal with. On the other hand, this same process helps them live a less egocentric,.more detached, cquanimous and compassionate life, for they have come to understand that nothing is worth clinging to, and that human suffering is directly related to the cultivation of the awareness of impermanence, the core of Theravada Buddhist meditation. In fact, when one practises one of these two thoroughly, the other is also automatically practised, whether consciously or not

The view that maranasati is intimately linked with vipas¬ sana is also corroborated by the fact that the former is one of the four protections ( caiurarakkha ). Members of the Sangha as well as lay-meditators in intensive training are encouraged to recite daily the verses of protections. By recollecting the qualities of the Buddha, promoting loving-kindness, restraining sexual desires through asubha and promoting the awareness of death, the practitioners’ ability to deepen their meditation is supposed to in¬ crease. It is also noteworthy that lay people going to the temple in order to pay respect to the Buddha often recite a standard verse similar to those found in the four protections: I pay respect to the Buddha; may I obtain some merit This body [of mine] will be destroyed just as these flowers will fade”. This indicates that

Boisvert — Death as meditation subject


! the practice of maranasati as such is not only followed by medi-

! tators but, to a certain extent, by most devout Buddhists as well.

When asked how a monk should practise maranasati, the I abbot suggested two methods, the second being much more effec- • j tive than the first. One may start by the simple recital of the four I protections discussed above. When meditators are more advanced in their practice of vipassana , they can embark on a radically different practice. They should lie like a corpse, preferably at ' night and, as suggested by Buddhaghosa, recall that Buddhas,

1 kings, neighbours and parents have died. They then remind them¬ selves that death is inevitable. It is at this stage that they must ‘feel life go out from every part of the body, from the toes upwards. If this practice is accomplished properly, one actually 1 dies’. The- abbot himself refused to answer when 1 asked if he practises this sort of meditation, for members of the Sangha are not supposed to brag about their accomplishments. Neither did he v clarify whether he meant that the body technically dies and is reanimated, or that one symbolically dies by becoming aware of the ever presence of death throughout the body, a presence manifesting itself through the constant process of impermanence. This second interpretation would be in line with the traditional practice of vipassana.

It is clear from these eight interviews that the practice of

maranasati not only includes a_ constant remembrance of the

1 finitude of life, but also incorporates asubhabhavana and the

awarness of anicca. This perception of maranasati differs radi¬ cally from Buddhaghosa’s, for the latter only considered the aware-


29 Pujcmi buddham Lusumena nena / Puhncna me te tabhami mukham / Puppham mitayali yalha idam me / Kayo latha yali vinasa bhavam II A simitar verse stressing thal all are subject to death is also frequently used by lay follow-

ers: Namami buddham gunasagaram lam f Salt ha saddhd hortiu sukhi avira / Kayo jigujjo sakalo dugandho / Gacchanti sabbe maranam aham ca //


Buddhist Studies Review 13, 1 (1996)

ness of dcaih as the essence of this practice. I must stress, how- j ever, that three other monastics categorically stated that maranasati was solely the awareness of death, and that the nine charnel-ground meditations belonged exclusively to the realm of asubhabhavana.

I would like to conclude by summarising the divergences of {

interpretation that have been alluded to in this paper — that is, |

divergences between canonical literature, the Visuddhimagga and contemporary practice. The description of maranasati in canoni¬ cal literature is sparse and limited to the awareness of ageing and the proximity of death. Two simple methods for developing this awareness are described in the Ahguttara 30 , while many passages of, the Jiitakas and Thera- Thcrigatha praise this awareness by offering numerous examples of persons who, having realised the inexorability of their fate, cither decided to renounce worldly life or attained enlightenment. Buddhaghosa, however, built an eight¬ fold method for developing this awareness, a systematised method that is absent in earlier Pali literature. Yet contemporary practice shows a much wider interpretation which, according to the ma¬ jority of the monastics interviewed, includes asubhabhavana and the awareness of anicca.

copyrighted © Mathieu Boisvert (Director of graduate studies dep. des sciences religieuses Universite du Quebec a Montreal)


30 The fir^i thing is constantly to remind oneself that death could happen at any moment: after one day, one night, a meal, a single bite [A 111 303 and also at A IV 3161. The other being the different reasons for dying such as being bitten by a centipede, a snake or a scorpion, or falling, choking ... [A HI 307, 5nd also at A IV 3201


EKOTTARAGAMA (XX)

Translated from the Chinese Version by Thich Huycn-Vi and Bhikkhu Piisadika in collaboration with Sara Boin-Webb

Ninth Fascicle Part 18

(Shame and Remorse)

6. ‘‘Thus have I heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in SravastI, at the Jeta Grove, in Anathapipdada’s Park. Then Venerable Nanda donned exquisite robes, and with eye-shadow he brightened up his eye[lids],« wearing slippers ornamented with gold. Again, he rubbed 2 the cosmetic off his eye[lids] and, holding in his hands jiisutlms-bowl, he was about to enter the city of SravastI.

From afar many bhik$us saw Venerable Nanda [on the point of] entering the city to beg for alms-food, while he was wearing exquisite robes. New those bhiksus went to the whereabouts of the Exalted One, bowing down their heads at his feet, and sat down at one side. Hardly had [they taken their seats) when they stood up [again], saying to the Exalted One: As far as Bhiksu Nanda is concerned, he has donned exquisite robes and brightened up his eyetlids] with eye-shadow and is [thus] entering the city of


1 See T 2, 591a8 ff; Hayashi. p.153 ff.

2 For & Hayashi reads & (to compare; to criticise; to oppose), which does not seem appropriate.


NOTES

1 • ^ or details of these developments, see D. D. Kosambi, The Culture and Civilization of Ancient India (London, 1905), pp. 103 ff.; a more recent devel- opment of this theme is offered by Jaimal Rai in his The Rural-Urban Economy and Social Changes in Ancient India (Delhi, 1974), pp. 165 ff.

2. On the chronology of these texts, sec M. Wintemitz, A History of tfj

Indian Literature (New York 1971), 11, pp. 17 IT.; for the dates of the Buddha I and Asoka, sec B. G. Gokhalc, Asoka A laurya (New York, 1971), pp. 35, 63; y also sec B. G. Gokhalc, Buddhism in Maharashtra , (Bombay, 1976), pp. 23 ff.; :| on these “elite * groups, see B. G. Gokhalc, “The Early Buddhist Elite "Jour- nal of Indian History, XL1 ll/ll (August 1965), pp. 391-402. '

3. J. Kashyap (cd.). The Cullavagga (Nalanda, 1956), pp. 406—409-

4. See G. P. Malalasckera, Dictionary of Tali Proper Names (London,

- I960), 11, pp. 1126—1127; hereafter referred to as DPPN .

5. DPPN , 11, pp. 1126-1127; B. N. Chaudhury, Buddhist Centres in > Ancient India (Calcutta, 1969), pp. 71-74 (hereafter abbreviated as BCAl)', Halram Srivastavii, Trade and Commerce in Ancient India (Varanasi, 1968), pp. 75-76.

6. BCAL pp. 99-105; DPPN, 11. pp. 721-724.

7. BCAl , pp. 43-45; DPPN , l, pp. 516-520; B. G. Gokhalc, Asoka Maurya (New York, I960), pp. 75, 164.

8. BCAL pp. 56-60; DPPN, II, p. 940-943; J. Kashyap (cd.). The Digha Nikdya (Nalanda, 1958), II, pp. 92-93.

9. BCAL pi). 85-87; DPPN, l, pp. 692-695; Gokhale, op. cit., p. 163.

10. BCAl, pp. 182-184; DPPN, I, pp. 344-345; also see B. C. Law, Ujjay ini in Ancient India (Gwalior, 1944), pp. 2-4, 13-15, 32-33; J. Kashyap * (cd.). The Malta vagga (Nalanda, 1956), pp. 214-217; T. W. Rhys Davids and H. Oldenberg (traus.), Vi nay a Texts (Delhi, 1965), pp. 32-40.

11. BCAL pp. 122-123: DPPN, I, pp. 855-856; J. Kashyap (cd.). The Mahdiwgga, pp. 327 ff.

12. For the term nigama, see Jaimal Rai, op. cit. , pp. 160-161.

13. For the Brdhmanagamas, sec B. G. Gokhale, “Brahmanas in Early Buddhist Literature, M in Journal of Indian History , XLV11I/1, pp. 51-61.

14. See C.S.J\ Misra, The Age of Vinaya (New Delhi, 1972), pp. 249-260; also see Balratn Srivastava, op. cit. f pp. 268-283.

15. For the rccmergcncc of “villagism” sec D. D. Kosambi, op. cit., pp.

103 ff. v

16. For the Buddha and the “caste** system of his times see B. G. Gok- b . Buddhism in Maharashtra, pp. 26 ff.

17. DPPN. II, p. 27.

18. See I* »*.. Gokhale, op., cit.. ' 162; for inscripuoual evidence of the

Sunga-Kan *‘»d. see H. Ludc; \frpendix to Epigraphia Indica (Calcutta, 1912). X,N 248,299.867


Pilgrimage and the Structure of Sinhalese Buddhism *

by John C. Holt oa JbS]l

Throughout the history of Buddhism in South and Southeast Asia, Buddhists have undertaken religious pilgrimages to sa¬ cred place's where, according to tradition, bodily relics of the Buddha are enshrined. This ‘‘cult of traces”’ has been so wide¬ spread and powerful that at least one scholar has suggested that in the formative period of Thcravada Buddhism in Sri Lanka, it provided the primary focal point of spiritual orientation for jnuch of the lay tradition.* As the monastic community focused its cultic 'activities upon the study, recitation and interpretation of the Buddha’s teachings ( dhammukdyu ), the laity propitiated the Buddha through venerating the remains of his physical body (rupakaya). These two orientations represent the means by which the monastic and lay segments of the early Buddhist community sustained the legacy of the Buddha’s life and teach*

ings. The origins of this division of spiritual labor may be found

in texts that are as ancient as the Mahaparinibbdna Sulla of the Dlgha Nikdya, articulated perhaps within one hundred years of the death of the Buddha.

However, pilgrimage to sacred places where relies of the k Buddha are enshrined is more than a matter of commemorat- l : ing the great master. The Buddha’s relics were popularly be- lieved to be latent manifestations of miraculous power. Pious [• political rulers assumed that possession of the Buddha’s relics it legitimated and strengthened their abilities to rule.* From the | time of the Indian emperor Asoka in the third century B.C., | relics were closely associated with temporal power.

. in modern Sri Lanka, kingship is now a matter of past his-

f, tory. Yet pilgrimage to sacred places associated with the Bud-


(Ilia’s relics continues to be a widespread religious practice. One-| of tiie holiest shrines in Sri Lanka is the Da|ada Maligawa-f (I emple of the Tooth) in Kandy. At all times during the yeaiy|| especially during the annual Asa|a Perahara festival in July-*! August, thousands of traditional-minded Buddhists make a grimage in order to honor the Buddha’s relic. This is a brief j study of pilgrimage to Kandy and its wider significance within * the structure of Sinhalese Buddhism. i


I he Symbolism uj the Relic and its Ritual Importance $jjH

Of the several reasons lor the da(add's (tooth-relic’s) contin- <1$ ous charismatic appeal for traditional Buddhists, one of the most important is its past association with the power of Sinha* 1 ^ lese Buddhist kings.

The Dalhavattisa —written by Dhammakitti in the twelfth^ century A.D. and purportedly based upon an ancient Sinhalese:^ poem, the Daladdvatiisa —contains a mythic account 1 of how the)|B relic remained in Dantapura r> under the patronage of a longiffij line of righteous kings. According to this account, in the fouith|ra century A.D. an Indian king, Guhaslva, converted to Bud^S dhism, thereby angering the brahmapical priests of his cour^lB War followed when the priests complained to the Papcju klngaJB Pataliputra. lo insure the continued safety of the'relic, Cu rfgj haslva gave it to his daughter and son-in-law and told them to|fi| take it to Ceylon. When they arrived with the relic, the Sinha^fl lese king paid it great homage and placed it in a shrine known^S as the Dhammacakha . From that time, Buddhist kings protectedJK the tooth-relic as if its well-being constituted one of their pri^H mary responsibilities.

The Da(havavisa's account contains a number of significant^B motifs familiar to the traditional chronicles of Sri Lanka. In dbugM first instance, off-spring of a converted Indian Buddhist mon ^M arch are sent on a royal mission to take relics to Sri Lanka. Th isa B parallels the Mahdvayisa's account of how the alms-bowl ReMcM and scion of the Bodhi Tree were brought to Sri Lankaj,b y||| Mahinda and Sahghamitta during Asoka’s kingship. 6 Second^B its placement by the Sinhalese king in the Dhamma-cakka shrine M explicitly identifies the relic with the king’s duty to “rule by iS


righteousness.” 7 Third, the legend helps to sustain a national belief that the future well-being of the Buddha’s religion is in the hands of the Sinhalese people.”

An earlier account of the relic’s importance is given by the Chinese pilgrim Fa-Hien, who traveled in Ceylon during the 5lh century. By the time of Fa-Hien’s account, venerating the tooth-relic had become an auspicious means lor the king and the laity to “amass merit for themselves.” 11 Ten days bclore the king sponsored a grand procession of the relic from his palace to the Abhyagiri monastery in Anuradhapura, a royal an¬ nouncement containing a description ot the Buddha’s career as a bodhisattva was issued. The description, reminiscent of the Vessantara Jdtaka , cmphasiy.es hOw the Buddha sacrificed his entire kingdom out of compassion lor the well-being ol the world and implies that the bodhisattva career ot the Buddha had already become an ideal model for Buddhist kings to emu- | late. Thus, by the fifth century, the tooth relic seems already to

  • have become the king's own personal talisman and “palladium

| of the Sinhalese people.” 10

S ' Bardwell Smith writes that the tooth relic continued lo Ik* of immense symbolic importance to Buddhist kings during the | early medieval Polonnaruva period: “The regalia needed by j monarchs to authenticate their sovereignty included the Tooth Relic and the Alms-Bowl Relic. 'Flic suspicion or dubious lin- 1 cage that their absence implied s|K*lled the promise of dire. | consequences. When taken, they were to be retrieved at any r cost.” 11 The symbolic importance of the tooth relic for the le¬ ft gitimacy of Buddhist kingship was not lost upon the people of ft the kingdom. The king's close association with the relic under- | scored the popular belief that the king was actually a “Buddha- | ;in-the-making,” the most pious religious layman of the realm. 12 | His possession of the relic gave him access to sacral power | which, ideally, he would use for the general well-being and security of his people. In this way, “royal power was regarded |-ias ap instrument of cosmic power.'* 15

'The king's relationship to this cosmic power was graphical- ily illustrated in the ritual life of the city, a ritual life in which the H tooth relic played an important role. The capital seems to have H functioned as a sacred center, an axis mundi , from which righ- &| teous power through ritual performance was thought to be


magically radiated to the outlying provinces to insure stability and order. The king, thus, occupied a mediating position be¬ tween cosmic power and his people. Rituals and relics were magical conduits of power enabling the king to meet his pre¬ scribed royal duties.

During the Kandyan period, the king’s relationships to cos¬ mic power and to his people were brought into unparalleled high relief with the inauguration of the annual AVaja Pcrahara procession. In the middle of the eighteenth century, King Klrti Sri Rajasiipha initiated sweeping religious and political reforms that he hoped would legitimate his South Indian Nayakkar dynasty in the eyes of the Sinhalese people." Early in his reign, he reestablished orthodox lines of monastic ordination for the Asgiriya and Malwalta nikdyas (monastic chapters) in Kandy.

, Since the sahgha was also a traditional source of legitimation for Buddhist kings, the importation of Siamese monks to con¬ fer ufmumjHidd (ordination) upon aspiring Sinhalese aristo¬ cratic monks constituted a calculated move to strengthen his rule. But the move almost backfired. The Siamese became grievously offended when they witnessed the king promoting a pcrahara (procession) in which Hindu gods wre publically ven¬ erated and dignified to the exclusion of the Buddha. 15 Klrti Sri reacted to the monks' condemnation with discretion: “A new daladd (tooth relic) pcrahara was introduced into the general

• ritual'complex and was given primacy over all other perahdras. The pcrahara in this form reestablished the primacy of Bud¬ dhism within the Sinhalese religious system." 1 ®

In so doing, the king wittingly or unwittingly fused to-

• gether two powerful and ancient ritual traditions. Before the inclusion of the tooth relic into the ritual proceedings of the Asa|a Pcrahara, the ceremony consisted chiefly in the propitia¬ tion of deities who were petitioned by Hindu priests to insure the fertility and prosperity of the tealin. Although the inclusion of the daladd in the ritual proceedings may have reestablished the primacy of Buddhism, the gods were by no means banished

  • from the annual rites. Today, one of the major events of the

Asa|a festival is a ritual circumambulation of four wooden kapa (poles), which symbolizes the king’s former petitions to the gods for the kingdom’s fertility and prosperity. 17 This ritual tradi¬ tion complements the second rite of circumambulation, which


was introduced to accommodate the importance of the daladd.

In that second circumambulation, the king, with the daladd ca¬ parisoned on a royal elephant,* led a procession around the— boundaries of Kandy in a symbolic “capture” or “righteous con¬ quest.” Together, the two circumambulation rites represent a dramatic theatrical enactment of what numerous scholars refer to as “the doctrine of the exemplary center.’’"* More specilkal- ly, these rites represent an ontogeny of the king’s power, which was rooted in ritually currying favor with the gods aiul invok¬ ing the power of the Buddha. The former insured prosperity, the latter righteous political order.

When the British seized the relic during their takeover of Kandy in 1815, some Buddhists openly worried about the fu¬ ture of Buddhism, while others (including tiie British)"'.be¬ lieved that possession of the daladd would guarantee colonial hegemony. But since 1847 (when the British, under severe pressure from Christian groups in Britain as well as in Ceylon, turned over custody of the relic to the Asgiriya and Malwalta monasteries), th q^dalada has officially been regarded as a reli¬ gious object only. Thus, Wilhelm Geiger has written:

E owcr, but is the revered centre of worship for all pious >uddhists living in Ceylon and for many thousands of pilgrims who come from abroad'cach year to profess their veneration and devotion for that holy relic of the Great Master of the World. 2 "

Although Geiger’s statement is formally correct, it cannot be denied that the relic’s continued popularity is due in part to a resurgence in “civil religion” among Sinhalese Buddhists in the 19th and 20th centuries. 21 That is, the relic continues *o sym¬ bolize the traditional cultural and social values of Sinhalese culture. Government tourism officials actively promote the Asaja Pcrahara at home and abroad as a national holiday cele¬ brating indigenous customs and cultural ideality. The relic’s continued political symbolism is recognized by modern-day Sinhalese politicians, who find it expedient to participate in the da(add 's ritual procession or conspicuously to visit the Dajada Maligava. 22 It is also evident that the Asaja Pcrahara procession continues to depict symbolically the social structure ol Kandyan


society.*' What these social and political facts reF.ect is that| du[ada is a public symbol which expresses the continuing d association between religion and politics in this ccntempoi Asian society.-' -4

Therefore, pilgrimage to Kandy constitutes both a religi and political act, especially in these times when Tamil sepajjii ism appears to be regaining some momentum in Sri Lanl While it is clear that many traditional Buddhists undertake.^ pilgrimage to Kandy for purely religious reasons, and thattb religious behavior exhibits a personal devotion to the Bud< resembling that of Hindu bhakti, the entire pilgrimage coq9 plex retains something of its medieval ethos. From its partici^g pants, it commands a reverential “civitas.” Even the three dad; prayers offered by officiating bhikkhus at the Dalada M&lig§\; repcsent petitions to the Buddha for the continued moral qi^ der and prosperity of the realm.* 5 H. L. Seneviratne, wfo ’ studies of ritual life in Kandy are especially definitive, has i^ ferred to the public Asala l’erahiira performances and ritua^ life in the temple as part of a “creative and selective process”^ which a traditional culture is asserting its indigenous systems pf value and power in response to changes brought abotU modernity.* 1 That is, while significant numbers of traditiot Sinhalese have remained separated from new forms of cultut^j and social, economic and political power, pilgrimage td^Kahd remains a means to assert and maintain beliefs in iridigenou| concepts of power aiid cultural legitimation. Or, pilgrimage Kandy is a religious act affirming traditional modes of powajj used to maintain order and prosperity.


II. Pilgrimage to Kandy and the Structure of Sinhalese Buddhism

The comparative study of pilgrimage has much in con with the comparative study of religion in general. Pilgrimage! patterns arc cross-cultural, historically archaic, and persistently popular. Within these patterns both cognitive and affective fop mutations of spiritual piety may be significant for both the per? sonal and social orientations of existence. Also, while pilgrii age, like religion, can be defined in relatively simplistic termsS there is no single body of critical theory that can serve as aj

wholly adequate framework for its definitive interpretation.-

ike religion in general, pilgrimage seems to resist facile reduc¬ tions. It is no doubt true that the pilgrimage process ill general, pecially from an existential perspective, manifests a uniform ructure. Turner is largely correct in identifying that process in terms of separation, liminality and re-aggregation.* 7 More¬ over, it is equally clear that, pilgrimage, as a devotional act, can Result in a transformation or regenertion of social and religious identities. However, differing types of religious behavior ob¬ servable at various sacred places of pilgrimage also indicate that pilgrimage may not necessarily climax in “exterior mysticism,” pr in an anti-structural, convivial,' egalitarian “communitas.” 28 Rather, a comparative study of religious behavior at various pilgrimage sites indicates that certain sacred places are settings for specific types of religious behaviors, not all of which con¬ form to Turner’s notion. In the case of Kandy, 1 have charac¬ terized this behavior as reverential “civitas.” 1 will now deter¬ mine the significance of pilgrimage to Kandy first within the context of Sinhalese Buddhist religion and then within a cross* ^cultural comparative context.

While pilgrimage to Kandy sustains the ethos of the public d.’il religion formerly administered and symbolized by the presence of the king, other sacred places in Sri Lanka and India express other dominant spiritual orientations of great impor¬ tance to the Sinhalese. Bodh Gaya in India, the seal of Golama’s |enlightenment, and Sarnath, the place of the Buddha's first sermon, have been for centuries the destinations of pious Bud¬ dhist pilgrims, especially Thcravada bhikkhus. Gunawardana has pointed out that pilgrimage to sacred places in India associ¬ ated with the most important events in the life of Gotama con¬ tinuously resulted in the cross-fertilization of Thcravada Bud¬ dhist traditions during the medieval periods of Sinhalese history . 2U Then, as now, Sarnath and, especially, Bodh Gaya, are centers of Buddhist cultural integration, t More importantly, howpver, observable religious behavior at Bodh'Gaya and Sarnath has very little in common with the ritual life carried out in Kandy. At Bodh Gaya, except for the T. remnants of an Asokan gateway, signs of kingship and civil ^religion arc totally absent. There are no public pageants or ^processions celebrating ethnicity or nationalism. Here, the fo-


cus is upon the mythic events surrounding the enlightenment of the Buddha. Buddhist pilgrims, escorted either by Tibetan, Japanese, Burmese, Thai or Sinhalese monks, visit seven holy sites within the boundaries of the Mahiibodhi shrine that com¬ memorate the Buddha’s activities before, during and after his enlightenment. The emphasis, in all forms of ritual behavior at Bodh Gaya, is upon the paradigmatic spirituality of the Bud¬ dha, a spirituality which can be and has been emulated for centuries by Buddhist religious virtuosos. In each of the na¬ tional temples representing the various strands of Buddhist tradition, the lile of the Buddha is depicted cither in mural paintings or in a series of framed pictures. Thus, at Bodh Gaya, what is venerated is not the “this-worldly” power of the Buddha and the means by which that power can be utilized to sustain the moral order and prosperity of a nation, realm of kingdom. Rather, what is quietly celebrated, in meditation and com¬ memoration, is the path to nibbana through enlightenment, of which the lile'of the Buddha is a model. Therefore, in refer¬ ence to a frequently employed metaphor for describing the structure ol Thcravada Buddhism (the “two wheels of Dhamma" M> ), pilgrimage to Bodh Gaya constitutes a cultic affir¬ mation of the religious quest for an “other-worldly” nibbana. That is, in contrast to Kandy, where “this-worldly” Buddhaic power is symbolized by the tooth-relic and its association with . Sinhalese Buddhist ethnicity or nationhood, Bodh Gaya is a place of pilgrimage celebrating spiritual transcendence of the social and temporal world, the path which leads beyond condi¬ tioned, saipsaric existence. To pul it another way, Kandy is an axis muiuti for the establishment of orderly power in this world while Bodh Gaya symbolizes the Buddhist quest for liberation beyond all forms of order. Unlike pilgrims to Kandy, most pilgrims to Bodh Gaya, at least until modern times, have been bhikkhus. In the life of the Buddha and in the Bodhi Tree that symbolizes the Buddha's enlightenment, bhikkhus envisaged the possibility of their own spiritual emancipations. In the Bud¬ dha’s lile they find a personal model which inspires emulation. Here, the pilgrimage experience is one of commemorating the spiritual paradigm of the master.

But the social “this-worldly" and personal “other-worldly” orientations represented by pilgrimage to Kandy on the one

hand and pilgrimage to Bodh Gaya on the other do not exhaust all dimensions of Sinhalese Buddhist spirituality. Neither the Buddha nor the power symbolized by his relics can come to the . direct aid of those faithful experiencing an immediate personal crisis. In times of physical affliction or mental anxiety, many Buddhist laity undertake pilgrimages to the shrines of deities who, although occupying subordinate positions in relation to the Buddha, within the Sinhalese hierarchical pantheon, arc believed to have the power and disposition to respond to the fervent pleas of their faithful. In modern-day Sri Lanka, in¬ creasing numbers of Sinhalese Buddhists make pilgrimages to the shrine of Skanda, the son of Siva, also known as Murugan, or more popularly, as Kataragama. Although Kataragama is the god par excellence of the Ceylon Tamils ol the Jallnn pen¬ insula, many Sinhalese Buddhists participate in Kataragama’s annual, peralidra festival, which recalls the god’s mythic love affair with a Vedda maiden and his establishment of a shrine where he responds'to the needs of his devotees. Here, religious experience and religious behavior cannot be characterized in. terms of reverential “civitas” or commemoration of the Bud¬ dha’S 1 paradigmatic spirituality. Ralhef, the cult ol Kataragama involves an astonishing array of ascetic and exotic forms of ritual behavior, all engaged in out of either intense emotional gratitude to Kataragama for healing various afflictions, or as a means of persuading him to intervene on the devotee’s behalf. The cultic ambience at Kataragama is utterly bhakti. That is, it is decidedly emotional and devotional in tone and Ircquently culminates in states of intense ecstasy. :u Furthermore, worship here is highly personal, emphasizing the intimacy between the devotee and his god.

While Bodh Gaya represents the nibbanic orientation or model of spiritual quest ideally emulated by the Thcravada bhikkhu, and while Kandy represents the public civil religion legitimated by the presence of the tooth-relic and its past associ¬ ation with traditional power, Kataragama is a sacred place where individuals can appeal to perceived active divine power to intercede on their behalf. Kataragama is not a Buddha who has transcended saipsara, nor is he a protector ol the nation¬ state. He represents a form of sacral power that is immediately accessible to the common person in times of great personal


need. Ecstatic and petitionary devotionalism at Kataragama is thus quite different from the spirituality of the bhikkhus, ■ whose religious quests are based upon rigorous self-ellort or < spiritual discipline. Kataragama represents “other-powermanifest in “this-world.” Although the power of the tooth-relic in Kandy might also be described in this way, its power was (and is) traditionally appropriated for the general well-being of the king and thus the nation, while the power of the god Katara¬ gama is enlisted for the benefit of any individual devotee who is willing to undertake austerities of self-mortification to express deep faith.

By comparing pilgrimage to Bodh Gay& and Kataragama with pilgrimage to Kandy, we see beginning to emerge a struc¬ ture reflective of Sinhalese Buddhist religion in general, a reli¬ gion replete with varying modalities of religious experience and religious expression. That is, none of the pilgrimages can be singled out as embodying a root metaphor characteristic of the general spiritual quest of all Sinhalese Buddhists. Rather, what this comparison suggests is that there are at least three major orientations within Sinhalese religion: 1) Bodh Gaya, a pilgrimage site commemorating the enlightenment experience of the paradigmatic Gotama, represents the spiritual orienta¬ tion of the Theravada bhikkhu quest for nibb&na through- en- lightenmem; 2) Kataragama, a pilgrimage site where-access to transformative “this-worldly" sacral power is sought, represents the orientation of the faithful lay devotee for whom the enlight¬ enment quest of the bhikkhu is but a distant future possibility; and 3) Kandy, a pilgrimage site where religion legitimates a people’s religious, cultural and political past and present through civil ceremony, represents an orientation shared by bhikkhu and layman alike: a national quest to preserve and promote the religion of the Buddha and consequently to main¬ tain prosperity and moral order in society as a whole.

These three religious orientations, which are evident from this consideration of types of pilgrimage within Sinhalese reli¬ gion, arc not, however, entirely unrelated. What all three pil¬ grimages have in common is functional in nature: the need to cope with various manifestations of dukkha (suffering, unsatis- factoriness), the basic problem of human existence as perceived from within the Buddhist world view. 3 * Thus, Sinhalese rcli-

gious beliefs and practices, as they can be ascertained through a study of pilgrimages, represent complementary modes of re¬ sponse to specific aspects of the human condition. While dukkha is specified in particular fashion by individuals on the basis of their own personal experiences, types of response are in part determined by religious role (lay or monastic). From this per¬ spective, pilgrimage to Kandy is ritual participation in public ceremonies traditionally designed to avert civil, ethnic, or na¬ tional disintegration. That is, within the total field ol Sinhalese religion, mass pilgrimage to Kandy represents continued affir¬ mation of the sacralizing power of the Buddha to meet the collective material and social'needs of the people. The “emo¬ tional response” 33 of thousands of peasants to the tooth-relic’s annual procession attests to its continuing perceived efficacy as sacral power. Or finally, to phrase this another way, pilgrimage to Kandy is ari act of collective allegiance to the traditional religious way of life upon which the indigenous order of social and economic existence has been based.


III. Cross-cultural Comparisons to the Kandyan Pilgrimage

In his recent book on pilgrimage and Christian culture, Victor Turner has identified Kandy as a “prototypical" pilgrimage. By “prototypical," he means “those pilgrimages which, on the au¬ thority of documentary or widespread traditional evidence, were established by the founder of a historical religion, by his first disciples, or by important national evangelists....’’ He continues: “Such pilgrimages, though sometimes founded on ancient sites, dramatically manifest—in their symbolism, charter narratives, ecclesiastical structure, and general interna¬ tional repute—the orthodoxy of the faith from which they have sprung, and remain consistent with root paradigms.” He goes, on to cite as examples Jerusalem and Rome for Christianity, Me£ca for Islam, Benares and Ml. Kailas for Hinduism and Kandy for Buddhism. Syncretic or arcliaic pilgrimages, which constitute his second type, are distinguished from “prototypi¬ cal” pilgrimages in that they manifest “quite evident traces of syncretism with older religious beliefs and symbols.” Finally, limiting the third and fourth types of pilgrimages to examples

taken only from the Christian tradition, he distinguishes be--|8| tween “medievalpilgrimages “which take their tone from the. theological and philosophical emphasis of that epoch,” and 's|jj “modernpilgrimages which “are characterized by a highlyfjgK devotional tone and the fervent personal piety of their adher- ? ^J ents.” With further regard to modern pilgrimages, he stales 9 that they “form an important part of the system df apologetics Jp| deployed against the advancing secularization of the post-Dar-SaS winian world.”-' 1 -

'the great strength of Turner’s interpretive model and htsiH typological schema is that it attempts to ascertain the intimate'|B nature of relations which might exist between metaphor andJra ritual, belief and practice, or spiritual and social experiences.^^ By appealing to cognitive structures (myth, beliefs and their)3g metaphorical expressions) on the one hand, and their idiomatici^ ritual expression within historical and social contexts on thecal other, Turner has advanced a theoretical tour de force that is||j especially relevant to diachronic frames of-reference. r|j|

Yet, it does not necessarily follow that his classification3p schema, developed to interpret the significance of pilgrimage^ in Christian culture, is easily portable. .

In attempting to confirm Turncr*s*classification of Kandy,j8 as a “prototypical" pilgrimage, I have encountered a variety ofaB problems. For instance, Kandy scents to meet all of the criteria'll Turner cites as indicative of his last three types of pilgrimage: it9 is highly syncretic (veneration of Hindu gods forms an impor-ii tant part of the ritual proceedings), it is late medieval (havingJ| been established by Klrti Sri in the middle of the eighteenth]? century), and, as Scncviratne argues, it is an indigenous cul^l tural response to modernity. With reference to its being “protons typical,” while it is true that Kandy is regarded, especially with-1 in Sri Lanka, as a center of orthodoxy (given the presence ofl two prestigious monastic chapters), one wonders about lhe| orthodoxy of the “root paradigm" to which it is “faithful.” Whai| ritual life at Kandy does depict is the intimate relationship estab-y lished in Sri Lanka between spiritual and temporal power, or# between religion and politics and the structure of society. Pci-*§ haps this may be regarded as a “root paradigm” for a tradi|| lional public structure, but it does not really reflect a spiritual^ paradigm to be emulated personally by individual Buddhist^


Bodh Gaya bn the other hand, does, and Kataragama and oth¬ er shrines provide a complementary personal orientation for the laity. I do not mean to ignore the private orientation of pilgrimage to Kandy; but even when one takes into account that individual pilgrims petition the power of the relic for their own personal reasons, one is still left with the problem of recon¬ ciling this kind of religious behavior to the "root paradigm” of the Buddha's quest of enlightenment through self-effort. These considerations lead me to call into question the compari¬ son of Kandy to other such “prototypiad” pilgrimages.

Kandy is not a “Mecca” of the Buddhist world. While An- garika Dharmnpala once referred to Bodh Gaya as “the Bud¬ dhist Jersusalem”* 5 during his fight to return Buddhist sacred places in India to Buddhist hands, nowhere docs one find re¬ ferences within the tradition that make such grandiose claims about Kandy. More accurately, Kandy represents simulta¬ neously a sacred palce of pilgrimage anil the traditional-center of Sinhalese highland ethnicity. Kandy is not a “center out 'r there,” in the peripheral sense in which Turner coined the phrase. Rather, it has more in common with regional cultural r ccntefS in India that are also accorded sacralily due the promi- [ nent presence of a ritual symbol that evokes recurrent send- I ments of religio-cthnic heritage and autonomy legitimated by I- sacral power. In considering comparable sacrcu places, Kandy | has more in common with the Sikh center of Amritsar in the '/ Punjab with its Golden Temple, within which is housed the Guru Granlh Sahib, a symbol of God’s continuing providence. | Or again, Kandy is somewhat similar to Santa Fe, New Mexico, s; and the associated symbol of Our Lacly of Conquest.™ In both f of these examples, ritual proceedings, cither in the form of jf annual processions or in individual acts of devotion which take l place at specific shrines within the precincts of a sacred center, f celebrate the special past relationship enjoyed between a people i and the divine, however the divine is perceived. That is, sacred

( places like Kandy arc sustained in popularity because they af¬ firm the unique religio-cultural identity of a given people. Thus, the attnictive power of Kandy as a sacred place of pil- • grimage is due less to pan-Buddhist associations than to a par- . ticular people’s understanding of its special, historical relation-

ship to sacral power, which in the past insured their continued


collective legitimated existence in the face of the ambiguities of life, understood traditionally by them as dukkha.